Advanced Hybrid System

Feature Guide
Model No. KX-TEB308

Thank you for purchasing a Panasonic Advanced Hybrid System.

Please read this manual carefully before using this product and save this manual for future use.

KX-TEB308: Version 3.0

Introduction
About this Feature Guide
The Feature Guide is designed to serve as an overall reference describing the features of the Panasonic
Advanced Hybrid System.
It explains what the PBX can do, as well as how to obtain the most of its many features and facilities.
The Feature Guide is divided into the following sections:

Section 1, Call Handling Features

Describes the features of the PBX related to making and receiving calls, and operating telephones.

Section 2, System Configuration and Administration Features

Describes the features that allow the PBX to be configured and administered to suit the needs of its users.

Section 3, Programming Instructions

Serves as an overall system programming reference for the PBX.

Section 4, Appendix
Provides tables that describe the resource capacity of the PBX, as well as its different tones and ring tones.

References Found in the Feature Guide

Installation Manual References

The Installation Manual provides instructions detailing the installation and maintenance of the PBX.
Sections from the Installation Manual are listed throughout the Feature Guide for your reference.

Feature Guide References

Related sections of the Feature Guide are listed for your reference.

User Manual References

The User Manual describes how users can access commonly used PBX features and functions with their
proprietary telephones (PTs), single line telephones (SLTs), and Direct Station Selection (DSS) Consoles.
Sections from the User Manual are listed throughout the Feature Guide for your reference.

PT Programming References
Commonly used settings can be programmed using a display PT ( 2.3.2 PT Programming). These PT
programming items are noted throughout the Feature Guide for your reference by title and programme
number. The following is an example of a PT Programming reference:
"Idle extensions are automatically searched for according to a preprogrammed hunting type ( Hunting
Type [101])."

Links to Other Pages and Manuals

If you are viewing this Feature Guide with a PC, certain items are linked to different sections of the Feature
Guide and other PBX manuals. Click on a link to jump to that section.
Linked items include:
• Installation Manual References
• Feature Guide References

2 Feature Guide
 • User Manual References
• PT Programming References

Notes
• Certain PTs, features, and optional service cards are not available in some areas. Consult your certified
Panasonic dealer for more information.
• Every system programming setting can be accessed using a PC and the Panasonic KX-TEB308
Maintenance Console software ( 2.3.1 PC Programming). For programming details, refer to the on-
line help that is installed along with KX-TEB308 Maintenance Console ( 3.2.1 Installing and Starting
KX-TEB308 Maintenance Console).

Trademarks
• Microsoft and Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries.
• Intel and Celeron are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the
United States and other countries.
• All other trademarks identified herein are the property of their respective owners.

Feature Guide 3
 List of Abbreviations
A AA Automated Attendant
APT Analogue Proprietary Telephone
ARS Automatic Route Selection
B BGM Background Music
BSS Busy Station Signalling
C COS Class of Service
CPC Calling Party Control
D DIL Direct In Line
DISA Direct Inward System Access
DND Do Not Disturb
DRD Distinctive Ring Detection
DSS Direct Station Selection
DTMF Dual Tone Multi-Frequency
E EFA External Feature Access

F FWD Call Forwarding

G G-CO Group-CO

I IRNA Intercept Routing—No Answer

L LCS Live Call Screening

LED Light Emitting Diode
O O-CO Other-CO
OGM Outgoing Message
P PF Programmable Feature
PSTN Public Switched Telephone Network
PT Proprietary Telephone
S S-CO Single-CO
SLT Single Line Telephone
SMDR Station Message Detail Recording
SMS Short Message Service
T TAM Telephone Answering Machine
TRS Toll Restriction
U UCD Uniform Call Distribution

V VM Voice Mail
VPS Voice Processing System

4 Feature Guide
 Feature Highlights

Fixed Line SMS Terminal Support (Optional Caller ID card required)

The PBX can relay incoming calls from a Short Message Service (SMS) centre to specific single line
telephones (SLTs) that support SMS. Fixed Line SMS is a service that allows text messages to be sent and
received via Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) access. We recommend using SMS-enabled
Panasonic SLTs ( 1.17.3 Fixed Line SMS Terminal Support).

Caller ID Display on SLT (Optional Caller ID card required)

The PBX can receive Caller ID information (telephone numbers and callers' names) from calls received on
outside (CO) lines. This information can be shown on the displays of SLTs that support Caller ID as well as
proprietary telephones (PTs) when receiving calls ( 1.16.1 Caller ID).

3-level Automated Attendant (AA)

3-level Automated Attendant (AA) service allows a caller to dial a single-digit number (Direct Inward System
Access [DISA] AA number) following the guidance of 3-level DISA outgoing messages (OGMs), and be
connected to the desired party automatically ( 1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)).

Call Charge Calculation

The PBX can automatically calculate the approximate cost of calls and limit telephone usage to a
preprogrammed budget on each extension. This feature allows users to calculate the cost of a call based
on time, the leading digits of a phone number and/or the outside (CO) line carrying the call ( 1.20.2 Call
Charge Calculation).

PC Programming
System programming settings can be accessed using a PC and the Panasonic KX-TEB308 Maintenance
Console software as well as by using a PT ( 2.3.1 PC Programming).
The PBX software can be upgraded via the Serial Interface (RS-232C) port or USB port, using the KX-
TEB308 Maintenance Console software ( 2.3.7 Firmware Upgrade).

Automatic Configuration for Outside (CO) Line Type

The dialling mode of connected outside (CO) lines is automatically configured the first time the PBX is
accessed with a PC using the KX-TEB308 Maintenance Console software, or after the PBX data has been
cleared ( 2.3.5 Automatic Configuration for Outside (CO) Line Type).

Advanced Hybrid System

This PBX supports the connection of PTs*1, Direct Station Selection (DSS) Consoles, and single line
devices such as SLTs, fax machines, wireless telephones, and data terminals.

*1 In this manual, "proprietary telephone" ("PT") means an analogue proprietary telephone (APT).

Feature Guide 5
Table of Contents
1 Call Handling Features......................................................................... 13
1.1 Incoming Call Features..................................................................................................14
1.1.1 Incoming Outside (CO) Line Call Features ......................................................................14
1.1.1.1 Direct In Line (DIL) .......................................................................................................................................... 14
1.1.1.2 Intercept Routing ............................................................................................................................................. 15
1.1.2 Internal Call Features.......................................................................................................16
1.1.3 Incoming Call Indication Features .................................................................................... 17
1.1.3.1 Incoming Call Indication Features—OVERVIEW............................................................................................. 17
1.1.3.2 Outside (CO) Line Ringing Selection............................................................................................................... 18
1.1.3.3 Ring Tone Pattern Selection ............................................................................................................................ 19
1.1.3.4 Distinctive Ring Detection (DRD) for New Zealand ......................................................................................... 20
1.1.3.5 Call Waiting ..................................................................................................................................................... 22
1.2 Receiving Group Features ............................................................................................23
1.2.1 Idle Extension Hunting .....................................................................................................23
1.2.2 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) .......................................................................................25
1.2.3 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Ring ......................................................................28
1.2.4 Log-in/Log-out ..................................................................................................................29
1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features .............................................30
1.3.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND).................................................................30
1.3.1.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)—OVERVIEW.......................................................................... 30
1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD) .................................................................................................................................... 31
1.3.1.3 Do Not Disturb (DND)...................................................................................................................................... 34
1.4 Answering Features.......................................................................................................35
1.4.1 Answering Features .........................................................................................................35
1.4.1.1 Answering Features—OVERVIEW .................................................................................................................. 35
1.4.1.2 Line Preference—Incoming ............................................................................................................................. 36
1.4.1.3 Call Pickup....................................................................................................................................................... 37
1.4.1.4 Hands-free Answerback .................................................................................................................................. 38
1.5 Making Call Features .....................................................................................................39
1.5.1 Intercom Call Features .....................................................................................................39
1.5.1.1 Intercom Call ................................................................................................................................................... 39
1.5.2 Outside (CO) Line Call Features ......................................................................................41
1.5.2.1 Outside (CO) Line Call Features—OVERVIEW............................................................................................... 41
1.5.2.2 Emergency Call ............................................................................................................................................... 42
1.5.2.3 Account Code Entry ........................................................................................................................................ 43
1.5.2.4 Dial Type Selection .......................................................................................................................................... 44
1.5.2.5 Reverse Circuit ................................................................................................................................................ 45
1.5.2.6 CO Busy Out ................................................................................................................................................... 46
1.5.2.7 Pause Insertion................................................................................................................................................ 47
1.5.2.8 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX) .................................. 48
1.5.3 Seizing a Line Features ...................................................................................................50
1.5.3.1 Seizing a Line Features—OVERVIEW ............................................................................................................ 50
1.5.3.2 Line Preference—Outgoing ............................................................................................................................. 51
1.5.3.3 Outside (CO) Line Access ............................................................................................................................... 52
1.6 Memory Dialling Features ............................................................................................. 54
1.6.1 Memory Dialling Features ................................................................................................54
1.6.1.1 Memory Dialling Features—OVERVIEW ......................................................................................................... 54
1.6.1.2 One-touch Dialling ........................................................................................................................................... 56
1.6.1.3 KX-T7710 One-touch Dialling.......................................................................................................................... 57
1.6.1.4 Redial ............................................................................................................................................................. 58
1.6.1.5 Speed Dialling—Personal/System................................................................................................................... 59
1.6.1.6 Quick Dialling................................................................................................................................................... 60

6 Feature Guide
1.6.1.7 Hot Line ...........................................................................................................................................................61
1.7 Busy Line/Busy Party Features.................................................................................... 62
1.7.1 Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-on)............................................................................... 62
1.7.2 Executive Busy Override ................................................................................................. 63
1.7.3 Call Waiting Tone............................................................................................................. 64
1.8 Toll Restriction (TRS) Features .................................................................................... 65
1.8.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)....................................................................................................... 65
1.8.2 Toll Restriction (TRS) Override by Account Code ........................................................... 69
1.8.3 Budget Management ....................................................................................................... 71
1.8.4 Extension Lock ................................................................................................................ 72
1.8.5 Walking COS ................................................................................................................... 73
1.9 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Features ................................................................ 74
1.9.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) ................................................................................... 74
1.10 Conversation Features.................................................................................................. 80
1.10.1 Hands-free Operation ...................................................................................................... 80
1.10.2 Room Monitor .................................................................................................................. 81
1.10.3 Microphone Mute............................................................................................................. 82
1.10.4 Headset Operation .......................................................................................................... 83
1.10.5 Data Line Security ........................................................................................................... 84
1.10.6 Flash/Recall..................................................................................................................... 85
1.10.7 External Feature Access (EFA) ....................................................................................... 86
1.10.8 Outside (CO) Line Call Limitation .................................................................................... 87
1.10.9 Parallelled Telephone ...................................................................................................... 88
1.10.10 Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection ................................................................. 89
1.11 Transferring Features.................................................................................................... 90
1.11.1 Call Transfer..................................................................................................................... 90
1.12 Holding Features ........................................................................................................... 92
1.12.1 Call Hold .......................................................................................................................... 92
1.12.2 Call Park .......................................................................................................................... 94
1.12.3 Call Splitting..................................................................................................................... 95
1.12.4 Music on Hold.................................................................................................................. 96
1.12.5 Consultation Hold ............................................................................................................ 97
1.13 Conference Features..................................................................................................... 98
1.13.1 Conference Features ....................................................................................................... 98
1.13.1.1 Conference Features—OVERVIEW.................................................................................................................98
1.13.1.2 Conference ......................................................................................................................................................99
1.14 Paging Features........................................................................................................... 101
1.14.1 Paging ........................................................................................................................... 101
1.15 Optional Device Features ........................................................................................... 102
1.15.1 Doorphone Call ............................................................................................................. 102
1.15.2 Door Open ..................................................................................................................... 103
1.15.3 Doorbell/Door Chime ..................................................................................................... 104
1.15.4 Background Music (BGM) ............................................................................................. 106
1.15.5 Outgoing Message (OGM) for DISA/UCD ..................................................................... 107
1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) ............................................................................ 108
1.16 Caller ID Features ........................................................................................................ 116
1.16.1 Caller ID......................................................................................................................... 116
1.16.2 Incoming Call Log.......................................................................................................... 120
1.17 Message Features ....................................................................................................... 123
1.17.1 Message Waiting ........................................................................................................... 123
1.17.2 Absent Message............................................................................................................ 125

Feature Guide 7
 1.17.3 Fixed Line SMS Terminal Support .................................................................................126
1.18 Proprietary Telephone (PT) Features ......................................................................... 130
1.18.1 Fixed Buttons ................................................................................................................. 130
1.18.2 Flexible Buttons..............................................................................................................132
1.18.3 LED Indication................................................................................................................134
1.18.4 Display Information.........................................................................................................136
1.19 Voice Mail Features ...................................................................................................... 138
1.19.1 Voice Mail APT Integration ............................................................................................. 138
1.19.2 Voice Mail Inband (DTMF) Integration............................................................................143
1.20 Administrative Information Features ......................................................................... 146
1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording Feature ...................................................................146
1.20.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) .................................................................................................. 146
1.20.1.2 Call Log Printout for Each Extension............................................................................................................. 152
1.20.2 Call Charge Calculation .................................................................................................154
1.21 Extension Controlling Features .................................................................................. 160
1.21.1 Extension Feature Clear ................................................................................................160
1.21.2 Timed Reminder.............................................................................................................161
1.22 Audible Tone Features.................................................................................................162
1.22.1 Dial Tone ........................................................................................................................162
1.22.2 Confirmation Tone ..........................................................................................................163

2 System Configuration and Administration Features ...................... 165

2.1 System Configuration—Hardware ..............................................................................166
2.1.1 Extension Jack Configuration.........................................................................................166
2.2 System Configuration—Software ...............................................................................167
2.2.1 Class of Service (COS) ..................................................................................................167
2.2.2 Group .............................................................................................................................168
2.2.3 Time Service ..................................................................................................................170
2.2.4 Operator/Manager Features........................................................................................... 173
2.3 System Data Control....................................................................................................175
2.3.1 PC Programming............................................................................................................175
2.3.2 PT Programming ............................................................................................................178
2.3.3 Automatic Time Adjustment ........................................................................................... 180
2.3.4 Feature Numbering ........................................................................................................ 181
2.3.5 Automatic Configuration for Outside (CO) Line Type .....................................................186
2.3.6 Country Setting ..............................................................................................................187
2.3.7 Firmware Upgrade .........................................................................................................188
2.4 Fault Recovery/Diagnostics ........................................................................................189
2.4.1 Power Failure Transfer.................................................................................................... 189
2.4.2 Power Failure Restart.....................................................................................................190

3 Programming Instructions................................................................. 191

3.1 Introduction ..................................................................................................................192
3.1.1 Introduction ....................................................................................................................192
3.2 PC Programming ..........................................................................................................193
3.2.1 Installing and Starting KX-TEB308 Maintenance Console.............................................193
3.3 PT Programming ..........................................................................................................194
3.3.1 Programming Instructions ..............................................................................................194
3.3.2 Programming Procedures ..............................................................................................199
Date & Time [000].......................................................................................................................................... 199
System Speed Dialling Number [001]............................................................................................................ 199

8 Feature Guide
System Password [002] .................................................................................................................................200
DSS Console Jack Assignment [003] ............................................................................................................201
Console Paired Telephone [004]....................................................................................................................201
One-touch Transfer Using a DSS Button [005] ..............................................................................................201
Time Service Switching Mode [006] ..............................................................................................................202
Time Service Start Time [007] .......................................................................................................................202
Operator Assignment [008] ............................................................................................................................202
Extension Number [009] ................................................................................................................................203
LCD Time Display [010] .................................................................................................................................203
System Speed Dialling Name [011] ...............................................................................................................204
Second Feature Numbering Plan [012]..........................................................................................................204
KX-T7710 One-touch Dialling [013] ...............................................................................................................205
Hunting Group Set [100] ................................................................................................................................205
Hunting Type [101] .........................................................................................................................................205
DTMF Integration Port [102] ..........................................................................................................................206
DTMF Integration [103] ..................................................................................................................................206
SLT Hold Mode [104] .....................................................................................................................................206
Conference Tone [105]...................................................................................................................................206
External Pager Access Tone [106].................................................................................................................207
DTMF Receiver Check [107]..........................................................................................................................207
Flash/Recall Mode for a Locked Extension [108]...........................................................................................207
CO Indicator [109]..........................................................................................................................................207
Flash/Recall Key Mode [110] .........................................................................................................................207
Music on Hold [111] .......................................................................................................................................208
DSS Lamp Mode [112] ..................................................................................................................................208
Automatic Redial Repeat Count [113]............................................................................................................208
Automatic Redial Interval [114] ......................................................................................................................208
Extension Ring Tone Pattern [115] ................................................................................................................209
Conference Pattern [116]...............................................................................................................................209
Call Pickup Tone [117] ...................................................................................................................................209
Pulse Restriction [118]...................................................................................................................................209
Redialling after Pulse to Tone Conversion [119] ............................................................................................210
Bell Frequency [120] ......................................................................................................................................210
Automatic Line Access [121]..........................................................................................................................210
Automatic Rotation for CO Line Access [122]................................................................................................210
Break Ratio [123] ...........................................................................................................................................210
TRS Check for * and # [125] ..........................................................................................................................211
DSS Off-hook Mode [126]..............................................................................................................................211
Pickup Group [127] ........................................................................................................................................211
Ringback Tone Pattern [128]..........................................................................................................................211
VM 1 APT Port [130] ......................................................................................................................................212
SLT Ring/Silence Ratio [142] .........................................................................................................................212
SLT Ring Bell-on Time [143] ..........................................................................................................................212
SMS Centre Number for Receiving [145].......................................................................................................213
SMS Routing Table—CO [146] ......................................................................................................................213
SMS Routing Table—Extension [147]............................................................................................................213
SLT Caller ID Signalling Type [150]................................................................................................................213
SLT Caller ID Line Access Number [151] ......................................................................................................214
Automatic Time Adjustment [152] ..................................................................................................................214
Incoming Reverse [153] .................................................................................................................................214
CO Busy Out [154].........................................................................................................................................214
CO Busy Out Check Time [155].....................................................................................................................214
Call Charge Calculation—Registering Leading Numbers [161].....................................................................215
Call Charge Calculation—Time Table 1/2/3/4 [162/169/176/183] ..................................................................215
Call Charge Table 1/2/3/4—Peak Flat Charge and Duration [163/170/177/184] ...........................................215
Call Charge Table 1/2/3/4—Peak Unit Charge and Duration [164/171/178/185] ...........................................216
Call Charge Table 1/2/3/4—Off Peak Flat Charge and Duration [165/172/179/186]......................................216
Call Charge Table 1/2/3/4—Off Peak Unit Charge and Duration [166/173/180/187] .....................................216
Call Charge Table 1/2/3/4—Economy Flat Charge and Duration [167/174/181/188] ....................................217
Call Charge Table 1/2/3/4—Economy Unit Charge and Duration [168/175/182/189] ....................................217

Feature Guide 9
 Decimal Places [190]..................................................................................................................................... 217
Hold Recall Time [200] .................................................................................................................................. 218
Transfer Recall Time [201]............................................................................................................................. 218
Call Forwarding Start Time [202]................................................................................................................... 218
Hot Line Waiting Time [203] .......................................................................................................................... 218
Call Duration Counter Start [204] .................................................................................................................. 218
CO-to-CO Line Call Duration [205]................................................................................................................ 219
Dialling Start Time [206] ................................................................................................................................ 219
Hookswitch Flash Timing Range [207] .......................................................................................................... 219
Inter-digit Time [208]...................................................................................................................................... 219
DTMF Time [210]........................................................................................................................................... 219
No Dial Disconnection [211] .......................................................................................................................... 220
Extension-to-CO Line Call Duration [212] ..................................................................................................... 220
Bell-off Detection [213] .................................................................................................................................. 220
Carrier Exception Code [300] ........................................................................................................................ 220
TRS—System Speed Dialling Class [301]..................................................................................................... 221
TRS—COS 2-5 Denied Code [302-305]........................................................................................................ 221
TRS—Exception Code [306] ......................................................................................................................... 221
Emergency Number [309].............................................................................................................................. 222
Account Code [310] ....................................................................................................................................... 222
Automatic Pause Insertion Code [311] .......................................................................................................... 222
TRS—Extension Lock Class [312] ................................................................................................................ 223
ARS Selection [350] ...................................................................................................................................... 223
Route 1-4 Selection Code [351-354] ............................................................................................................. 223
Route 1-4 Exception Code [355-358] ............................................................................................................ 223
1st Carrier Selection Code [359] ................................................................................................................... 224
ARS Modification—Removed Digits [360] ..................................................................................................... 224
ARS Modification—Added Number [361] ...................................................................................................... 224
ARS Dial Tone [362] ...................................................................................................................................... 224
ARS Inter-digit Time [363] ............................................................................................................................. 225
ARS CO Line Group [364] ............................................................................................................................. 225
Route 1-4 Authorisation Code [381-384] ....................................................................................................... 225
Route 1-4 Itemised Billing [385-388] ............................................................................................................. 226
Itemised Billing Code [389]............................................................................................................................ 226
Authorisation and Itemised Billing Code Order [390]..................................................................................... 226
CO Line Connection [400] ............................................................................................................................. 227
Dial Mode [401] ............................................................................................................................................. 227
Pulse Speed [402] ......................................................................................................................................... 227
Host PBX Access Code [403]........................................................................................................................ 228
CO Line Group Number [404]........................................................................................................................ 228
Flexible Outward Dialling—Day/Night/Lunch [405-407]................................................................................. 229
Flexible Ringing—Day/Night/Lunch [408-410]............................................................................................... 229
Delayed Ringing—Day/Night/Lunch [411-413] .............................................................................................. 230
CO Line Mode—Day/Night/Lunch [414-416] ................................................................................................. 230
Pause Time [417] .......................................................................................................................................... 231
Flash/Recall Time [418]................................................................................................................................. 232
Automatic Designated Line Access [419] ...................................................................................................... 232
CPC Signal Detection—Incoming [420]......................................................................................................... 232
CPC Signal Detection—Outgoing [421]......................................................................................................... 233
Disconnect Time [422]................................................................................................................................... 233
CO Line Ring Tone Pattern [423]................................................................................................................... 234
Polarity Reverse Detection [424] ................................................................................................................... 234
Collect Call Block [425] (Brazil only).............................................................................................................. 234
Distinctive Ring Detection (DRD) [426] (New Zealand only) ........................................................................ 235
DRD Ring Pattern 2 Extension Assignment—Day/Night/Lunch [427-429] (New Zealand only).................... 235
DRD Ring Pattern 3 Extension Assignment—Day/Night/Lunch [430-432] (New Zealand only).................... 236
DRD Pattern 2 and 3 Ring Tone [433-434] (New Zealand only).................................................................... 236
Call Charge Calculation [441]........................................................................................................................ 237
Call Charge Table Assignment [442] ............................................................................................................. 237
DISA Incoming Call Dial Mode [500] ............................................................................................................. 237

10 Feature Guide
DISA Built-in AA [501]....................................................................................................................................238
FAX Connection [503] ....................................................................................................................................238
DISA Delayed Answer Time [504]..................................................................................................................238
DISA Wait Time after OGM [505]...................................................................................................................238
DISA Busy Mode [506] ..................................................................................................................................239
DISA Intercept Mode [507] ............................................................................................................................239
DISA Ring Time before Intercept [508] ..........................................................................................................239
DISA Ring Time after Intercept [509] .............................................................................................................239
DISA No Dial Mode [510]...............................................................................................................................240
DISA Security Mode [511] .............................................................................................................................240
DISA Security Code [512]..............................................................................................................................240
Cyclic Tone Detection [513] ...........................................................................................................................241
FAX Tone Detection [514] ..............................................................................................................................241
Intercept Time for Internal DISA [515] ...........................................................................................................241
DISA Incoming Assignment [516] ..................................................................................................................241
DISA AA Wait Time [517]...............................................................................................................................242
DISA Tone after Security Code [518].............................................................................................................242
OGM Mute Time [519] ...................................................................................................................................242
UCD Group [520] ...........................................................................................................................................242
UCD Busy Waiting Time [521] .......................................................................................................................242
UCD OGM Message Interval Time [522] .......................................................................................................242
UCD Busy Mode [523] ...................................................................................................................................243
UCD Intercept Mode [524] .............................................................................................................................243
UCD Ring Time before Intercept [525]...........................................................................................................243
UCD Ring Time after Intercept [526] .............................................................................................................243
UCD Waiting Message [527]..........................................................................................................................244
DISA Security Code Digits [530]....................................................................................................................244
DISA Ringback Tone [531].............................................................................................................................244
3-level AA Assignment [540-549]...................................................................................................................244
Clear All OGMs of DISA/UCD [599]...............................................................................................................245
Extension Group [600] ...................................................................................................................................245
TRS-COS—Day/Night/Lunch [601-603] ........................................................................................................245
Extension Name [604] ...................................................................................................................................246
Account Code Mode [605] .............................................................................................................................246
Call Transfer to CO Line [606]........................................................................................................................246
Call Forwarding to CO Line [607]...................................................................................................................247
Executive Busy Override [608].......................................................................................................................247
DND Override [609] .......................................................................................................................................247
Parallelled Telephone [610]............................................................................................................................248
TAM Extension [611] ......................................................................................................................................248
Room Monitor [612] .......................................................................................................................................248
CO Line Call Duration Limitation [613]...........................................................................................................249
Internal Pulse Detection [614]........................................................................................................................249
LCD Language [615]......................................................................................................................................249
Extension Name in Cyrillic [616] ....................................................................................................................250
Message Waiting for Another Extension [618] ...............................................................................................250
SLT Message Waiting [619] ...........................................................................................................................251
LCS Recording Mode Set [620] .....................................................................................................................251
BGM Control for APT [626] ............................................................................................................................252
SLT Ring Wait Time for New Call [627]..........................................................................................................252
SLT Caller ID [628].........................................................................................................................................252
SLT Fixed Bell Pattern [629] ..........................................................................................................................253
LCD Display Mode [630] ................................................................................................................................253
Doorphone Ringing—Day/Night/Lunch [700-702] .........................................................................................254
Door Opener—Day/Night/Lunch [703-705]....................................................................................................254
Doorphone Ring Tone Pattern [706] ..............................................................................................................255
Doorphone Access Tone [707].......................................................................................................................255
Doorphone Ring Time [708]...........................................................................................................................255
Door Open Duration [709]..............................................................................................................................256
Doorphone Ring/Chime [710] ........................................................................................................................256

Feature Guide 11
 Doorphone Chime Assignment [711] ............................................................................................................ 256
Doorphone Chime Pattern [712].................................................................................................................... 257
SMDR RS-232C Parameter [800].................................................................................................................. 257
SMDR Parameter [801] ................................................................................................................................. 258
Incoming/Outgoing Call Selection for Printing [802] ...................................................................................... 258
Secret Number SMDR Print Suppression [803] ............................................................................................ 258
System Data Dump [804] .............................................................................................................................. 259
SMDR Account Code [805] ........................................................................................................................... 259
SMDR Language [806] .................................................................................................................................. 259
Caller ID [900]................................................................................................................................................ 260
Caller ID Area Code [901] ............................................................................................................................. 260
Caller ID Modification for Local Calls [902].................................................................................................... 260
Caller ID Modification for Long-distance Calls [903]...................................................................................... 261
Caller ID Log Priority [904] ............................................................................................................................ 261
Caller ID Automatic 0 Addition [905].............................................................................................................. 261
Caller ID SMDR Format [906]........................................................................................................................ 262
Caller ID SMDR Printout [907] ...................................................................................................................... 262
Common Area Call Log Check [909] ............................................................................................................. 262
Caller ID Type [910] ....................................................................................................................................... 263
Currency [921] ............................................................................................................................................... 263
Call Charge Information SMDR Format 1 [922]............................................................................................. 263
Call Charge Information SMDR Format 2 [923]............................................................................................. 263
Secret Printing [924]...................................................................................................................................... 264
Budget Management [925] ............................................................................................................................ 264
Budget Limit Selection [926].......................................................................................................................... 264
Call Log Next Page [927] .............................................................................................................................. 264
SMDR Mode for Printing [929] ...................................................................................................................... 265
Call Forwarding Selection [963]..................................................................................................................... 265
TRS Check after Answering [966] ................................................................................................................. 265
TRS Check Time after Answering [967] ........................................................................................................ 266
KX-T7700 Series Incoming Lamp Control [968] ............................................................................................ 266
Country [995]................................................................................................................................................. 266
Firmware Version [998].................................................................................................................................. 266
System Data Clear [999] ............................................................................................................................... 267

4 Appendix ............................................................................................. 269

4.1 Capacity of System Resources...................................................................................270
4.1.1 Capacity of System Resources ......................................................................................270
4.2 Tones/Ring Tones.........................................................................................................272
4.2.1 Tones/Ring Tones...........................................................................................................272
4.3 Revision History...........................................................................................................278
4.3.1 Version 2.0 .....................................................................................................................278

Index .......................................................................................................... 281

12 Feature Guide
 Section 1
Call Handling Features

Feature Guide 13
1.1 Incoming Call Features

1.1 Incoming Call Features

1.1.1 Incoming Outside (CO) Line Call Features

1.1.1.1 Direct In Line (DIL)

Description
Directs incoming outside (CO) line calls to a preprogrammed destination based on the outside (CO) line
carrying the call. Each outside (CO) line can have a different destination for each time service mode.

[Programming Example]
The table can be programmed for each outside (CO) line.

Distribution method and destination*

Outside (CO) Line No.
Day Lunch Night
1 DIL 101 DIL 102 DIL 102
2 DIL 103 DIL 103 DIL 103
3 Normal – Normal – Normal –

* CO Line Mode—Day/Night/Lunch [414-416]

In this example:
If an outside (CO) line call is received on outside (CO) line 1:
a) In day mode: Direct In Line (DIL) distribution is assigned. The call is routed to its DIL destination,
extension 101.
b) In lunch/night mode: DIL distribution is assigned. The call is routed to its DIL destination, extension
102.

Conditions
• To use this feature, "DIL" must be selected as the distribution method for the desired outside (CO) line
port. When "Normal" is selected, an incoming outside (CO) line call is received at the extensions
assigned in Flexible Ringing—Day/Night/Lunch [408-410].
• This outside (CO) line can be used by multiple extension users to make calls, but can only be used by
a single extension to receive calls.
• If a DIL destination is an extension within an extension group that has enabled the Idle Extension
Hunting feature and it is busy, the Idle Extension Hunting feature becomes active ( 1.2.1 Idle
Extension Hunting).

Feature Guide References

2.2.3 Time Service

14 Feature Guide
 1.1 Incoming Call Features

1.1.1.2 Intercept Routing

Description
Redirects incoming outside (CO) line calls via the Direct Inward System Access (DISA) or Uniform Call
Distribution (UCD) feature to a preprogrammed destination when the original destination does not, or
cannot, answer the call. There are 2 types of Intercept Routing, described below.

Type Description
No Dial While or after hearing a DISA outgoing message (OGM) or after hearing a dial tone
(short beep), if the caller does not dial anything or enters an unrecognised input, the
call is redirected to preprogrammed intercept destinations ( Flexible Ringing—Day/
Night/Lunch [408-410]).
Intercept If a called party does not answer a call within a preprogrammed time period ( DISA
Routing—No Ring Time before Intercept [508], UCD Ring Time before Intercept [525]), the call is
Answer (IRNA) redirected to preprogrammed intercept destinations ( Flexible Ringing—Day/Night/
Lunch [408-410]).

Feature Guide References

1.2.2 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

Feature Guide 15
1.1 Incoming Call Features

1.1.2 Internal Call Features

Description
There are 2 types of internal calls, described below.

Feature Description Details in

Intercom Call A call from one extension to another. • 1.5.1.1 Intercom
Call
Doorphone Call A call made from a doorphone to its preprogrammed destination • 1.15.1
for the current time service mode, assigned to the doorphone's Doorphone Call
port ( 2.2.3 Time Service).

16 Feature Guide
 1.1 Incoming Call Features

1.1.3 Incoming Call Indication Features

1.1.3.1 Incoming Call Indication Features—OVERVIEW

Description
Extension telephones can indicate an incoming call in various ways, described below.

Indication Type Feature Description Details in

Ring/No Ring Outside (CO) Line Each extension can be programmed to • 1.1.3.2 Outside
Ringing Selection ring or not ring when receiving an outside (CO) Line Ringing
(CO) line call. Selection
Ring Tone Ring Tone Pattern A telephone rings when receiving a call. • 1.1.3.3 Ring
Selection A different ring tone pattern can be Tone Pattern
assigned to each incoming call type. Selection
Voice-calling Alternate Proprietary telephone (PT) users can • 1.5.1.1 Intercom
Receiving—Ring/ choose how their telephones receive Call
Voice intercom calls, by selecting to hear ring
tones or the caller's voice.
LED (Light Emitting LED Indication The LED indicators on a PT can indicate • 1.18.3 LED
Diode) the status of different lines using light Indication
patterns and colours.
Display (Caller Display Information A user's PT can show a variety of • 1.18.4 Display
Information) information on the display, such as the Information
outside (CO) line number, the caller's
name and number, the extension number
and name of the calling extension after
the call is forwarded, etc.
Tone During a Call Waiting When an extension user is in the middle • 1.1.3.5 Call
Conversation of a call, the user can be alerted to a new Waiting
call by a call waiting tone.

Feature Guide 17
1.1 Incoming Call Features

1.1.3.2 Outside (CO) Line Ringing Selection

Description
An extension user can select whether the telephone will ring or not when receiving call(s) from assigned or
all outside (CO) lines through personal programming.

Conditions
• System programming determines which extension(s) will ring for incoming outside (CO) line calls in
each time service mode ( Flexible Ringing—Day/Night/Lunch [408-410]).
• If an outside (CO) line call reaches a user's extension, but the extension is set to not ring, the CO button
will flash. The outside (CO) line call can be answered by pressing the flashing CO button.

User Manual References

3.1.2 Changing Personal Settings Using Programming Mode

18 Feature Guide
 1.1 Incoming Call Features

1.1.3.3 Ring Tone Pattern Selection

Description
A different ring tone pattern can be assigned to each incoming call type, such as intercom calls (
Extension Ring Tone Pattern [115]), calls from each doorphone ( Doorphone Ring Tone Pattern [706]),
and calls from each outside (CO) line ( CO Line Ring Tone Pattern [423]).
Available ring tone patterns are as follows:

[Ring Tone Patterns]

1s

Single

Double

Triple

S-Double*

* S-Double is available for doorphone calls only.

Conditions
• The ring tone pattern for incoming calls (intercom calls and outside (CO) line calls) to a single line
telephone (SLT) can be fixed to "Single" or "Double" for each extension through system programming
( SLT Fixed Bell Pattern [629]). The length of the ring tone pattern depends on the preprogrammed
length of the bell-on signal ( SLT Ring Bell-on Time [143]), combined with the ratio between the bell
signals of the SLT ( SLT Ring/Silence Ratio [142]). Depending on the type of SLT being used, the
SLT may not ring properly, if the ring tone pattern of the SLT is set differently from that used by the
telephone company.

Feature Guide References

1.1.3.2 Outside (CO) Line Ringing Selection
4.2.1 Tones/Ring Tones

Feature Guide 19
1.1 Incoming Call Features

1.1.3.4 Distinctive Ring Detection (DRD) for New Zealand

Description
Distinctive Ring Detection (DRD) is only available in New Zealand.
The PBX can detect the following 4 ring tone patterns sent from the telephone company for each outside
(CO) line. When the PBX detects one of the ring tone patterns, the call will be transferred to the
preprogrammed destination(s) automatically according to system programming. In addition, the extension
ring tone pattern for the detected call can be assigned through system programming as shown below.

[Ring Tone Patterns Sent from the Telephone Company]

1s

Pattern 1
(Normal)

Pattern 2
(Voice)

Pattern 3
(Modem/Voice)

Pattern 4
(Fax)

Pattern Destination assigned in Ring Tone Pattern assigned in

1 Flexible Ringing—Day/Night/Lunch [408- CO Line Ring Tone Pattern [423]
410], or sent to the Direct Inward System
Access (DISA) line or Uniform Call
Distribution (UCD) group
2 DRD Ring Pattern 2 Extension Assignment— DRD Pattern 2 and 3 Ring Tone [433-434]
Day/Night/Lunch [427-429] (New Zealand (New Zealand only)
only)
3 DRD Ring Pattern 3 Extension Assignment— DRD Pattern 2 and 3 Ring Tone [433-434]
Day/Night/Lunch [430-432] (New Zealand (New Zealand only)
only)
4 FAX Connection [503] CO Line Ring Tone Pattern [423]

Conditions
• To use this feature, "UCD", "DISA", or "Normal" must be selected as the distribution method for the
desired outside (CO) line port ( CO Line Mode—Day/Night/Lunch [414-416]) and DRD must be
enabled ( Distinctive Ring Detection (DRD) [426] (New Zealand only)).

Feature Guide References

1.2.2 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)

20 Feature Guide
 1.1 Incoming Call Features

1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

4.2.1 Tones/Ring Tones

Feature Guide 21
1.1 Incoming Call Features

1.1.3.5 Call Waiting

Description
A busy extension user can be alerted to a new call by Call Waiting. The busy extension user can then answer
the second call either by disconnecting the current call or placing it on hold.
If Call Waiting is enabled, a call waiting tone will be sent to the user under the following conditions:
a) When an outside (CO) line call or a doorphone call is received, or
b) When another extension executes the Busy Station Signalling (BSS) feature.
If disabled, a reorder tone will be sent to the extension that executed the BSS feature.

Call Waiting from the Telephone Company

Besides the Call Waiting feature provided by the PBX, you can also subscribe to your telephone company's
Call Waiting service and receive call waiting tones through the telephone company's lines. This feature is
available when an extension is in a conversation with an outside party, and a call is received from another
outside party on the same outside (CO) line. The external call waiting tone will alert an extension user of
the incoming outside (CO) line call that is waiting. The user can answer the second call by disconnecting
the current call or placing it on hold. If a call waiting tone is heard but the corresponding CO button does not
flash, this tone is an external call waiting tone from the telephone company. For details, consult your
telephone company.

Conditions
• Data Line Security
When an extension user activates Data Line Security, Call Waiting is turned off ( 1.10.5 Data Line
Security).
• Call Waiting Tone
A proprietary telephone (PT) user can select the preferred call waiting tone through personal
programming (Call Waiting Tone Type Selection).
• Caller ID Information
When an extension receives a call waiting tone, the caller's information will flash on the display for 5
seconds at 15-second intervals.

Feature Guide References

1.7.3 Call Waiting Tone
4.2.1 Tones/Ring Tones

User Manual References

1.2.4 When the Dialled Party is Busy or There is No Answer
1.4.4 Answering Call Waiting
1.7.3 Receiving Call Waiting
3.1.2 Changing Personal Settings Using Programming Mode

22 Feature Guide
 1.2 Receiving Group Features

1.2 Receiving Group Features

1.2.1 Idle Extension Hunting

Description
If a called extension is busy, Idle Extension Hunting redirects the call to an idle member of the same
extension group, if that group has been assigned as an idle extension hunting group through system
programming ( Hunting Group Set [100]). Idle extensions are automatically searched for according to a
preprogrammed hunting type ( Hunting Type [101]).
This feature is also known as Station Hunting.

Type Description
Circular Hunting An idle extension is searched for in a circular fashion one time according
to the numerical order of the jacks.
Incoming call

Busy Busy Busy

Extn.
Extn. Extn. Extn.
Numerical order

Terminated Hunting An idle extension is searched for in the numerical order of the jacks, until
reaching the extension that is connected to the highest-numbered jack in
the group.
Incoming call
Highest-
numbered jack
Busy Busy Busy
Extn.
Extn. Extn. Extn.
Numerical order

Conditions
• Idle Extension Hunting applies to:
Intercom calls and outside (CO) line calls directed to a single extension.
• An extension can belong to only one extension group ( Extension Group [600]). One hunting type
can be programmed for each extension group.
• If all the searched extensions in an idle extension hunting group are busy, a busy tone will be heard at
the extension that made the intercom call (including Direct Inward System Access [DISA] calls).
• A user can leave an idle extension hunting group temporarily by logging out of the group, and rejoin the
group by logging back in ( 1.2.4 Log-in/Log-out).
• FWD/DND Mode
When searching for an idle extension within an idle extension hunting group, any extension that has set
FWD, DND, or Log-out will be skipped ( 1.3.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)).
However, if the extension that receives the call first has set FWD or DND, Idle Extension Hunting will

Feature Guide 23
1.2 Receiving Group Features

not function and the call will be forwarded to the preprogrammed destination (when FWD is set) or will
not be received at all (when DND is set).
• Message Waiting
A message waiting indication will not be sent to an idle extension hunting destination.
The MESSAGE button light or Message/Ringer Lamp turns on at the original destination only ( 1.17.1
Message Waiting).

Feature Guide References

2.2.2 Group

24 Feature Guide
 1.2 Receiving Group Features

1.2.2 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)

Description
Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) distributes incoming calls to an idle member of the same extension group,
if that group has been assigned as a UCD group through system programming ( UCD Group [520]).
Available extensions are searched for in a circular fashion in numerical order. The UCD feature is particularly
helpful when a certain extension typically receives more calls than other extensions.

[Example of UCD Group]

The numbers found in circles below indicate calls and the order in which they arrived.

Calls arrive at the UCD group.

Queuing
When the destination extension is busy
Call Distribution or is logged out, the call waits in the
Calls are distributed in queue and a UCD OGM is sent to the
the numerical order of caller.
the jacks.

3
Extn. Extn. Extn. Extn.
A B C D

Extn. A UCD starts When the second call

receives the searching arrives at extn. B, the
first call. from extn. B third call will be
(Skips extn. A). directed to extn. C.

Feature Guide 25
1.2 Receiving Group Features

[Flowchart]

A UCD call from an outside

party is received.

The call reaches the UCD group.

Busy Rings (when an extension is available)
A
B
UCD OGM
(UCD Ring Time before
Intercept expires)
Music on Hold is sent to the caller. The call is The call is not
Rings (when an established. answered.
extension is available)
Busy
Is Intercept Routing
Did the UCD Busy Goes to B employed?
Waiting Time expire? Yes
No
Yes C
No The call is
disconnected.

The call is directed

Goes to A What is the
to another extension.
UCD Busy Mode?

(UCD Ring Time after

Intercept-Normal Disconnect Disconnect-OGM Intercept-DISA
Intercept expires)

The call is The call is not

A UCD OGM is sent established. answered.
to the caller.

The call is The call is A DISA OGM is sent The call is

Goes to C
disconnected. disconnected. to the caller. disconnected.

Goes to DISA

UCD Busy Mode

When all extensions in a UCD group are busy, a call will wait for a preprogrammed length of time ( UCD
Busy Waiting Time [521]). If this timer expires, the PBX will handle the call in one of the following ways
according to system programming ( UCD Busy Mode [523]):
a) Disconnect: The call is disconnected immediately.
b) Disconnect-OGM: The call is disconnected after a UCD outgoing message (OGM) plays (e.g.,
"We are still handling other calls. Please call back later.").
c) Intercept-Normal: The call is directed to preprogrammed destinations ( Flexible Ringing—Day/
Night/Lunch [408-410]).
d) Intercept-DISA: The call is directed to the DISA feature ( 1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access
(DISA)) and the caller hears a DISA OGM (e.g., "Thank you for calling Company A. Press 1 to
speak to Sales. Press 2 to speak to Support.").

26 Feature Guide
 1.2 Receiving Group Features

UCD Intercept Mode

When extensions in a UCD group are available but do not answer an outside (CO) line call within a
preprogrammed length of time ( UCD Ring Time before Intercept [525]), the PBX will handle the call in
one of the following ways according to system programming ( UCD Intercept Mode [524]):
a) Disconnect: The call is disconnected. If a UCD OGM is not played, the call will not be
disconnected until the caller goes on-hook.
b) Intercept: The call is directed to preprogrammed destinations ( Flexible Ringing—Day/Night/
Lunch [408-410]). The extensions that receive the redirected call ring for a preprogrammed time
period ( UCD Ring Time after Intercept [526]). When the timer expires, the call is disconnected.
If a UCD OGM is not played, the call will not be disconnected until the caller goes on-hook.

Conditions
• To use this feature, "UCD" must be selected as the distribution method for the desired outside (CO) line
port ( CO Line Mode—Day/Night/Lunch [414-416]).
• UCD OGM
It is possible to select the UCD OGM sent to the caller when a call arrives at a UCD group and all
extensions in the group are busy ( UCD Waiting Message [527]).
• The Log-in or Log-out status can be set for each extension ( 1.2.4 Log-in/Log-out). The last member
of a group cannot log out.
• FWD/DND Mode
When searching for an available extension, any extension that has set FWD—All Calls, FWD—Busy/
No Answer, or DND will be skipped ( 1.3.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)).
• UCD Busy Waiting Time
It is possible to assign the length of time ( UCD Busy Waiting Time [521]) the PBX holds an incoming
outside (CO) line call via the UCD feature when all extensions in the UCD group are busy, and to assign
the interval time between the repeated UCD OGMs ( UCD OGM Message Interval Time [522]).

Feature Guide References

1.1.1.2 Intercept Routing
1.12.4 Music on Hold
2.2.2 Group

Feature Guide 27
1.2 Receiving Group Features

1.2.3 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Ring

Description
A Direct Inward System Access (DISA) ring group is a specific extension group that receives DISA calls
directed to the group. All extensions in the DISA ring group assigned as an Automated Attendant (AA)
destination ( DISA Built-in AA [501]) ring simultaneously.

Delayed Ringing
Each extension can be programmed for Delayed Ringing ( Delayed Ringing—Day/Night/Lunch [411-
413]), which allows extensions to be alerted to calls by flashing buttons only. Received calls can be
answered by pressing the flashing button even if the extension is not ringing.

Extn. Extn. Extn. Extn.

A B C D

Immediately ring simultaneously. Delayed Ringing:

Rings after a
specified time delay.

Conditions
• To use this feature, "DISA" must be selected as the distribution method for the desired outside (CO) line
port ( CO Line Mode—Day/Night/Lunch [414-416]), and DISA AA service must be assigned as the
destination of incoming outside (CO) line calls via the DISA feature ( DISA Incoming Call Dial Mode
[500]).
• The Log-in or Log-out status can be set for each extension ( 1.2.4 Log-in/Log-out). The last member
of a group cannot log out.
• The Delayed Ringing feature does not apply to DISA or Direct In Line (DIL) calls. If the destination is a
DISA ring group, this feature will function.

Feature Guide References

1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
2.2.2 Group

28 Feature Guide
 1.2 Receiving Group Features

1.2.4 Log-in/Log-out

Description
Members of an idle extension hunting group, Direct Inward System Access (DISA) ring group, or Uniform
Call Distribution (UCD) group can join (Log-in) or leave (Log-out) groups manually. Group members can log
in at the beginning of a work shift when they are ready to answer calls, and log out at the end of the work
shift.

Conditions
• The last member of a group cannot log out.
• While logged out from a group, a member extension will not receive calls to that group via the DISA,
UCD, or Idle Extension Hunting features.
• Log-in/Log-out Button
A flexible CO button can be customised as a Log-in/Log-out button. It shows the current status as
follows:

Light Pattern Status

Red on Logged out
Off Logged in

Feature Guide References

1.2.1 Idle Extension Hunting
1.2.2 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
1.2.3 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Ring
1.18.2 Flexible Buttons

User Manual References

1.5.4 Leaving a Group (Log-in/Log-out)

Feature Guide 29
1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features

1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)

Features

1.3.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)

1.3.1.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)—OVERVIEW

Description
When an extension user cannot answer calls (is on a call, out of the office, etc.), it is possible to forward or
refuse calls directed to that extension using the following features:
1. Call Forwarding (FWD)
2. Do Not Disturb (DND)

1. FWD
Extension users can forward their incoming calls to preset destinations ( 1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding
(FWD)).
2. DND
An extension user can send a DND tone to let the caller know that he or she is not available ( 1.3.1.3
Do Not Disturb (DND)).

Conditions
• FWD/DND Button
If a proprietary telephone (PT) does not have an FWD/DND button, a flexible CO button can be
customised as an FWD/DND button.
[Button Status]
The FWD/DND button shows the current status as follows:

Light Pattern Status

Red on DND on
Slow red flashing FWD on
Off FWD/DND off

• Setting a new FWD mode, such as All Calls or Busy/No Answer, or the DND feature, clears the status
of the previous FWD mode or DND feature.

Feature Guide References

1.18.1 Fixed Buttons
1.18.2 Flexible Buttons

30 Feature Guide
 1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features

1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)

Description
Extension users can forward their calls to preset destinations. There are 4 Call Forwarding (FWD) modes,
described below.

Mode Description
All Calls All calls are forwarded to another extension.
Busy/No Answer All calls are forwarded to another extension when the extension user's
line is busy, or when the user does not answer within a preprogrammed
time period ( Call Forwarding Start Time [202]).
To Outside (CO) Line All calls are forwarded to an outside party, provided this feature is
enabled for each extension through system programming ( Call
Forwarding to CO Line [607]).
Follow Me When an extension user fails to set this feature before leaving his or
her desk, this feature can be set from the destination extension.

Forwarded to:
Extension 1. Another Extension

2. Outside Party
Incoming Intercom Calls/
Outside (CO) Line Calls 3. VPS

[Available Destinations]

Destination Availability
Extension (proprietary telephone [PT]/single line –
telephone [SLT])
Automatic Line Access no. + Phone no. Only available when FWD to Outside (CO) Line is
enabled for the extension through system
programming ( Call Forwarding to CO Line [607]).
Outside (CO) Line Group Access no. + Outside Only available when FWD to Outside (CO) Line is
(CO) Line Group no. + Phone no. enabled for the extension through system
programming ( Call Forwarding to CO Line [607]).
Voice Processing System (VPS) –

Conditions

[General]
• This feature does not apply to calls from Hold Recall, Camp-on Recall, and Timed Reminder.
• The types of calls that are forwarded by this feature are:

Feature Guide 31
1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features

Call Type
Outside (CO) line calls Normal except for FWD to Outside (CO) Line; Direct In Line (DIL);
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Intercom calls Extension, Transfer

• Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)

When searching for an available extension within a UCD group, any extension that has set FWD will be
skipped. However, if the last extension that can receive a call has set FWD, the call will be forwarded
to that extension's call forwarding destination. The last member of a UCD group cannot log out.
• When a call is forwarded, the corresponding message waiting indication is not forwarded. The
MESSAGE button light or Message/Ringer Lamp turns on only at the originally called extension (
1.17.1 Message Waiting).
• It is programmable whether the calls received on outside (CO) lines programmed as "Normal" ( CO
Line Mode—Day/Night/Lunch [414-416]) are forwarded for each extension or not ( Call Forwarding
Selection [963]). If FWD is enabled for an extension whose FWD destination is a VPS or Telephone
Answering Machine (TAM) and the extension has been assigned to ring with other extensions, the VPS
or TAM may answer the call before other extensions can answer it. To prevent this, disable FWD.
• A call can only be automatically forwarded one time. In the example below, extension A's calls are being
forwarded to extension B. If extension B tries to set FWD to extension C, the extension B user hears a
reorder tone and the setting is denied. If extension B has already set FWD to extension C, and
extension A tries to set FWD to extension B, the setting is also denied.

A A

B C B C

• The destination of an extension's forwarded calls can call or transfer calls to the original extension.

FWD—All Calls
Incoming
call

Call or
transfer a call
Original FWD destination

[Busy/No Answer]
• No Answer Time
The length of time before calls are forwarded is programmable ( Call Forwarding Start Time [202]).

[To Outside (CO) Line]

• FWD to Outside (CO) Line
System programming determines the extensions that can forward all intercom calls and certain outside
(CO) line calls to an outside party ( Call Forwarding to CO Line [607]). These outside (CO) line calls
must arrive on outside (CO) lines whose programming ( CO Line Mode—Day/Night/Lunch [414-416])
is one of the following:
a) DIL
b) DISA (only when the call is directly sent to an extension, not intercepted)

32 Feature Guide
 1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features

c) UCD (when only one member belongs to the group)

• Outside (CO) Line Call Duration
If a call between 2 outside parties is established, the call duration will be restricted by a system timer
( CO-to-CO Line Call Duration [205]). Both parties will hear a warning tone 15 seconds before the
timer expires. When the timer expires, the call is disconnected ( 1.10.8 Outside (CO) Line Call
Limitation).
• If a CPC (Calling Party Control) signal or reverse signal is received from an outside (CO) line, the
corresponding call between 2 outside parties will be disconnected.

User Manual References

1.5.1 Forwarding Your Calls (Call Forwarding [FWD])
1.8.3 If a Voice Processing System is Connected

Feature Guide 33
1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features

1.3.1.3 Do Not Disturb (DND)

Description
Extension users can use this feature to prevent calls from ringing at their extension. The calling extension
will hear a Do Not Disturb (DND) tone.

Conditions
• DND Override
An extension in DND mode can be called by extensions that are allowed to override DND through
system programming ( DND Override [609]).
• This feature does not apply to calls from Hold Recall, Camp-on Recall, and Timed Reminder.
• Calls from outside (CO) lines programmed as "Normal" or "DIL" ( CO Line Mode—Day/Night/Lunch
[414-416]) can be received at a user's extension, but the telephone will not ring. The corresponding CO
button will flash when an outside (CO) line call is received, and the user can answer the call by pressing
this button.

User Manual References

1.2.4 When the Dialled Party is Busy or There is No Answer
1.7.2 Refusing Incoming Calls (Do Not Disturb [DND])

34 Feature Guide
 1.4 Answering Features

1.4 Answering Features

1.4.1 Answering Features

1.4.1.1 Answering Features—OVERVIEW

Description
An extension user can answer incoming calls using the following methods:

Called
Feature Description Details in
Extension
A user's own Line Preference— A user can select the method to answer • 1.4.1.2 Line
extension Incoming incoming calls. Preference—
(proprietary Incoming
telephone [PT])
Direct One-touch A user can answer an incoming call simply –
Answering by pressing the flashing CO or INTERCOM
button.
Hands-free A user can answer calls automatically and • 1.4.1.4 Hands-
Answerback establish a hands-free conversation. free Answerback
A user's own Receiving Calls A user can answer an incoming call simply –
extension (single by going off-hook.
line telephone
[SLT])
Another Call Pickup A user can pick up a call to a specific • 1.4.1.3 Call
extension extension, a call within the user's extension Pickup
group, or a call received by a Telephone
Answering Machine (TAM) extension.

Feature Guide 35
1.4 Answering Features

1.4.1.2 Line Preference—Incoming

Description
A proprietary telephone (PT) user can select the method used to answer incoming calls from the following
3 line preferences.
Each of these line preferences can be selected by each extension through personal programming (Line
Preference—Incoming).

Type Description
No Line A user can select a line by pressing the desired Outside (CO) Line Access
button to answer an incoming call after going off-hook.
Prime Line A user can answer a call arriving at a flexible CO button (assigned as the
"Prime Line") simply by going off-hook.
Ringing Line (default) A user can answer a call ringing at one's own telephone simply by going
off-hook.

Conditions
• Ringing methods can be selected from among immediate, delayed, no ringing, or no incoming calls
(disable) through system programming ( Flexible Ringing—Day/Night/Lunch [408-410], Delayed
Ringing—Day/Night/Lunch [411-413]).
• A single line telephone (SLT) user can select "Ringing Line" mode only.
• A flexible CO button should be assigned as an Outside (CO) Line Access button (Single-CO [S-CO],
Group-CO [G-CO] or Other-CO [O-CO]) before selecting a line preference.
• Setting a new line preference clears the previous line preference.
• In "Prime Line" mode, if a PT user receives an incoming call on a line other than the "Prime Line", the
user must go off-hook and then press the corresponding flashing CO button to answer the call.

User Manual References

3.1.2 Changing Personal Settings Using Programming Mode

36 Feature Guide
 1.4 Answering Features

1.4.1.3 Call Pickup

Description
An extension user can answer a call ringing at another extension by entering the appropriate feature
numbers.
The following types of Call Pickup are available:

Type Description
Directed Call Pickup A call to a specific extension is answered.
Group Call Pickup A call to an extension in the same extension group ( Extension Group
[600]) is answered.
Call Retrieving from a A call received by a preprogrammed TAM extension ( TAM Extension
Telephone Answering [611]) is answered.
Machine (TAM)

Call Pickup Deny

An extension user can prevent other extensions from picking up calls ringing at his or her own extension. If
this feature is enabled, other users will hear a reorder tone when trying to pick up calls.

Conditions

[Directed/Group Call Pickup]

• Call Pickup applies to:
Intercom calls, outside (CO) line calls, and doorphone calls.
• An extension user will hear a confirmation tone when he or she picks up the call with the Directed Call
Pickup or Group Call Pickup feature. It is possible to eliminate the tone through system programming
( Call Pickup Tone [117]).
• Calls from Hold Recall and Camp-on Recall cannot be picked up with the Directed/Group Call Pickup
feature.

[Group Call Pickup]

• By setting system programming ( Pickup Group [127]) in advance, an extension user can pick up a
call to another extension in the same extension group simply by going off-hook, even if his or her
extension is not ringing.

User Manual References

1.3.3 Answering a Call Ringing at Another Telephone (Call Pickup)

Feature Guide 37
1.4 Answering Features

1.4.1.4 Hands-free Answerback

Description
A user with a speakerphone-equipped proprietary telephone (PT) can answer intercom calls automatically
without lifting the handset. When a call is received at an extension that is in Hands-free Answerback mode,
the caller hears a confirmation tone and the called extension hears a beep tone. Then the conversation is
automatically established.

Conditions
• Hands-free Answerback applies to:
Intercom calls (not including outside (CO) line calls or doorphone calls)
• When an intercom call/outside (CO) line call is transferred to an extension, this feature is overridden
and a ring tone is heard.

Feature Guide References

1.5.1.1 Intercom Call

User Manual References

1.3.2 Answering Hands-free (Hands-free Answerback)

38 Feature Guide
 1.5 Making Call Features

1.5 Making Call Features

1.5.1 Intercom Call Features

1.5.1.1 Intercom Call

Description
An extension user can call another extension user.

Conditions
• Extension Number/Name Assignment
Extension numbers ( Extension Number [009]) and names ( Extension Name [604], Extension
Name in Cyrillic [616]) can be assigned to all extensions. During intercom calls, the number and name
of the other extension are shown on the displays of proprietary telephones (PTs).
• DSS Button
It is possible to call another extension simply by pressing the corresponding Direct Station Selection
(DSS) button ( DSS Off-hook Mode [126]). A flexible CO/DSS/MESSAGE button can be customised
as a DSS button.
The DSS buttons on a DSS Console can also be used.
• Alternate Receiving—Ring/Voice
A PT user can select to receive intercom calls by ring tone or by voice, through personal programming
(Alternate Receiving—Ring/Voice). If a user selects voice-calling, the calling party can talk to the user
immediately after hearing a confirmation tone.
• Alternate Calling—Ring/Voice
A caller can change the called party's preset call receiving method (ring tone or voice). By doing so,
ring-calling is switched to voice-calling, or vice versa, at the called party. This setting is active for the
current call only, after which it reverts to the called party's previous setting.
• The extension ring tone pattern for incoming intercom calls can be selected through system
programming ( Extension Ring Tone Pattern [115]). The ringback tone pattern for outgoing intercom
calls and for incoming outside (CO) line calls can also be selected through system programming (
Ringback Tone Pattern [128]).
• Tone after Dialling
After dialling an extension number, a user will hear one of the following:

Type Description
Ringback Tone Indicates the call is being received at the called party's extension.
Confirmation Tone Indicates the called party has set voice-calling.
Busy Tone Indicates the called party's extension is busy.
DND Tone Indicates the called party has set Do Not Disturb (DND).

Feature Guide References

1.18.2 Flexible Buttons
4.2.1 Tones/Ring Tones

Feature Guide 39
1.5 Making Call Features

User Manual References

1.2.1 Basic Calling
1.2.5 Switching the Calling Method (Alternate Calling—Ring/Voice)
3.1.2 Changing Personal Settings Using Programming Mode

40 Feature Guide
 1.5 Making Call Features

1.5.2 Outside (CO) Line Call Features

1.5.2.1 Outside (CO) Line Call Features—OVERVIEW

Description
An extension user can use the following features when making an outside (CO) line call:

Feature Description Details in

Emergency Call A user can dial preprogrammed emergency • 1.5.2.2 Emergency
numbers regardless of the restrictions imposed on Call
the extension.
Account Code Entry A user can enter an account code to identify • 1.5.2.3 Account
outgoing calls for accounting and billing purposes. Code Entry
Pulse to Tone Conversion A user can temporarily switch from Pulse mode to • 1.5.2.4 Dial Type
DTMF (Dual Tone Multi-Frequency) mode if Selection
necessary.
Pause Insertion A dialling pause can be manually inserted by • 1.5.2.7 Pause
pressing the PAUSE button, or can be Insertion
automatically inserted after a user-dialled code, • 1.5.2.8 Host PBX
such as a Host PBX Access code or Automatic Access Code
Pause Insertion code. The length of the pause can (Access Code to the
be specified through system programming. Telephone Company
from a Host PBX)

Feature Guide 41
1.5 Making Call Features

1.5.2.2 Emergency Call

Description
An extension user can dial preprogrammed emergency numbers ( Emergency Number [309]) after
seizing an outside (CO) line regardless of the restrictions imposed on the extension.

Conditions
• If the PBX is installed behind an existing host PBX, an extension user must dial the Host PBX Access
code after the Outside (CO) Line Access number.
• This feature will function even when:
– In Account Code—Verify-All/Verify-Toll/Forced mode ( 1.5.2.3 Account Code Entry)
– Restricted by the current class of service (COS) ( 1.8.1 Toll Restriction (TRS))
– The total of call charges has reached a specified budget limit ( 1.8.3 Budget Management)
– In Extension Lock ( 1.8.4 Extension Lock)

42 Feature Guide
 1.5 Making Call Features

1.5.2.3 Account Code Entry

Description
An account code is used to identify outgoing outside (CO) line calls for accounting and billing purposes.
Account codes are appended to SMDR call records ( 1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording Feature),
and have several uses. For example, a firm can use an account code for each client to determine which calls
were made for which client, and can submit a bill to the client according to the client's account code as
shown on the SMDR call record.
There are 4 methods of entering account codes, explained below. One method is assigned to each
extension through system programming ( Account Code Mode [605]).

Mode Description
Option An extension user can (but is not required to) enter a 4-digit account code
during a conversation or within 30 seconds after a conversation ends
when a record is needed.
Forced An extension user must always enter a 4-digit account code within 5
seconds after seizing an outside (CO) line. This method ensures that
extension users will not forget to enter account codes.
Verify-All An extension user must always enter a preprogrammed account code (
Account Code [310]) within 5 seconds after seizing an outside (CO) line.
If the entered code does not match any preprogrammed code, the user
will hear a reorder tone.
Verify-Toll An extension user can enter a preprogrammed account code ( Account
Code [310]) within 5 seconds after seizing an outside (CO) line to override
TRS ( 1.8.2 Toll Restriction (TRS) Override by Account Code). Classes
of service (COSs) 3 through 5 will be changed temporarily to COS 2.
COSs 1 and 2 will not be affected. If the entered account code is also
registered as an extension password, the extension password feature will
be given priority. The COS of the corresponding extension will be applied.

Conditions
• An account code can be stored in Memory Dialling (One-touch Dialling, Hot Line, Speed Dialling—
System/Personal, Call Forwarding (FWD) to Outside (CO) Line, etc.). In this case, the Account Code
feature number and specified account code must be entered after the Outside (CO) Line Access
number.
• An extension user does not need to enter an account code for incoming outside (CO) line calls.
• Even in Forced/Verify-All/Verify-Toll mode, emergency calls can be made without an account code (
1.5.2.2 Emergency Call).

User Manual References

1.2.1 Basic Calling

Feature Guide 43
1.5 Making Call Features

1.5.2.4 Dial Type Selection

Description
The dialling mode can be selected for each outside (CO) line through system programming ( Dial Mode
[401]) regardless of the originating extension (dependent on the contract with the telephone company).

Mode Description
DTMF (Dual Tone Multi- Numbers dialled by an extension user are transmitted to the outside (CO)
Frequency) line using tones. If this PBX is installed behind an existing host PBX,
select this mode as necessary. If your telephone company or a host PBX
can receive both DTMF and Pulse signals but the contract specifies
DTMF lines, select this mode.
Pulse (Rotary) Numbers dialled by an extension user are transmitted to the outside (CO)
line using pulses.
Call Blocking If your telephone company or a host PBX can receive both DTMF and
Pulse signals but the contract specifies Pulse lines, select this mode.
When dialling with a touch-tone telephone, only Pulse signals will be sent
to the telephone company.

Conditions
• Automatic Configuration for Outside (CO) Line Type
The dialling mode of connected outside (CO) lines is automatically assigned after restarting the PBX
using the System Clear Switch or through system programming ( System Data Clear [999]). No
system programming in Dial Mode [401] and Pulse Speed [402] is required unless the dialling mode of
the connected outside (CO) lines is Call Blocking. If your telephone company can receive both DTMF
and Pulse signals, the PBX selects an outside (CO) line type according to the following priority:
DTMF Pulse (High) Pulse (Low)
• Pulse to Tone Conversion
It is possible for an extension user to temporarily switch from Pulse mode to DTMF mode in order to
access special services such as computer-accessed long-distance calling or voice mail services. To
switch to DTMF mode, wait for a preprogrammed time period after the outside (CO) line is connected,
or press the " #" key. This feature functions only on outside (CO) lines set to "Pulse" or "Call Block"
mode ( Dial Mode [401]). DTMF mode cannot be changed to Pulse mode.
• The pulse rate for outside (CO) lines that have been set to "Pulse" or "Call Block" mode ( Dial Mode
[401]) should be selected depending on your telephone company or a host PBX. There are 2 pulse
rates: Low (10 pps) and High (20 pps) ( Pulse Speed [402]).
• It is possible to assign the minimum duration of the DTMF signal sent to outside (CO) lines that have
been set to "DTMF" mode ( DTMF Time [210]).
• It is programmable whether DTMF dialling is sent to the telephone company when an extension user
redials after changing from Pulse mode to DTMF mode by pressing the " #" key ( Redialling after
Pulse to Tone Conversion [119]).

User Manual References

1.4.9 Changing the Dialling Mode (Pulse to Tone Conversion)

44 Feature Guide
 1.5 Making Call Features

1.5.2.5 Reverse Circuit

Description
The PBX can detect the reverse signal sent from the telephone company when an extension user tries to
make an outside (CO) line call. This detects the start (the called party goes off-hook) and end (the called
party goes on-hook) of an outgoing outside (CO) line call. The duration of the call can be verified with SMDR
using this feature ( 1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording Feature).
This feature is also known as Polarity Reverse Detection.

Conditions
• If Reverse Signal Detection is enabled for an outside (CO) line ( Polarity Reverse Detection [424]),
the PBX will start the call duration counter ( Call Duration Counter Start [204]) immediately after the
outside party answers the call.

Feature Guide 45
1.5 Making Call Features

1.5.2.6 CO Busy Out

Description
The PBX can monitor the loop current sent through outside (CO) lines, preventing users from seizing lines
where a loop current is not detected. When loop currents are not detected, outside (CO) lines are set to
Busy Out status, and cannot be used to make calls ( CO Busy Out [154]). An outside (CO) line in Busy
Out status cannot be selected for making a call by Automatic Line Access or Outside (CO) Line Group
Access, or by using the Other-CO (O-CO) button. If a user tries to seize an outside (CO) line set to Busy
Out status, the user will hear a reorder tone and a message is shown on the display of the Proprietary
Telephone (PT).
This is useful if some or all outside (CO) lines are occasionally unavailable because of problems with the
external telecommunications environment.

Conditions
• Loop current detection is performed on active outside (CO) lines whenever the line is seized and/or at
a preprogrammed time every day.
• By performing loop current detection at a preprogrammed time every day ( CO Busy Out Check Time
[155]), or pressing the corresponding Single-CO (S-CO) button on a PT, an outside (CO) line can be
returned to in-service status once a loop current is detected. Also, selecting "Disable" in CO Busy Out
[154] returns all outside (CO) lines to in-service status.
• Incoming calls can be received on outside (CO) lines set to Busy Out status. In this case, Busy Out
status is cleared.
• Busy Out status is maintained even when the PBX is restarted.

46 Feature Guide
 1.5 Making Call Features

1.5.2.7 Pause Insertion

Description
A dialling pause of a preprogrammed length can be inserted manually or automatically when dialling.
Manual Pause Insertion: A pause can be manually inserted by pressing the PAUSE button.
Automatic Pause Insertion: A pause will be automatically inserted after the user dials any one of the
following numbers:
a) Outside (CO) Line Access number
b) Automatic Pause Insertion code
c) Host PBX Access code ( 1.5.2.8 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone
Company from a Host PBX))

Conditions
• The pause length is programmable for each outside (CO) line ( Pause Time [417]).
• When a dialled telephone number matches one of the Automatic Pause Insertion codes assigned
through system programming ( Automatic Pause Insertion Code [311]), a pause will be automatically
inserted after the code. This is particularly convenient if a second dial tone is sent from your telephone
company.
• This feature functions for Speed Dialling, One-touch Dialling, Last Number Redial, Saved Number
Redial, Hot Line, and Call Forwarding (FWD)—To Outside (CO) Line, as well as for normal calls.

Feature Guide 47
1.5 Making Call Features

1.5.2.8 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone

Company from a Host PBX)

Description
This PBX can be installed behind an existing host PBX. This is performed by connecting extension jacks of
the host PBX to outside (CO) line ports of this PBX. A Host PBX Access code, assigned through system
programming ( Host PBX Access Code [403]), is required to access the telephone company from the host
PBX. The Outside (CO) Line Access number (9/0*1, or 81 through 83) of the host PBX should be stored as
a Host PBX Access code for each outside (CO) line of this PBX. A pause of a preprogrammed length (
Pause Time [417]) will be automatically inserted after the user-dialled Host PBX Access code.
[Example]

Telephone Company

Host PBX Access Code

for PBX, or Automatic Line
Access No. for Host PBX: 0

Host PBX
Outside Party
(01-23-4567)

Automatic Line
Access No.: 9
Extn. 101 Extn. 102
Outside (CO)
line 1 Dials "0-01-23-4567".
Host PBX
PBX Access Code
Telephone
No.

Dials "9-0-01-23-4567". Dials "9-101".

Automatic Line Telephone No. Automatic Line
Access No. Access No.
Host PBX Extn. No.
Access Code of the Host PBX

Note
In this example, "0" should be assigned as the Host PBX Access code for outside (CO) line 1 of this
PBX.

*1 For New Zealand, the Automatic Line Access number may be either 1 or 9.

48 Feature Guide
 1.5 Making Call Features

Conditions
• Access to the host PBX during a conversation is also possible ( 1.10.7 External Feature Access
(EFA)).
• TRS
TRS checks only the dialled telephone number, excluding the Host PBX Access code, when accessing
the telephone company through the host PBX ( 1.8.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)).
• SMDR
The Host PBX Access code can be logged by SMDR along with the dialled number when accessing
the telephone company through the host PBX ( 1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording Feature).

Feature Guide 49
1.5 Making Call Features

1.5.3 Seizing a Line Features

1.5.3.1 Seizing a Line Features—OVERVIEW

Description
A proprietary telephone (PT) user can select the line that is seized in order to make a call, using one of the
following features:

Feature Description Details in

Line Preference—Outgoing A user can select the line to be seized when going off- • 1.5.3.2 Line
hook. Preference—
Outgoing
Outside (CO) Line Access A user can select the Outside (CO) Line Access • 1.5.3.3 Outside
method used when making outside (CO) line calls. (CO) Line Access

50 Feature Guide
 1.5 Making Call Features

1.5.3.2 Line Preference—Outgoing

Description
Through personal programming, a proprietary telephone (PT) user can select the preferred method of
seizing a line (Line Preference—Outgoing) to be used each time the user goes off-hook.

Method Description
Idle Line When a user goes off-hook, an idle outside (CO) line is selected
automatically from among the assigned outside (CO) lines ( Automatic
Designated Line Access [419]).
No Line When a user goes off-hook, no line is selected. In order to make a call,
the user must select the desired line manually.
Prime Line When a user goes off-hook, the preset line is selected automatically.

Conditions
• A flexible CO button should be assigned as an Outside (CO) Line Access button (Single-CO [S-CO],
Group-CO [G-CO], or Other-CO [O-CO]) before selecting a line preference.
• Setting a new line preference clears the previous line preference.
• Line Preference Override
A user can override the preset line preference temporarily by pressing the desired Outside (CO) Line
Access button or INTERCOM button before going off-hook.
• System programming determines the extension users that can make outside (CO) line calls in each
time service mode ( Flexible Outward Dialling—Day/Night/Lunch [405-407]).
• It is possible to specify which outside (CO) lines are connected to the PBX ( CO Line Connection
[400]). This prevents extension users from trying to select or making calls using outside (CO) lines that
are not connected.

User Manual References

3.1.2 Changing Personal Settings Using Programming Mode

Feature Guide 51
1.5 Making Call Features

1.5.3.3 Outside (CO) Line Access

Description
There are 3 methods of accessing an outside (CO) line.

Method Description Operation

Automatic Line Access Selects an idle outside (CO) line Dial the Automatic Line Access
(Local Access) automatically from the assigned number (9/0)* ( Automatic Line
outside (CO) lines ( Automatic Access [121]).
Designated Line Access [419]).
If Idle Line Preference ( 1.5.3.2 Note
Line Preference—Outgoing) is set on *For New Zealand, the
the extension through personal Automatic Line Access
programming, the user can access an number may be either 1 or 9.
idle line simply by going off-hook.
Outside (CO) Line Group Selects an idle outside (CO) line from Dial the Outside (CO) Line Group
Access the corresponding outside (CO) line Access number and an outside
group. (CO) line group number, or press a
Group-CO (G-CO) button.
S-CO Line Access Selects the desired outside (CO) line Press the Single-CO (S-CO)
directly. button.

Line Access Using the Other-CO (O-CO) Button

To select an idle outside (CO) line from among the outside (CO) lines that are not assigned to S-CO or G-
CO buttons, the proprietary telephone (PT) user can press the O-CO button.

Conditions
• The PBX waits for a preprogrammed length of time ( Dialling Start Time [206]) after seizing an
outside (CO) line before dialling.
• Button Assignment
A flexible CO button can be customised as an S-CO, G-CO, or O-CO button as follows:

Type Assignable parameter

Single-CO (S-CO) A specified outside (CO) line is assigned (Default: CO 1–CO 3).
Group-CO (G-CO) An outside (CO) line group is assigned ( CO Line Group Number
[404]).
Other-CO (O-CO) Outside (CO) lines that are not assigned to S-CO or G-CO buttons
are assigned.

The same outside (CO) line group can be assigned to more than one G-CO button on the same PT.
The same outside (CO) line can be assigned to an S-CO button and a G-CO button.
Dialling the Outside (CO) Line Access number selects a CO button according to the following priority:
S-CO G-CO O-CO
Once a flexible CO button is assigned as an Outside (CO) Line Access button, it indicates line status
with a variety of light patterns ( 1.18.3 LED Indication).
• Direct Outside (CO) Line Access
If a PT user is on-hook when pressing an idle CO button, the PT automatically enables hands-free

52 Feature Guide
 1.5 Making Call Features

operation mode. The user can dial without lifting the handset or pressing the SP-PHONE or MONITOR
button.
• Outside (CO) Line Hunting Order for Automatic Line Access
The outside (CO) line hunting sequence (from highest-numbered outside (CO) line, or in rotation) for
Automatic Line Access can be determined through system programming ( Automatic Rotation for CO
Line Access [122]).
• System programming determines the extension users that can make outside (CO) line calls in each
time service mode ( Flexible Outward Dialling—Day/Night/Lunch [405-407]).
• It is possible to specify which outside (CO) lines are connected to the PBX ( CO Line Connection
[400]). This prevents extension users from trying to select or making calls using outside (CO) lines that
are not connected.

Feature Guide References

1.18.2 Flexible Buttons

User Manual References

1.2.1 Basic Calling

Feature Guide 53
1.6 Memory Dialling Features

1.6 Memory Dialling Features

1.6.1 Memory Dialling Features

1.6.1.1 Memory Dialling Features—OVERVIEW

Description
An extension user can store frequently dialled numbers in the PBX. A stored number can be dialled by a
simple operation.

1. Features

Feature Storage Method Details in

One-touch Dialling Personal Programming • 1.6.1.2 One-
touch Dialling
KX-T7710 One-touch Dialling System Programming • 1.6.1.3 KX-
T7710 One-touch
Dialling
Redial Last Number The last or most recently dialled number is • 1.6.1.4 Redial
automatically stored.
Saved While in a conversation with an outside party or
Number while hearing a busy tone, the current telephone
number can be manually stored and redialled
afterwards.
Speed Personal Personal Programming with the Feature Number • 1.6.1.5 Speed
Dialling Dialling—
System System Programming
Personal/System
Quick Dialling System Programming • 1.6.1.6 Quick
Dialling
Hot Line Personal Programming with the Feature Number • 1.6.1.7 Hot Line
Incoming Call Log Caller ID information is automatically stored. • 1.16.2 Incoming
Call Log

2. Valid Input

Displayed while
Input Description
Entering

0–9/ /# 0–9/ /# Store digits, , and # by pressing the

corresponding buttons.
PAUSE (Pause) P Store a dialling pause by pressing the PAUSE
button ( 1.5.2.7 Pause Insertion).

54 Feature Guide
 1.6 Memory Dialling Features

Displayed while
Input Description
Entering
FLASH/RECALL F Store an EFA signal (EFA mode) by pressing the
(Hooking)*1 FLASH/RECALL button at the beginning of the
number ( 1.10.7 External Feature Access
(EFA)).
INTERCOM (Secret)*1 [ or ] Prevent all or part of a System Speed Dialling
number or One-touch Dialling number from being
displayed when a call is made, by pressing the
INTERCOM button at the beginning and at the
end of the number to be hidden (Secret Dialling).
It is programmable whether the hidden part will
be shown on SMDR ( 1.20.1 Station Message
Detail Recording Feature).
CONF (Hyphen)*2 - Store a hyphen by pressing the CONF button.

*1 Available only when in system/personal programming mode

*2 Available only when in system programming mode

[Example of Secret Dialling]

When storing the number "91234567890", to prevent the telephone number "1234567890" from being
displayed when making a call:

Enter 9 INTERCOM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 INTERCOM .

Notes
• The characters for secret code, "[" and "]" (entered by pressing the INTERCOM button), are
counted as one digit each.
• It is not possible to hide the Outside (CO) Line Access number (9/0*, or 81 through 83) by
pressing the INTERCOM button before dialling it.
* For New Zealand, the Automatic Line Access number may be either 1 or 9.

Conditions
• Outside (CO) Line Access by Memory Dialling (One-touch Dialling/System Speed Dialling)
A specific Outside (CO) Line Access number can be stored along with the telephone number in Memory
Dialling. However, if Memory Dialling is performed after selecting an outside (CO) line, the stored
Outside (CO) Line Access number is ignored and the telephone number is sent using the selected
outside (CO) line.

Feature Guide 55
1.6 Memory Dialling Features

1.6.1.2 One-touch Dialling

Description
A proprietary telephone (PT) user can make a call or access a feature with a one-touch operation. This is
possible by storing the number (up to 24 digits), such as an extension number, telephone number, account
code, or feature number, as a One-touch Dialling button.

Conditions
• One-touch Dialling Button
A flexible CO/Direct Station Selection (DSS)/Programmable Feature (PF)/MESSAGE button can be
customised as a One-touch Dialling button.
• A number consisting of 25 digits or more can be stored by dividing it and storing it as 2 separate One-
touch Dialling buttons. In this case, the Outside (CO) Line Access number should be stored in the first
button.
• Speed Dialling, One-touch Dialling, and manual dialling can be used in combination.
• Personal Speed Dialling numbers (0 through 9) correspond to the numbers (F1 through F10) of the PF
buttons assigned as One-touch Dialling numbers.
Assigning a One-touch Dialling number to PF button "F1" will override Personal Speed Dialling number
"0", and vice versa.

Feature Guide References

1.18.2 Flexible Buttons

User Manual References

1.2.2 Easy Dialling

56 Feature Guide
 1.6 Memory Dialling Features

1.6.1.3 KX-T7710 One-touch Dialling

Description
The MESSAGE button and each of the 8 One-touch buttons on the KX-T7710 single line telephone (SLT)
can be customised to dial an extension number, telephone number, or feature number (up to 24 digits) when
the user presses that button. To allow easy configuration of multiple extensions, every KX-T7710 connected
to the PBX can be customised with the same settings at once, through system programming ( KX-T7710
One-touch Dialling [013]). This is useful for hotel room extensions or similar applications.
The KX-T7710 has 2 modes, "NORMAL" mode and "PBX" mode, selected by a switch on the telephone.
This feature is available only when the KX-T7710 is in "PBX" mode.

[Programming Example: KX-T7710 One-touch Dialling]

Location No. Button Desired Number

1 One-touch Dial 01 100 (Front Desk)
2 One-touch Dial 02 76XX (Wake-up Call)
3 One-touch Dial 03 102 (Restaurant)
(Cont.) : : :
: : :
9 MESSAGE 784#

Conditions
• System programming determines the SLTs that can receive the message waiting notifications left by
another extension ( SLT Message Waiting [619]).
• If a user goes off-hook with an SLT that has messages waiting, a special dial tone (dial tone 3) will be
heard. The user can call a caller back or listen to the message simply by pressing the MESSAGE button
because the button includes the default value of Message Waiting Answer feature number.
• Any feature number can be stored in a One-touch button. However, the feature numbers for Personal
Speed Dialling, System Speed Dialling, and Quick Dialling do not function.
• KX-T7710 One-touch Dialling is available to users while hearing a dial tone.
• KX-T7710 One-touch Dialling is not available to users when the KX-T7710 is connected in parallel with
a proprietary telephone (PT).
• Please refer to the Quick Reference Guide of the KX-T7710 for additional information.

Feature Guide References

1.18.2 Flexible Buttons

Feature Guide 57
1.6 Memory Dialling Features

1.6.1.4 Redial

Description
There are 2 types of Redial, described below.

Type Description
Last Number Redial Every extension automatically saves the last external telephone number
dialled, allowing the same number to be easily redialled.
Saved Number Redial A proprietary telephone (PT) user can save a telephone number while in
a conversation with an outside party or while hearing a busy tone, and
then easily redial the number later. The saved number is kept until a new
number is stored.

Automatic Redial
If Last Number Redial or Saved Number Redial is performed in hands-free mode and the called party is
busy, the number will be automatically redialled a preprogrammed number of times ( Automatic Redial
Repeat Count [113]) at a preprogrammed interval ( Automatic Redial Interval [114]). This feature is only
available on PT models that have an SP-PHONE or MONITOR button.

Conditions

[General]
• Up to 64 digits plus the Outside (CO) Line Access number can be stored and redialled for each Redial
type.
• Automatic Redial is cancelled if any other number is dialled, or if an incoming call is answered.
• Headset users cannot use the Automatic Redial feature.
• Automatic Redial is not available for some countries/areas.

[Last Number Redial]

• The stored telephone number is replaced whenever a new number is dialled.

[Saved Number Redial]

• Save Button
A flexible CO button can be customised as a Save button.

Feature Guide References

1.18.2 Flexible Buttons

User Manual References

1.2.3 Redialling

58 Feature Guide
 1.6 Memory Dialling Features

1.6.1.5 Speed Dialling—Personal/System

Description
An extension user can use short numbers to frequently dialled numbers that are stored in the PBX, either
in the extension's Personal Speed Dialling or in System Speed Dialling.
Personal Speed Dialling is also known as Station Speed Dialling.

Conditions

[General]
• Any number, such as a telephone number or feature number, can be stored in Personal Speed Dialling
(up to 24 digits) and System Speed Dialling (up to 32 digits).
• This feature is not available on rotary single line telephones (SLTs).

[Personal Speed Dialling]

• Personal Speed Dialling numbers (0 through 9) correspond to the numbers (F1 through F10) of the
Programmable Feature (PF) buttons assigned as One-touch Dialling numbers.
Assigning a One-touch Dialling number to PF button "F1" will override Personal Speed Dialling number
"0", and vice versa.
• An SLT user can check the stored number by exchanging the SLT with a PT. PF buttons (F1 through
F10) correspond to Personal Speed Dialling numbers (0 through 9). Press the desired PF button to
check the number.

[System Speed Dialling]

• TRS for System Speed Dialling ( TRS—System Speed Dialling Class [301])
Calls made using System Speed Dialling are restricted depending on the class of service (COS) of
System Speed Dialling numbers and the COS assigned to each extension ( 1.8.1 Toll Restriction
(TRS)).
• System Speed Dialling numbers ( System Speed Dialling Number [001]) and names ( System
Speed Dialling Name [011]) can be assigned through system programming. The assigned name will be
shown on the display of a proprietary telephone (PT) when an extension user makes calls using this
feature.
• Caller's Name
If the dialled number matches a number stored in the System Speed Dialling table with an assigned
name, the assigned name will be shown on the display ( 1.16.1 Caller ID).
• System Speed Dialling, One-touch Dialling, and manual dialling can be used in combination.

User Manual References

1.2.2 Easy Dialling
3.3.2 System Programming

Feature Guide 59
1.6 Memory Dialling Features

1.6.1.6 Quick Dialling

Description
Using Quick Dialling, an extension user can make a call or access a feature easily. This is possible by storing
the number (up to 10 digits), such as extension number, telephone number, or feature number, for Quick
Dialling through system programming ( Second Feature Numbering Plan [012]).

[Programming Example: Quick Dialling]

Code No. Desired Number

50 #34
51 #43
(Cont.) : :
: :
59 912345678

In this example:
a) The feature number for Paging—External, "#34", is stored with the code number "50". Users can
make paging announcements by going off-hook and then dialling "50".
b) The feature number for Paging—Answer, "#43", is stored with the code number "51". Users can
answer paging announcements by going off-hook and then dialling "51".
c) A telephone number, "912345678", is stored with the code number "59". Users can call this outside
number by going off-hook and then dialling "59".

Conditions
• This feature is available when "Plan 2" or "Plan 3" is selected in Extension Number [009] ( 2.3.4
Feature Numbering).

User Manual References

1.2.2 Easy Dialling

60 Feature Guide
 1.6 Memory Dialling Features

1.6.1.7 Hot Line

Description
A single line telephone (SLT) user can make an outgoing call to a previously stored telephone number (up
to 32 digits) simply by going off-hook. If the Hot Line feature is set and the user goes off-hook, a special dial
tone (dial tone 2) is generated for a preprogrammed time period ( Hot Line Waiting Time [203]), and then
dialling starts. During this waiting time, the user can dial another party, overriding the Hot Line feature.
This feature is also known as Pickup Dialling.

Conditions
• This feature cannot be programmed on rotary SLTs.
• This feature will not function when the extension user goes off-hook to answer an incoming call or
retrieve a call on hold.

User Manual References

1.2.2 Easy Dialling

Feature Guide 61
1.7 Busy Line/Busy Party Features

1.7 Busy Line/Busy Party Features

1.7.1 Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-on)

Description
If the dialled extension or outside (CO) line is busy when a call is made, the caller can choose to be informed
by a callback ring (Camp-on Recall) when the extension or outside (CO) line becomes free.
When the user answers the callback ring:
For an intercom call: The called extension starts ringing without the user having to redial.
For an outside (CO) line call: The line is seized.

Conditions
• If the callback ring is not answered within 10 seconds (4 rings), the callback is cancelled.
• More than one extension user can set this feature to monitor the same destination extension or outside
(CO) line at the same time.

User Manual References

1.2.4 When the Dialled Party is Busy or There is No Answer

62 Feature Guide
 1.7 Busy Line/Busy Party Features

1.7.2 Executive Busy Override

Description
An extension user can interrupt an existing call to establish a 3-party conference call.

Executive Busy Override Deny

It is possible for extension users to prevent their calls from being interrupted by another extension user.

Conditions
• System programming determines extension users who can use Executive Busy Override ( Executive
Busy Override [608]).
• This feature will not function when the busy extension has set Executive Busy Override Deny or Data
Line Security ( 1.10.5 Data Line Security).
• When a 2-party conversation is changed to a 3-party conference call, a confirmation tone will be sent
to all parties ( 1.13.1.2 Conference). It is possible to eliminate the tone through system programming
( Conference Tone [105]).

User Manual References

1.2.4 When the Dialled Party is Busy or There is No Answer
1.7.4 Preventing Other People from Joining Your Conversation (Executive Busy Override Deny)

Feature Guide 63
1.7 Busy Line/Busy Party Features

1.7.3 Call Waiting Tone

Description
When an extension user attempts to call a busy extension (i.e., an extension that is ringing or having a
conversation), a call waiting tone will be sent to the called extension to indicate another call is waiting.

Conditions
• This feature functions only if the called extension has activated Call Waiting. If it is activated, the calling
extension will hear a ringback tone.
• One of 2 call waiting tones (Tone 1 or Tone 2) can be selected through personal programming (Call
Waiting Tone Type Selection). For doorphone calls, Tone 1 is used as a call waiting tone (not
changeable). Tone 2 depends on the assignments in CO Line Ring Tone Pattern [423] for outside (CO)
line calls and in Extension Ring Tone Pattern [115] for intercom calls.

Feature Guide References

1.1.3.5 Call Waiting
4.2.1 Tones/Ring Tones

User Manual References

3.1.2 Changing Personal Settings Using Programming Mode

64 Feature Guide
 1.8 Toll Restriction (TRS) Features

1.8 Toll Restriction (TRS) Features

1.8.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)

Description
Toll Restriction (TRS) can prohibit certain extension users from making unauthorised outside (CO) line calls.
Every extension is assigned to one of 5 classes of service (COSs) for each time service mode ( TRS-
COS—Day/Night/Lunch [601-603]); COS 1 grants the highest level of authorisation, allowing all outside
(CO) line calls to be made, and COS 5 grants the lowest level of authorisation. COSs 2 through 5 are used
to restrict calls with a combination of preprogrammed Denied and Exception Code Tables, explained below.

Denied Code Tables ( TRS—COS 2-5 Denied Code [302-305])

Denied Code Tables are preprogrammed lists containing the telephone numbers that are restricted. All
outgoing outside (CO) line calls made by COS 2 through 5 users are compared to the applicable Denied
Code Table(s), and when the leading number of a dialled telephone number (not including the Outside (CO)
Line Access number) matches an entry found in an applicable table, the call is denied.
Up to a total of 80 denied codes, each consisting of up to 11 digits, can be stored.

Exception Code Tables ( TRS—Exception Code [306])

Exception Code Tables are preprogrammed lists of leading digits or complete telephone numbers that are
checked against every dialled number prohibited by a Denied Code Table. When a dialled number is
prohibited by a Denied Code Table, it is compared to the applicable Exception Code Table(s). If the dialled
number matches an entry found in an applicable Exception Code Table, the call is permitted.
Up to 80 exception codes, each consisting of up to 11 digits, can be stored. The available number of codes
depends on the COS assigned to each extension.

Applicable tables by COS

The Denied Code Tables and Exception Code Tables that apply to each COS are listed below.

COS No. Denied Code Tables Exception Code Tables

No restriction. No restriction.
1
(Not Programmable) (Not Programmable)
20 denied codes programmed in [302]. 80 exception codes (code numbers 01–80)
2 (Table for Class 2) programmed in [306].
(Tables for Classes 2 through 5)
40 denied codes programmed in [302] and 60 exceptions codes (code numbers 01–60)
3 [303]. programmed in [306].
(Tables for Classes 2 and 3) (Tables for Classes 3 through 5 )
60 denied codes programmed in [302] 40 exception codes (code numbers 01–40)
4 through [304]. programmed in [306].
(Tables for Classes 2 through 4) (Tables for Classes 4 and 5)
80 denied codes programmed in [302] 20 exception codes (code numbers 01–20)
5 through [305]. programmed in [306].
(Tables for Classes 2 through 5) (Table for Class 5)

Feature Guide 65
1.8 Toll Restriction (TRS) Features

COS 1 All outside (CO) line calls permitted.

COS 2 Class 2 restriction Class 2 – 5 exceptions

COS 3 Class 2 – 3 restrictions Class 3 – 5 exceptions

COS 4 Class 2 – 4 restrictions Class 4 – 5 exceptions

COS 5 Class 2 – 5 restrictions Class 5 exception

Calls are restricted Calls are permitted

TRS for System Speed Dialling ( TRS—System Speed Dialling Class [301])
Calls made using System Speed Dialling are restricted depending on the COS of System Speed Dialling
numbers and the COS assigned to each extension. If, for example, the COS of System Speed Dialling
numbers is assigned as "2", the PBX will allow System Speed Dialling calls for the extensions with COSs 1
and 2, but not allow System Speed Dialling calls for the extensions with COSs 3, 4, and 5 according to TRS
as follows:

System Speed Dialling Class

COS No.
1 2 3 4 5
1

Permitted

66 Feature Guide
 1.8 Toll Restriction (TRS) Features

[Flowchart]

An extension user tries to make

an outside (CO) line call.

Was the number dialled using Yes

System Speed Dialling?

No
Yes Is the COS number higher
than the System Speed
Dialling Class?

No or Equal
COS 1
What is the COS number?

COSs 2–5

Is the dialled number found in an No

applicable Denied Code Table?

Yes

Is the dialled number found in an Yes

applicable Exception Code Table?

No

The call is denied. The call is permitted.

The user hears a reorder tone.

Conditions
WARNING
The software contained in the TRS feature to allow user access to the network must be upgraded to
recognise newly established network area codes and exchange codes as they are placed into
service.
Failure to upgrade the on-premise PBXs or peripheral equipment to recognise the new codes as
they are established will restrict the customer and users of the PBX from gaining access to the
network and to these codes.
KEEP THE SOFTWARE UP TO DATE WITH THE LATEST DATA.

• Emergency numbers, such as the police or fire services, should be stored ( Emergency Number
[309]) so that they are not barred by TRS.
• Host PBX Access Code/Carrier Exception Code
TRS checks can be carried out on telephone numbers dialled using a Host PBX Access code (

Feature Guide 67
1.8 Toll Restriction (TRS) Features

1.5.2.8 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX)) or Carrier
Exception code.

Access Code is stored in the PBX

Access Code is not
Access Code Type Access Code is not
Access Code is dialled stored in the PBX
dialled
Host PBX Access TRS ignores the code Number dialled is not an TRS checks the entire
Code*1 and checks the outside (CO) line call, so number.
remaining digits. TRS does not check the
number.
Carrier Exception TRS ignores the code TRS checks the entire TRS checks the entire
Code*2 and checks the number. number.
remaining digits.

*1 Host PBX Access Code [403]

*2 Carrier Exception Code [300]

• The inter-digit timer ( Inter-digit Time [208]) applies until the TRS check is completed. When the timer
expires, the outgoing outside (CO) line call is disconnected while dialling, if enabled through system
programming ( No Dial Disconnection [211]). For a single line telephone (SLT), an outgoing outside
(CO) line call will be released from the DTMF (Dual Tone Multi-Frequency) receiver when the inter-digit
timer expires.
• TRS—Extension Lock Class
The COS of extensions locked by the Extension Lock or Remote Extension Lock feature ( 1.8.4
Extension Lock) can be assigned ( TRS—Extension Lock Class [312]) so that even a locked
extension can make outside (CO) line calls. The higher COS number will take precedence. If, for
example, COS 3 is assigned to an extension ( TRS-COS—Day/Night/Lunch [601-603]) and the COS
of locked extensions is assigned as "4", when the extension is locked, the PBX allows the extension
user to make outside (CO) line calls using COS 4.
• The PBX can also be programmed to perform a TRS check for numbers that contain nondigits ( or #)
( TRS Check for * and # [125]). If TRS check is disabled, the PBX ignores any nondigits that are
dialled when checking, which is useful in preventing some unauthorised calls.

Feature Guide References

1.6.1.5 Speed Dialling—Personal/System
2.2.1 Class of Service (COS)

68 Feature Guide
 1.8 Toll Restriction (TRS) Features

1.8.2 Toll Restriction (TRS) Override by Account Code

Description
An extension user can override TRS temporarily to make a toll call from a toll-restricted telephone ( 1.8.1
Toll Restriction (TRS)). The extension user can carry out this feature by entering the appropriate account
code before dialling the telephone number ( Account Code [310]).

[Flowchart]

TRS Override by Account

Code is attempted.

Option/
Forced Verify–All
What is the account code mode?

Verify–Toll

Does the entered Yes Does the entered

account code match an extension account code match a stored
password? account code?
Yes
No No

No Does the entered

account code match a stored
account code?

Yes

Yes
Is the COS number "1"?

No

The call is established The call is established with The call is denied.
with COS 2. the COS number of the The user hears a reorder tone.
corresponding extension.

The COS number

remains the same as that
of the extension being used.

Feature Guide 69
1.8 Toll Restriction (TRS) Features

Conditions
• This feature functions only for extensions whose:
– Account code mode is set to "Verify-Toll" ( Account Code Mode [605]).
– Class of service (COS) number is set to 3 through 5.
• If the extension user does not enter an account code or enters an invalid account code, an ordinary
TRS check is performed.
• System programming determines whether SMDR ( 1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording
Feature) logs the 4-digit account code or the 2-digit index of the account code when an extension user
makes a call using this feature ( SMDR Account Code [805]).
• It is also possible to override TRS at another extension using the Walking COS feature ( 1.8.5
Walking COS).

Feature Guide References

1.5.2.3 Account Code Entry

70 Feature Guide
 1.8 Toll Restriction (TRS) Features

1.8.3 Budget Management

Description
Limits telephone usage to a preprogrammed budget on each extension ( Budget Management [925]). If
the total of call charges reaches the limit, the extension user cannot make further outside (CO) line calls.
An extension assigned as the manager can increase the limit or clear the previous call charges through
manager programming.

Conditions
• Budget Limit Selection
The method of limiting calls can be selected through system programming ( Budget Limit Selection
[926]):
a) Enable (Disconnect the call after the beeps): 3 sets of 3 beeps will be heard before an outside
(CO) line call is disconnected due to budget limitation. The first set of beeps will be heard when
the call reaches the last 3 units of remaining time. The call is disconnected as soon as the budget
limit is reached, at the start of the final unit of time.
b) Disable (From the next call): The current call is not disconnected but other outside (CO) line calls
cannot be made once the call has finished.
• Even when the call charge is set to "0" ( 1.20.2 Call Charge Calculation), calls cannot be made if the
budget limit of an extension has been reached. However, any numbers programmed as Emergency
Numbers can be dialled regardless of this ( Emergency Number [309]).
• When an extension user makes an outside (CO) line call with multiple outside parties simultaneously
(for example, using the conference call feature), the extension's total remaining budget will not be
divided by each outside (CO) line call. This may cause the total of call charges to exceed the budget
limit.

Feature Guide References

1.20.2 Call Charge Calculation

User Manual References

3.2.2 Managing Call Logs and Call Charges

Feature Guide 71
1.8 Toll Restriction (TRS) Features

1.8.4 Extension Lock

Description
Extension users can lock their telephones to prevent unauthorised use. This is useful for situations when
extension users must leave their desks temporarily. Any 4-digit code can be used to lock and unlock an
extension.
This feature is also known as Electronic Station Lockout.

Conditions
• Remote Extension Lock
An extension assigned as the operator or manager extension can remotely lock or unlock an extension
using a Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console. This feature functions only if the operator or manager
has set the extension password. When the operator or manager locks an extension remotely, the
extension's user cannot unlock it. When a user locks an extension, the operator or manager extension
can override the lock and unlock the extension.
This feature is also known as Remote Station Lock Control.
• TRS—Extension Lock Class
The class of service (COS) of extensions locked by the Extension Lock or Remote Extension Lock
feature can be assigned ( TRS—Extension Lock Class [312]) so that even a locked extension can
make outside (CO) line calls. The higher COS number will take precedence. If, for example, COS 3 is
assigned to an extension ( TRS-COS—Day/Night/Lunch [601-603]) and the COS of locked
extensions is assigned as "4", when the extension is locked, the PBX allows the extension user to make
outside (CO) line calls using COS 4.
• Extension Lock—CANCEL ALL
The operator or manager can cancel this feature for all extensions simultaneously.
• Extension Lock Button
A flexible DSS button on a DSS Console can be customised as an Extension Lock button.
• This feature also functions as Incoming Call Log Display Lock ( 1.16.2 Incoming Call Log).
The Incoming Call Log for the common area can only be locked or unlocked by the operator or manager.
• This feature will not block Emergency Calls ( 1.5.2.2 Emergency Call).

Feature Guide References

1.8.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)
1.18.2 Flexible Buttons

User Manual References

1.5.3 Preventing Other People from Using Your Telephone (Extension Lock)
2.1.1 Locking Other Extensions (Remote Extension Lock)
2.1.6 Changing System Settings Using Programming Mode
3.1.3 Customising the Buttons

72 Feature Guide
 1.8 Toll Restriction (TRS) Features

1.8.5 Walking COS

Description
Extension users can temporarily assign their own class of service (COS) to another extension, allowing
them to make calls as if from their own telephones.
This feature is useful when a manager or supervisor needs to borrow another employee's telephone to make
a call. The superior enters the extension password followed by the Walking COS feature number and his or
her extension number, and then makes the call. The same privileges and restrictions normally applied to a
user are applied when using Walking COS.

Conditions
• When making a call with Walking COS, the extension number of the Walking COS user's extension is
also logged by SMDR ( 1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording Feature).

Feature Guide References

2.2.1 Class of Service (COS)

User Manual References

1.2.6 Using Your Calling Privileges at Another Extension (Walking COS)
2.1.6 Changing System Settings Using Programming Mode

Feature Guide 73
1.9 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Features

1.9 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Features

1.9.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

Description
The PBX automatically selects the least expensive route (carrier) available at the time a long-distance call
is made on an outside (CO) line that has Automatic Route Selection (ARS) enabled. In order to use ARS
effectively, various ARS-related tables must be preprogrammed to tell the PBX which calls should be placed
using which carriers.

74 Feature Guide
 1.9 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Features

[Flowchart]

A long-distance
call is made.
A

Is (another) one digit

dialled within the ARS
Inter-digit Time?
No
Yes

Each time a digit is dialled, the PBX checks

the dialled number (other than Host PBX Is the dialled Yes
number a TRS Denied Code? Reorder tone
Access codes, Carrier Exception codes, and
First Carrier Access code).
No

Is the dialled number an The dialled number is sent to

Emergency Call number? the telephone company.
Yes
No

Is the dialled number Yes

Reorder tone
a TRS Denied Code?

No

*1
Does the dialled Yes The dialled number (other than the First Carrier
number include the First Carrier Access code) is sent to the telephone company.
Access code?

No

Checks the Routing Plan Table (1–4)

to determine which carrier to use.

*2 *3 *4
Does the leading Yes Does the leading Digits are removed
No
number match the Route 1–4 number match the Route 1–4 from the dialled
Selection Code? Exception Code? number as required.

Yes
No
*5
Digits are added to
the dialled number
Are 7 digits
as required.
(other than Host PBX
Access codes, Carrier Exception
codes, and First Carrier Access
*6
code) dialled? The corresponding
No Routing Plan Table
Yes is selected.

The dialled number is sent

Goes to A
to the telephone company.

Feature Guide 75
1.9 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Features

[Programming Procedures]
1. ARS Mode ( ARS Selection [350])
Turn on ARS for each outside (CO) line.

2. First Carrier Access Code*1

Enter the carrier's access code, such as the Host PBX Access code ( Host PBX Access Code [403]),
Carrier Exception code ( Carrier Exception Code [300]), or First Carrier Access code ( 1st Carrier
Selection Code [359]). For example, if the dialled number is "000-93-425-9477" and the First Carrier
Access code is assigned as "000", the modified number is "93-425-9477". Consult your carrier for more
information.

3. Routing Plan Table

Leading Number*2 ( Route 1-4 Selection Code [351-354])
Store the leading numbers of telephone numbers that should be routed by ARS.
Leading Number Exception*3 ( Route 1-4 Exception Code [355-358])
Store the telephone numbers that will bypass ARS here.
Note that the Outside (CO) Line Access number is always ignored by ARS and does not need to be
programmed here.
Calls that are exempt from ARS are connected via the default carrier for that line.
Removed Number of Digits*4 ( ARS Modification—Removed Digits [360])
There may be circumstances where the user-dialled number must be modified in order for the carrier
to connect the call. In this case, store the number of digits to be removed automatically from the
beginning of the dialled number here.
Added Number*5 ( ARS Modification—Added Number [361])
Store the number to be added automatically to the beginning of the dialled number here.
ARS Outside (CO) Line Group*6 ( ARS CO Line Group [364])
When making outside (CO) line calls using the Automatic Line Access number (9/0)*, assign the outside
(CO) line group(s) for each Routing Plan number here.
An outside (CO) line belonging to the assigned outside (CO) line group(s) is automatically seized when
making calls using the Automatic Line Access number, and the dialled number is applied to one of the
Routing Plan numbers.

Note
* For New Zealand, the Automatic Line Access number may be either 1 or 9.

First
Local Call
Carrier

Second 050
Carrier (Long-distance Call)
Outside
(CO) Line Mobile
Jack
PBX Third 05000
Carrier (International Call)
1 2 3

Group 1 Group 2

76 Feature Guide
 1.9 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Features

[Programming Example: Routing Plan Table]

Modification
Routing Leading Leading No. ARS Outside (CO)
Plan No. No.*1 Exception*2 Removed No. Added No.*4 Line Group*5
of Digits*3
1 4,5 07 0 050 All
2 9,0 07 0 050 1
3 07 Not Stored 2 05000 1
4 6 Not Stored 0 Not Stored 2

*1 Route 1-4 Selection Code [351-354]

*2 Route 1-4 Exception Code [355-358]
*3 ARS Modification—Removed Digits [360]
*4 ARS Modification—Added Number [361]
*5 ARS CO Line Group [364]

In this example:

Dialled Number Modified Number Description

9-43-425-9477 050-43-425-9477 A long-distance call is made using Routing Plan 1
when the Automatic Line Access number is
assigned to "9".
9-54-123-4567 050-54-123-4567 A long-distance call is made using Routing Plan 1
when the Automatic Line Access number is
assigned to "9".
9-93-425-9477 050-93-425-9477 A long-distance call via outside (CO) line group 1
is made using Routing Plan 2.
9-04-123-4567 050-04-123-4567 A long-distance call via outside (CO) line group 1
is made using Routing Plan 2.
9-07-81-92-477-1450 050-00-81-92-477-1450 An international call via outside (CO) line group 1
is made using Routing Plan 3.
9-6-123456 6-123456 A mobile telephone call via outside (CO) line
group 2 is made using Routing Plan 4.

4. Authorisation Code & Itemised Billing Code Table

Authorisation Code ( Route 1-4 Authorisation Code [381-384])
An Authorisation code for each carrier can be assigned for each outside (CO) line, if required by the
carrier. The registered codes are not shown on proprietary telephone (PT) displays or System Data
Dump printouts ( System Data Dump [804]) after programming, but "Already Set" will be shown
instead.
Itemised Billing Code ( Itemised Billing Code [389])
An Itemised Billing code can be assigned for each extension. It is possible to add the Itemised Billing
code assigned to an extension to the Authorisation code for the carrier for each outside (CO) line
through system programming ( Route 1-4 Itemised Billing [385-388]).

Feature Guide 77
1.9 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Features

Sequence of Transmitted Code ( Authorisation and Itemised Billing Code Order [390])
The sequence of transmitted codes (C: Carrier Access Code; A: Authorisation Code; I: Itemised Billing
Code; H: Telephone Number) can be selected. When "C.I.A.H" is selected, the dialled numbers of
Itemised Billing Code (I) and Authorisation Code (A) are shown on the displays of PTs and SMDR (
1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording Feature).

[Programming Example: Authorisation & Itemised Billing Code Table]

Modification
Routing Leading Authorisation
Removed Added No. Itemised Billing*2
Plan No. No. Code*1
No. of Digits
1 8 0 11223344 0123456789 Enable (on CO 1/2)
(on CO 1/2) (Itemised Billing Code:
Extn. 101)
2 5 0 11223344PPPP 67890123456 Enable (on CO 1)
#012345 789 (on CO 1) (Itemised Billing Code:
(PPPP: 6 s, Extn. 101)
#: Pulse to
Tone Conversion
( 1.5.2.4 Dial
Type Selection))

*1 Route 1-4 Authorisation Code [381-384]

*2 Route 1-4 Itemised Billing [385-388]

In this example:

Dialled Number Modified Number Description

9-893-425-9477 Pulse*1 Tone
A call via provider
(Extn. 101) access is made using
11223344-P*2-0123456789-101-893-425-9477 Routing Plan 1 when the
Automatic Line Access
Added No. Authorisation Itemised Telephone number is assigned to
Code Billing Code No. "9".
The Authorisation code
Pulse*1 ( Dial Mode [401]) and the Itemised Billing
P (Pause)*2 ( Pause Time [417]) code are transmitted in
tone mode.
The pause time is
automatically inserted
before entering the
Authorisation code.
9-593-425-9477 Pulse Tone A call via provider
(Extn. 101) access is made using
11223344-PPPP-012345-P-67890123456789-101-593-425-9477
Routing Plan 2 when the
Automatic Line Access
Added No. Authorisation Itemised Telephone number is assigned to
Code Billing Code No. "9".

78 Feature Guide
 1.9 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Features

Conditions
WARNING
The software contained in the ARS feature to allow user access to the network must be upgraded to
recognise newly established network area codes and exchange codes as they are placed into
service.
Failure to upgrade the on-premise PBXs or peripheral equipment to recognise the new codes as
they are established will restrict the customer and users of the PBX from gaining access to the
network and to these codes.
KEEP THE SOFTWARE UP TO DATE WITH THE LATEST DATA.

• ARS Inter-digit Time

The inter-digit time used while the PBX is checking the dialled number for the ARS feature can be
specified through system programming ( ARS Inter-digit Time [363]).
• TRS
TRS checks are performed before ARS number modification, so programme TRS Denied Code Tables
and Exception Code Tables accordingly ( 1.8.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)).
• If an extension user makes calls using the Automatic Line Access number, and the leading number of
a dialled telephone number does not match any entries found in the Leading Number, an outside (CO)
line enabled in Automatic Designated Line Access [419] is automatically seized.
• The PBX checks the number repeatedly until 7 digits have been dialled.
• If an extension user makes an outside (CO) line call by directly pressing a Single-CO (S-CO), Group-
CO (G-CO), or Other-CO (O-CO) button or by dialling an assigned Outside (CO) Line Group Access
number, and the seized outside (CO) line has been enabled in ARS Selection [350], the call is made
with the ARS feature.

Feature Guide 79
1.10 Conversation Features

1.10 Conversation Features

1.10.1 Hands-free Operation

Description
A proprietary telephone (PT) user can talk to another party without lifting the handset. Pressing specific
buttons automatically activates hands-free mode.

Conditions
• PTs with the MONITOR Button
PTs with the MONITOR button can dial in hands-free mode but cannot have hands-free conversations.
• Hands-free mode is cancelled if an extension user does not start dialling within 10 seconds.
• This feature can be used by pressing the following buttons when the indicator of the SP-PHONE/
MONITOR button is off:
– SP-PHONE button
– MONITOR button
– INTERCOM button
– CO button

User Manual References

1.4.8 Talking to Another Party without Lifting the Handset (Hands-free Operation)

80 Feature Guide
 1.10 Conversation Features

1.10.2 Room Monitor

Description
An extension user can monitor a room or a door through another proprietary telephone (PT) or a doorphone
without the destination party knowing.

Conditions
• To monitor using this feature, an extension must have a PT with an AUTO ANS/MUTE button or a single
line telephone (SLT) with a MUTE button. To be monitored using this feature, an extension must have
a PT with an AUTO ANS/MUTE button.
• System programming determines the extensions that can be monitored using this feature ( Room
Monitor [612]).
• A doorphone access tone will be sent to a monitored doorphone before monitoring starts ( 1.15.1
Doorphone Call). If an extension user wants to monitor a doorphone without informing the other party,
it is possible to eliminate the tone through system programming ( Doorphone Access Tone [707]).
• Access tones will not be sent to a monitored PT. Paging tones will also not be received by a monitored
PT.

User Manual References

1.7.9 Monitoring a Room (Room Monitor)

Feature Guide 81
1.10 Conversation Features

1.10.3 Microphone Mute

Description
During a conversation, a proprietary telephone (PT) user can disable the built-in microphone to consult
privately with others in the room while listening to the other party on the phone through the built-in speaker.
When Microphone Mute is active, the user can hear the other party's voice, but the user's voice is muted.

Conditions
• This feature is only available on PTs that have an AUTO ANS/MUTE button.

User Manual References

1.4.6 Muting a Microphone (Microphone Mute)

82 Feature Guide
 1.10 Conversation Features

1.10.4 Headset Operation

Description
This PBX supports headset-compatible proprietary telephones (PTs). A PT user can talk to another party
without lifting the handset by using an optional headset.
For connection and operation, refer to the Operating Instructions for the headset.
This feature is also known as Handset/Headset Selection.

Conditions
• Headset users cannot use the Automatic Redial feature ( 1.6.1.4 Redial).
• To set headset mode on a PT, use the handset/headset selector located on the telephone and/or on the
headset.
• If headset mode is on, pressing the SP-PHONE button activates the headset, not the built- in speaker.

User Manual References

1.4.7 Using the Headset (Headset Operation)

Feature Guide 83
1.10 Conversation Features

1.10.5 Data Line Security

Description
Once Data Line Security is set on an extension, communication between the extension and the other party
is protected from signals such as Call Waiting, Hold Recall, and Executive Busy Override. Extensions that
have devices such as modems, fax machines, or Voice Processing Systems (VPSs) connected to them may
set this feature to maintain secure data transmission, by blocking tones or other interruptions during
communication.

User Manual References

1.7.6 Protecting Your Line against Notification Tones (Data Line Security)

84 Feature Guide
 1.10 Conversation Features

1.10.6 Flash/Recall

Description
A proprietary telephone (PT) user can use the FLASH/RECALL button to disconnect the current call and
start another call without hanging up. For example, if this button is used to disconnect an outside (CO) line,
the extension user will hear a new dial tone from the same outside (CO) line.

Conditions
• FLASH/RECALL Button Mode
One of the following modes can be selected through system programming ( Flash/Recall Key Mode
[110]):
a) MODE 1: EFA mode ( 1.10.7 External Feature Access (EFA))
An EFA signal is sent for the specified duration ( Flash/Recall Time [418]).
b) MODE 2: Flash/Recall mode
A flash/recall signal is sent when the FLASH/RECALL button is pressed if the length of time that
the button is pressed is longer than the specified duration ( Flash/Recall Time [418]). If the
length of time that the button is pressed is shorter than the specified duration, an EFA signal will
be sent for the specified duration.
• This feature functions only if the FLASH/RECALL button is set to "MODE 2: Flash/Recall mode".
• Disconnect Time
The amount of time between successive accesses to the same outside (CO) line is programmable for
each outside (CO) line ( Disconnect Time [422]).
• Pressing the FLASH/RECALL button restarts the conversation duration, outputs an SMDR call record
( 1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording Feature) and checks the Toll Restriction (TRS) class of
service (COS) number again. The notation "F/" will be logged along with the new dial number on SMDR.

Feature Guide 85
1.10 Conversation Features

1.10.7 External Feature Access (EFA)

Description
An extension user can access features of a host PBX or the telephone company, such as Call Waiting. An
EFA (External Feature Access) signal is sent to the host PBX or the telephone company. This feature is only
available during outside (CO) line calls, including Host PBX Access ( 1.5.2.8 Host PBX Access Code
(Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX)).

Conditions
• This feature functions only if the FLASH/RECALL button is set to "MODE 1: EFA mode" ( 1.10.6
Flash/Recall). It is also possible to perform this feature by entering the EFA feature number when the
current call is placed on consultation hold ( 1.12.5 Consultation Hold).
• Flash/Recall Time
The length of an EFA signal can be selected for each outside (CO) line ( Flash/Recall Time [418]).

User Manual References

1.8.2 If a Host PBX is Connected

86 Feature Guide
 1.10 Conversation Features

1.10.8 Outside (CO) Line Call Limitation

Description
Outside (CO) line calls are limited by the following features:

Feature Description
Extension-to-Outside (CO) When a call between an extension user and an outside party is
Line Call Duration established, the call duration is restricted by a timer ( Extension-to-CO
Line Call Duration [212]). Both parties will hear a warning tone at 5-
second intervals 15 seconds before the timer expires. When the timer
expires, the call is disconnected. System programming determines which
extensions have calls limited by this feature ( CO Line Call Duration
Limitation [613]). This timer applies to outside (CO) line calls that are
made via the PBX.
Outside-to-Outside (CO-to- When a call between 2 outside parties is established, the call duration is
CO) Line Call Duration restricted by a timer ( CO-to-CO Line Call Duration [205]). Both parties
will hear a warning tone 15 seconds before the timer expires. When the
timer expires, the call is disconnected.
Budget Management When the total of call charges reaches a specified limit, an extension user
hears an alarm (3 sets of 3 beeps) and the user cannot make further
outside (CO) line calls. Whether the call is disconnected after the alarm is
programmable ( 1.8.3 Budget Management).

Conditions
• Lockout
If one party in a conversation goes on-hook, the call between both parties will be disconnected. A
reorder tone is sent to the off-hook party before the call is disconnected. No operation is necessary.
• When an extension user seizes an outside (CO) line and then transfers the call to another extension
user who can use this feature, the Extension-to-Outside (CO) Line Call Duration timer starts after the
transferred call is answered by the outside party.
• The Outside-to-Outside (CO-to-CO) Line Call Duration feature applies to the following calls:
– Calls forwarded by the FWD to Outside (CO) Line feature ( 1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD))
– Calls transferred by the Call Transfer to Outside (CO) Line feature ( 1.11.1 Call Transfer)
– Calls using the DISA feature ( 1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA))
– Calls using the Unattended Conference feature ( 1.13.1.2 Conference)

Feature Guide 87
1.10 Conversation Features

1.10.9 Parallelled Telephone

Description
Any proprietary telephone (PT) can be connected in parallel with a single line device, such as a single line
telephone (SLT), fax machine, or modem.
When parallel mode is used, the 2 telephones function as follows:
• Both share one extension number.
• Either telephone or device can make or answer calls.

Conditions
• System programming determines the SLTs that can be connected in parallel with a PT ( Parallelled
Telephone [610]).
• When the SLT is in operation, the display and LED (Light Emitting Diode) indicator on the paired PT will
function in the same way as when the PT is in operation.
• The following features cannot be used with an SLT connected in parallel with a PT:
– Call Splitting
– Conference
– Door Open while connected to the doorphone
– External Feature Access (EFA)
– Hot Line
• An SLT connected in parallel with a PT will not ring if the PT is:
– In Hands-free Answerback mode ( 1.4.1.4 Hands-free Answerback).
– In Voice-calling mode (Alternate Receiving—Ring/Voice) ( 1.5.1.1 Intercom Call).
• An extension user cannot make a call from the SLT if the PT is:
– Playing background music (BGM)
– Receiving a paging announcement over the built-in speaker
– In programming mode
• Both the PT and the SLT will ring for incoming calls (if the ringer is turned on).
• If one telephone goes off-hook while the other telephone is having a call, a 3-party conference call will
be established. If one telephone goes on-hook, the other telephone will continue with the call.

Installation Manual References

2.5.2 Connecting Extensions in Parallel

88 Feature Guide
 1.10 Conversation Features

1.10.10 Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection

Description
A CPC (Calling Party Control) signal is an on-hook indication (disconnect signal) sent from an outside (CO)
line when the other party hangs up. To maintain efficient utilisation of outside (CO) lines, the PBX monitors
each line's status and when a CPC signal is detected on a line, the PBX disconnects the line and alerts the
extension with a reorder tone.

Conditions
• CPC Signal Detection is programmable for incoming outside (CO) line calls ( CPC Signal
Detection—Incoming [420]) and for outgoing outside (CO) line calls ( CPC Signal Detection—
Outgoing [421]).
• If a CPC signal is detected during a call between a caller using the DISA feature ( 1.15.6 Direct
Inward System Access (DISA)) and an extension or an outside party, the call will be disconnected.
• It is possible to select whether the PBX detects the reverse signal from incoming outside (CO) line calls
for the duration ( CPC Signal Detection—Incoming [420]) specified through system programming (
Incoming Reverse [153]).

Feature Guide 89
1.11 Transferring Features

1.11 Transferring Features

1.11.1 Call Transfer

Description
An extension user can transfer a call to another extension or to an outside party.
The following features are available:

Feature Transferring method

With Announcement Transfer is completed after announcing the transfer to the destination
party.
Without Announcement Transfer is completed without an announcement.
After dialling the destination extension number and hearing a ringback
tone or busy tone, the originator can replace the handset.

Call Transfer with Announcement is also known as Call Transfer—Screened.

Call Transfer without Announcement is also known as Call Transfer—Unscreened.

Conditions
• System programming determines the extensions that are able to transfer calls to an outside party (
Call Transfer to CO Line [606]). Single line telephone (SLT) users cannot transfer calls to an outside
party.
• Transfer Recall for Call Transfer without Announcement
If the transfer destination extension does not answer within a preprogrammed time period ( Transfer
Recall Time [201]), the call will return to the extension that transferred the call. If there is no answer for
30 minutes after Transfer Recall starts, the call will be disconnected.
• Camp-on Transfer for Call Transfer without Announcement
Call Transfer without Announcement is possible while hearing a busy tone, or while hearing a ringback
tone after executing Busy Station Signalling (BSS). When the destination extension becomes idle, the
transferred call starts ringing automatically at that extension. This is called Camp-on Transfer.
• One-touch Transfer
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console users and proprietary telephone (PT) users can hold an outside
(CO) line call and quickly transfer it to an extension by pressing the DSS button directly ( One-touch
Transfer Using a DSS Button [005]).
A flexible CO/DSS/MESSAGE button can also be customised as a DSS button.
• Music, if available, is sent to the held outside party while the call is being transferred ( 1.12.4 Music
on Hold). An internal audio source, external audio source, or tone can be selected as the Music on Hold
through system programming ( Music on Hold [111]).
• Outside (CO) Line Call Duration
If an outside (CO) line call is transferred to an outside party, the call duration will be restricted by a
system timer ( CO-to-CO Line Call Duration [205]). Both parties will hear a warning tone 15 seconds
before the timer expires ( 1.10.8 Outside (CO) Line Call Limitation). The extension that transferred
the call will also hear a ring tone or an alarm tone 50 seconds before the timer expires ( 1.12.1 Call
Hold). When the timer expires, the call is disconnected unless the extension joins the conversation
again.
• If a CPC (Calling Party Control) signal or reverse signal is received from an outside (CO) line, the
corresponding call between 2 outside parties will be disconnected.

90 Feature Guide
 1.11 Transferring Features

• Consultation Hold
When a transferring party presses the TRANSFER button on a PT or the Recall/hookswitch on an SLT,
the transferred party is automatically placed on consultation hold ( 1.12.5 Consultation Hold).

Feature Guide References

1.18.2 Flexible Buttons

User Manual References

1.4.1 Transferring a Call (Call Transfer)

Feature Guide 91
1.12 Holding Features

1.12 Holding Features

1.12.1 Call Hold

Description
An extension user can put a call on hold. The following Call Hold features are available:

Feature Description
General Call Hold Any extension user can retrieve a held call.
Exclusive Call Hold Only the proprietary telephone (PT) user who held the call can retrieve it.

Pressing the HOLD button multiple times alternates between General and Exclusive Call Hold.

Conditions
• Using the Call Hold feature, a PT user can have one intercom call and multiple outside (CO) line calls
on hold at the same time. To hold multiple intercom calls, the user should use the Call Park feature (
1.12.2 Call Park). Using the Call Hold feature, a single line telephone (SLT) user can have either one
intercom call or one outside (CO) line call on hold. To hold multiple calls, the user should use the Call
Park feature.
• If an outside party is placed on hold and the call is not retrieved within 30 minutes, the call is
automatically disconnected.
• Music on Hold
Music, if available, is sent to the outside party on hold ( 1.12.4 Music on Hold). An internal audio
source, external audio source, or tone can be selected as the Music on Hold through system
programming ( Music on Hold [111]).
• Doorphone calls cannot be put on hold.
• Hold Recall
If a call on hold is not retrieved within a preprogrammed time period ( Hold Recall Time [200]), a ring
tone will be heard at the extension that put the call on hold. If the extension is engaged in a call when
the timer expires, an alarm tone will be heard. If the hold recall time is set to "Disable", no tone will be
heard. Going off-hook after the hold recall time has expired automatically re-establishes the
conversation with the call on hold.
• SLT Hold Mode
It is possible to choose how to hold and transfer a call with an SLT, if the length of time that the Recall/
hookswitch is pressed is shorter than a specified duration ( Hookswitch Flash Timing Range [207]).
The following methods ( SLT Hold Mode [104]) are available:

Mode Hold Transfer to Extension

Pressing the Recall/hookswitch Pressing the Recall/hookswitch
Hold-1 + +
Going on-hook Extension No.

92 Feature Guide
 1.12 Holding Features

Mode Hold Transfer to Extension

Pressing the Recall/hookswitch Pressing the Recall/hookswitch
+ +
Hold-2 Call Hold Feature No. Extension No.
+
Going on-hook
Pressing the Recall/hookswitch Pressing the Recall/hookswitch
+ +
Hold-3 Call Hold Feature No. Call Hold Feature No.
+ +
Going on-hook Extension No.

In some cases, a call is not disconnected when an SLT user goes on-hook. Instead, the call is
mistakenly placed on hold. After a specified time expires, the Hold Recall tone is heard. When the SLT
user answers this, the user hears a cyclic tone (like a reorder tone). To avoid this problem, select "Hold-
2" or "Hold-3". In either of these modes, all calls are disconnected when going on-hook, unless the Call
Hold feature number is entered after pressing the Recall/hookswitch.

It is possible to set each SLT not to receive pulse signals through system programming ( Internal
Pulse Detection [614]). This setting helps the PBX to avoid mistaking pulse signals sent by dialling "1"
for hooking, in the countries/areas where the length of time that the Recall/hookswitch is pressed is set
to "MODE 1: 50–180 ms" in Hookswitch Flash Timing Range [207].

Feature Guide References

4.2.1 Tones/Ring Tones

User Manual References

1.4.2 Holding a Call

Feature Guide 93
1.12 Holding Features

1.12.2 Call Park

Description
An extension user can hold a call by placing it into a common parking zone of the PBX. A parked call can
be retrieved by any extension user. This feature is useful when an extension user wants to hold more than
one intercom call with a proprietary telephone (PT), or more than one intercom call or outside (CO) line call
with a single line telephone (SLT).

Conditions
• Call Park Recall
If a parked call is not retrieved within a preprogrammed time period ( Hold Recall Time [200]), a ring
tone will be heard at the extension that parked the call. If the destination is engaged in a call when the
timer expires, an alarm tone will be heard.
• If a parked call is not retrieved within 30 minutes, it is automatically disconnected.
• Retry
If the specified parking zone is occupied, the extension user will hear a busy tone. While hearing a busy
tone, the user can retry by selecting another parking zone.

User Manual References

1.4.2 Holding a Call

94 Feature Guide
 1.12 Holding Features

1.12.3 Call Splitting

Description
An extension user can speak alternately with 2 parties. Placing the current call on hold allows the user to
speak with the other party.

Conditions
• This feature does not apply to calls from doorphones or paging announcements.
• Consultation Hold
When the extension user presses the HOLD button on a proprietary telephone (PT) or the Recall/
hookswitch on a single line telephone (SLT), the held party is automatically placed on consultation hold
( 1.12.5 Consultation Hold).

User Manual References

1.4.3 Talking to 2 Parties Alternately (Call Splitting)

Feature Guide 95
1.12 Holding Features

1.12.4 Music on Hold

Description
An outside party on hold will hear audio to inform the party that the call is still on hold.
The following types of audio are available depending on the user's country/area:
a) Internal audio source
b) External audio source
c) Tone
The audio sources (internal and external) can also be used for BGM ( 1.15.4 Background Music (BGM)).

Conditions
• Hardware requirement: A user-supplied audio device, such as a CD player or radio for External audio
source.
• The audio can be selected through system programming ( Music on Hold [111]).
• Operations such as Call Hold ( 1.12.1 Call Hold) and Call Transfer ( 1.11.1 Call Transfer) activate
Music on Hold.

Installation Manual References

2.8.1 Connecting Peripherals

96 Feature Guide
 1.12 Holding Features

1.12.5 Consultation Hold

Description
When an extension user is on a call and performs Call Transfer ( 1.11.1 Call Transfer), Call Splitting (
1.12.3 Call Splitting), or tries to establish a conference call ( 1.13.1.2 Conference), the call is
automatically placed on consultation hold. When the operation is completed or cancelled, the consultation
hold is released.

Feature Guide 97
1.13 Conference Features

1.13 Conference Features

1.13.1 Conference Features

1.13.1.1 Conference Features—OVERVIEW

Description
The following features are available to establish a conference call:

Feature Description Details in

Conference An extension user can establish a 3-party or 5-party • 1.13.1.2
conference call. Conference
Executive Busy Override An extension user can interrupt an existing call to • 1.7.2 Executive
establish a 3-party conference call. Busy Override

98 Feature Guide
 1.13 Conference Features

1.13.1.2 Conference

Description
An extension user can establish a conference call. The following Conference features are available:

Feature Description
3-party Conference During a 2-party conversation, an extension user can add a third party to
the conversation, thereby establishing a 3-party conference call.
Unattended Conference:
The proprietary telephone (PT) user who originated a conference with 2
outside parties can leave the conference and allow the other parties to
continue the conversation. The user may return to the conference at any
time, if he or she desires.
5-party Conference A PT user can establish a 3-party to 5-party conference call by entering
the 5-party Conference feature number.

Conditions

[General]
• Conference call arrangement
The following configurations of 3-party or 5-party conference calls are possible at the same time
through system programming ( Conference Pattern [116]):
– 3-party conference calls between 3 extensions: Up to 3
– 3-party conference calls between one extension and 2 outside parties: Up to 4
– 3-party conference calls between 2 extensions and one outside party: Up to 4
– 5-party conference call with up to 3 extensions when using Voice Mail Inband (DTMF) Integration,
with up to 4 extensions when not using Voice Mail Inband (DTMF) Integration, or with a
combination of extensions and up to 2 outside parties: One
• Conference Button
On a PT that does not have a CONF (Conference) button, a flexible CO button can be customised as
a Conference button.
• Consultation Hold
When an extension user tries to establish a conference call, the current call is automatically placed on
consultation hold until the conference is established ( 1.12.5 Consultation Hold).

[3-party Conference]
• A confirmation tone will be sent to all parties when a 2-party conference call is changed to a 3-party
conference call. It is possible to eliminate the tone through system programming ( Conference Tone
[105]).
• Unattended Conference Recall
The duration of unattended conferences is restricted by a system timer ( CO-to-CO Line Call
Duration [205]).
A ring tone or an alarm tone is heard at the conference originator's extension 50 seconds before the
timer expires.
A warning tone starts to be heard by parties in the unattended conference 15 seconds before the timer
expires.
If the originator returns to the conference before the unattended conference call is disconnected, the

Feature Guide 99
1.13 Conference Features

timer will be cancelled. If not, the ring tone or alarm tone and the warning tone will continue to be heard
until the unattended conference call is disconnected ( 1.10.8 Outside (CO) Line Call Limitation).
• An unattended conference cannot be established unless the extension is allowed to transfer a call to
an outside party through system programming ( Call Transfer to CO Line [606]).

[5-party Conference]
• The following features will not function during a 5-party conference call:
– Call Hold
– Call Park
– Call Splitting
– Call Transfer
– Executive Busy Override
– Unattended Conference
• A confirmation tone will be sent to all parties when a 5-party conference call is established and when
a 5-party conference call is changed to a 4-party conference call or vice versa. It is possible to eliminate
the tone through system programming ( Conference Tone [105]).

Feature Guide References

1.18.1 Fixed Buttons
1.18.2 Flexible Buttons

User Manual References

1.4.5 Talking to Multiple Parties (Conference)

100 Feature Guide

 1.14 Paging Features

1.14 Paging Features

1.14.1 Paging

Description
An extension user can make a paging announcement to several people at once.
The announcement is heard through the built-in speakers of proprietary telephones (PTs) and/or an external
pager (loudspeaker), depending on the type of Paging that is performed as follows:

Type Paging method

All Extensions The page is heard through the built-in speakers of all PTs.
External The page is heard through an external pager.
Group The page is heard through the built-in speakers of the PTs that belong to
a certain extension group ( Extension Group [600]).
All Extensions & External The page is heard through the built-in speakers of all PTs and an external
pager simultaneously.

The paged person can answer the page from a nearby telephone. It is possible to page with a call on hold
in order to transfer the call.

Paging Deny
It is possible for each extension to deny being paged.

Conditions
• Hardware Requirement: A user-supplied external pager.
• A confirmation tone will be sent to the external pager before the paging announcement. It is possible
to eliminate the tone through system programming ( External Pager Access Tone [106]).
• Only one person can use this feature at a time.
• Extensions that cannot be paged are:
– Ringing or busy PTs
– PTs in Paging Deny mode
– PTs in DND mode ( 1.3.1.3 Do Not Disturb (DND))

Installation Manual References

2.8.1 Connecting Peripherals

User Manual References

1.6.1 Paging
1.6.2 Answering/Denying a Paging Announcement

Feature Guide 101

1.15 Optional Device Features

1.15 Optional Device Features

1.15.1 Doorphone Call

Description
A visitor can use a doorphone to call its preprogrammed destination. Extension users can call a doorphone.
Doorphones can also be used for the Room Monitor feature ( 1.10.2 Room Monitor).

Conditions
• Hardware Requirement: An optional doorphone, and doorphone card.
• A doorphone access tone will be sent to a monitored doorphone before monitoring starts. If an
extension user wants to monitor a doorphone without informing the other party, it is possible to eliminate
the tone through system programming ( Doorphone Access Tone [707]).
• Ring Duration
If an incoming doorphone call is not answered within a preprogrammed time period ( Doorphone
Ring Time [708]), ringing stops and the call is cancelled.
An extension user can choose the preferred ring tone pattern for doorphone calls through system
programming ( Doorphone Ring Tone Pattern [706]).
• Call Destination
System programming determines the extensions that can receive calls from each doorphone for each
time service mode ( Doorphone Ringing—Day/Night/Lunch [700-702]).
• Door Open
While on a doorphone call, an extension user can unlock the door to let the visitor in ( 1.15.2 Door
Open).
• When a doorphone call is received at a proprietary telephone (PT), a tone is heard instead of ringing.

Installation Manual References

2.3.3 2-Port Doorphone Card (KX-TE82460)
2.6 Connecting Doorphones and Door Openers

Feature Guide References

4.2.1 Tones/Ring Tones

User Manual References

1.8.1 If a Doorphone/Door Opener is Connected

102 Feature Guide

 1.15 Optional Device Features

1.15.2 Door Open

Description
Using an extension telephone, an extension user can unlock a door for a visitor.
The door can be unlocked by extension users who are allowed through system programming to unlock the
door for each time service mode ( Door Opener—Day/Night/Lunch [703-705]). While on a doorphone call,
any extension user can unlock a door to let a visitor in ( 1.15.1 Doorphone Call).

Conditions
• Hardware Requirement: A user-supplied door opener installed on each door, optional doorphone, and
doorphone card.
• A door opener can unlock a door even if no doorphone is installed.
• Door Open Duration
An opened door will remain unlocked for a preprogrammed length of time ( Door Open Duration
[709]).

Installation Manual References

2.3.3 2-Port Doorphone Card (KX-TE82460)
2.6 Connecting Doorphones and Door Openers

User Manual References

1.8.1 If a Doorphone/Door Opener is Connected

Feature Guide 103

1.15 Optional Device Features

1.15.3 Doorbell/Door Chime

Description
Extension users can choose how their telephones receive doorphone calls, by selecting to hear ringing, a
chime, or both, provided a doorbell/door chime connected to a door opener is connected to the PBX. They
can recognise which doorphone is ringing by selecting a different doorphone chime pattern for each
doorphone.

[Programming Example]
In order for an extension connected to extension jack 01 (extension 101) to be able to receive a doorphone
call from a doorbell/door chime connected to Relay 2, programme as follows:

Programming Doorphone
1 2
Doorphone Ringing*1 Enable (extn. 101) Enable (extn. 101)

Doorphone Ring/Chime*2 Chime Chime

Doorphone Chime Assignment*3 Relay 2 Relay 2
Doorphone Chime Pattern*4 Pattern 1 Pattern 2

*1 Doorphone Ringing—Day/Night/Lunch [700-702]

*2 Doorphone Ring/Chime [710]
*3 Doorphone Chime Assignment [711]
*4 Doorphone Chime Pattern [712]

In this example
When a visitor presses the Call button of Doorphone 2:
– A doorbell/door chime, connected to Relay 2, chimes with Pattern 2.
– Because Doorphone Ring/Chime is set to "Chime", extension 101 does not ring.
– The extension user who is allowed to receive a call from Doorphone 2 can answer the doorphone
call by going off-hook within a preprogrammed time period ( Doorphone Ring Time [708]). If the
user is allowed to unlock the door ( Door Opener—Day/Night/Lunch [703-705]), he or she can
then unlock the door by entering the Door Open feature number.
– If the called extension is busy and has set Call Waiting, the extension user hears a call waiting tone
and the call information flashes on the display.

Conditions
• Hardware Requirement: A user-supplied doorbell/door chime connected to each door opener.

Installation Manual References

2.7 Connecting Doorbell or Door Chime

Feature Guide References

4.2.1 Tones/Ring Tones

104 Feature Guide

 1.15 Optional Device Features

User Manual References

1.8.1 If a Doorphone/Door Opener is Connected

Feature Guide 105

1.15 Optional Device Features

1.15.4 Background Music (BGM)

Description
A proprietary telephone (PT) user can listen to background music (BGM) through the built-in speaker while
on-hook and idle.

Conditions
• Hardware requirement: A user-supplied external audio device, such as a CD player or radio for
External audio source.
• The music heard through the PT is interrupted when going off-hook, receiving a call, or receiving a
paging announcement.
• The audio can be selected through system programming ( Music on Hold [111]).
• This feature can be turned on and off by dialling "1" while the extension is on-hook and idle, if BGM is
enabled through system programming ( BGM Control for APT [626]).

Installation Manual References

2.8.1 Connecting Peripherals

User Manual References

1.7.5 Turning on the Background Music (BGM)

106 Feature Guide

 1.15 Optional Device Features

1.15.5 Outgoing Message (OGM) for DISA/UCD

Description
An extension assigned as the operator or manager extension can record outgoing messages (OGMs) for
the following features:

Feature Usage Details in

Direct Inward System When a call arrives on a DISA line, the caller will hear • 1.15.6 Direct
Access (DISA) a DISA OGM. Inward System
Access (DISA)
3-level Automated Attendant When the DISA AA service is active, the caller will • 1.15.6 Direct
(AA) hear a DISA OGM. The DISA AA service supports up Inward System
to 3 levels of DISA OGMs. Access (DISA)
Uniform Call Distribution When a call arrives at a UCD group and all extensions • 1.2.2 Uniform
(UCD) in the group are busy, the caller will hear a UCD OGM Call Distribution
( UCD Waiting Message [527]). (UCD)

Conditions
• To use this feature, "DISA" or "UCD" must be selected as the distribution method for the desired outside
(CO) line port ( CO Line Mode—Day/Night/Lunch [414-416]).
• The operator or manager can record a maximum of 32 messages (8 messages for DISA/UCD and 24
messages for 3-level AA).
• After recording messages, the operator or manager can also play them back for confirmation. In
addition, the operator or manager can erase messages for DISA/UCD.
• When the operator or manager tries to record or play back a message, he or she will hear an alarm
tone if the message channel is in use.
• When a call between 2 outside parties is established or when Automatic Configuration for Outside (CO)
Line Type is being executed, the operator or manager cannot record or play back a message.
• Prerecorded messages will not be cleared by a system restart. To clear them, use system programming
( Clear All OGMs of DISA/UCD [599]).

User Manual References

2.1.6 Changing System Settings Using Programming Mode

Feature Guide 107

1.15 Optional Device Features

1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

Description
Direct Inward System Access (DISA) allows outside callers to be connected to their desired PBX
destinations without the use of the operator. Callers can listen to a DISA outgoing message (OGM)
instructing them as to which numbers to dial to be connected to the person or department they would like
to speak with. DISA can also give PBX users access to PBX features, such as making outside (CO) line
calls, when they are outside the office.
This DISA OGM can guide callers and allow them to:
• Call an extension by dialling the extension number.
• Call another outside party via the outside (CO) lines of the PBX.
• Access the desired extension simply by dialling a single-digit number (DISA Automated Attendant
[AA] number) using DISA AA service.

DISA OGM
When a call arrives on a DISA line, callers will hear a DISA OGM or a short beep. When the DISA AA service
is active, this DISA OGM will direct callers to dial the appropriate digit (DISA AA number) to be connected
to a specified destination. To access other PBX features, such as making intercom or outside (CO) line calls,
the caller may dial the appropriate numbers while the DISA OGM is playing.
An extension assigned as the operator or manager extension can record a DISA OGM ( 1.15.5 Outgoing
Message (OGM) for DISA/UCD).

DISA AA Service
DISA AA service allows a caller to dial a single-digit number (DISA AA number) and be connected to the
desired party automatically. The PBX can store up to 10 destinations that can be called by dialling a DISA
AA number (0–9) for each DISA OGM ( DISA Built-in AA [501]). These destinations can be an extension
number ( Extension Number [009]), an extension group number ( Extension Group [600]), or the DISA
AA number of a 3-level DISA OGM ( 3-level AA Assignment [540-549]).
During or after the DISA OGM announcement ( DISA Wait Time after OGM [505]), or after a short beep
( Intercept Time for Internal DISA [515]), the caller may dial a DISA AA number as directed by the DISA
OGM (e.g., "Press 1 to speak to Sales. Press 2 to speak to Support.").
Each DISA AA number directs the call to a preprogrammed location.
Since DISA AA numbers are single digits, if the caller dials a second digit within a preprogrammed time
period ( DISA AA Wait Time [517]), DISA AA service will be bypassed because the PBX will assume the
caller is trying to access a specific feature.
When the DISA AA service is used, Incoming Dial Mode must be set to "With AA" through system
programming ( DISA Incoming Call Dial Mode [500]). When "With AA" is selected, the PBX regards caller-
dialled digits "0" through "9" as DISA AA numbers. If no destination is assigned to "9" or "0", the PBX regards
the number (9/0)* as the Automatic Line Access number ( Automatic Line Access [121]) or Operator Call
number.

Note
* For New Zealand, the Automatic Line Access number may be either 1 or 9.

108 Feature Guide

 1.15 Optional Device Features

[Programming Example: 1-level (DISA) AA Table]

In order for a caller to be able to access Mike Smith (extension 102) using 1-level (DISA) AA, programme
as follows:

Distribution method*1
Outside (CO) Line No.
Day Lunch Night
1 DISA OGM1 DISA OGM1 DISA OGM1
2, 3 Normal Normal Normal

DISA AA No. for 1-level AA*2

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
– Mike Extn. Extn. Extn. Extn. Extn. Extn. Extn. –
Smith 103 104 105 106 107 108 Group 1
(102)

*1 CO Line Mode—Day/Night/Lunch [414-416]

*2 DISA Built-in AA [501]

[Programming Example: 3-level AA Table]

In order for a caller to be able to access Mike Smith of the Software Support Team (extension 102) using 3-
level AA, programme as follows:

Distribution method*1
Outside (CO) Line No.
Day Lunch Night
1–3 DISA OGM1 DISA OGM2 DISA OGM3

Feature Guide 109

1.15 Optional Device Features

1-level AA

DISA AA No.*2
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Extn. Extn. 2-level

– – – – – – –
Group 1 Group 2 AA*3

2-level AA

DISA AA No.*4
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
Extn. 3-level Extn.
– – – –
Group 3 AA*5 Group 4

3-level AA

DISA AA No.*4
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
Mike
Extn. Smith – – – – –
101
(102)*6

*1 CO Line Mode—Day/Night/Lunch [414-416]

* 2 DISA Built-in AA [501]
*3 2-level AA: Select "3-level AA" for AA number "3" in DISA Built-in AA [501]
*4 3-level AA Assignment [540-549]
5
* 3-level AA: Select "3-level AA" for "second AA number 2" and for "third AA number "
in the [543] of 3-level AA Assignment [540-549]
*6 Mike Smith (102): Select "Jack 02" for "second AA number 2" and for "third AA
number 1" in the [543] of 3-level AA Assignment [540-549]

In this example:
1) After or while listening to the AA first-level DISA OGM (e.g., "Press 1 to speak to Sales. Press 2 to
speak to Service. Press 3 to speak to Support."), caller dials a DISA AA number, "3", as directed
by the DISA OGM.
2) Next, the AA second-level DISA OGM (e.g., "Press 1 to speak to Hardware Team. Press 2 to speak
to Software Team.") directs the caller to dial another DISA AA number. The caller dials "2".
3) Finally, the AA third-level DISA OGM (e.g., "Press 1 to speak to Mike Smith. Press 0 to speak to
the Operator.") directs the caller to dial a DISA AA number, "1", to be connected to a specified
destination, extension 102.

Note
When the type of a destination from 2–level AA or 3–level AA to another setting is changed, any
associated DISA OGM will also be cleared. In addition, any items within the AA menu being removed
will also be removed.

110 Feature Guide

 1.15 Optional Device Features

DISA Busy Mode

If the destination of a DISA call is busy, the call will be redirected to an idle extension ( Hunting Group Set
[100]) in the destination's idle extension hunting group ( 1.2.1 Idle Extension Hunting). If no extension in
the group is available, or if the destination of the DISA call is not a member of an idle extension hunting
group, the call will be handled in one of the following ways, according to system programming ( DISA Busy
Mode [506]):
a) Disconnect: The caller hears a busy tone and the call is disconnected.
b) Call Waiting: The called extension hears a call waiting tone if the extension has set Call Waiting.
c) DISA: The following procedure is performed:
1) If the assigned DISA OGM (busy message) has been recorded, the caller hears the DISA
OGM (e.g., "The party you called is unavailable..."). If the assigned DISA OGM has not been
recorded, the caller hears a busy tone and the call is disconnected.
2) After the busy message has been played, the DISA OGM that was sent before the busy
message is sent to the caller again.
3) The PBX waits for the caller to enter a new destination. In this case, the PBX does not accept
any Outside (CO) Line Access number regardless of the security type.
If the destination is a member of a DISA ring group, DISA Busy Mode will not function for the call. The PBX
regards it as unanswered.

DISA Intercept Mode

If the destination of a DISA call does not answer the call within a preprogrammed time period ( DISA Ring
Time before Intercept [508]), the call will be handled in one of the following ways, according to system
programming ( DISA Intercept Mode [507]):
a) Disconnect: The call is disconnected.
b) Intercept: The call is redirected to preprogrammed intercept destinations ( Flexible Ringing—
Day/Night/Lunch [408-410]).
This is useful for business calls. For example, the call can be forwarded to the operator or a Voice
Processing System (VPS) automatically.

DISA No Dial Mode

If the PBX does not receive either DTMF (Dual Tone Multi-Frequency) signals or a fax (CNG) tone within a
preprogrammed time period ( DISA Wait Time after OGM [505]), or if the PBX does not receive DTMF
signals within a preprogrammed time period ( Intercept Time for Internal DISA [515]), the call will be
handled in one of the following ways, according to system programming ( DISA No Dial Mode [510]):
a) Disconnect: The call is disconnected.
b) Intercept: The call is redirected to preprogrammed intercept destinations ( Flexible Ringing—
Day/Night/Lunch [408-410]).

DISA Security Mode

Security can be enabled for the PBX to control the types of calls that can be made by callers using DISA.
When the DISA security mode is set to "All Security" or "Trunk Security" ( DISA Security Mode [511]), a
caller is required to enter a DISA security code ( DISA Security Code [512]) before making intercom and
outside (CO) line calls, or outside (CO) line calls only, respectively. The DISA security code and the number
of digits required for the DISA security code ( DISA Security Code Digits [530]) can be assigned by the
manager. After entering a DISA security code, if the code is the same as one of the preprogrammed security
codes, the caller will hear a short beep. It is possible to eliminate the tone through system programming (
DISA Tone after Security Code [518]).
If the DISA security code is entered incorrectly 3 times when using DISA, a reorder tone will be sent to the
caller and the call will be disconnected.

Feature Guide 111

1.15 Optional Device Features

Security Mode Intercom Calls Outside (CO) Line Calls

All Security
Trunk Security

No Security

Permitted

Outside-to-Outside (CO-to-CO) Line Calls through DISA

DISA callers can use DISA to make outside (CO) line calls when allowed by the DISA security mode.
If a call between 2 outside parties is established via DISA, the length of the call can be limited to a
preprogrammed duration ( CO-to-CO Line Call Duration [205]). A timer will activate when the call is
connected, and a warning tone will be heard 15 seconds before the timer expires. When the timer expires,
the call is disconnected ( 1.10.8 Outside (CO) Line Call Limitation).
To detect the end of an outside-to-outside (CO-to-CO) line call, Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection
can be assigned through system programming ( CPC Signal Detection—Incoming [420], CPC Signal
Detection—Outgoing [421]).

112 Feature Guide

 1.15 Optional Device Features

[Flowchart]
A DISA call from an outside
party is received.
(DISA Delayed Answer Time expires)

The PBX answers the call.

(DISA OGM Mute Time expires)

No Is the assigned Yes

DISA OGM recorded?

One short beep DISA OGM

A
(Intercept Time for Internal DISA expires) (DISA Wait Timer after OGM expires)

Cyclic tone, Fax (CNG) tone

CPC signal
A number is dialled. Nothing is dialled. The call is sent to
the fax extension.
Yes What is the All
Is a security The call is
code required? security mode?
disconnected.
No Trunk or No
The security Busy tone
Is Intercept Routing
code is entered. employed?
Yes No
One
short beep The code is correct.

Goes to C The call is

Make an outside disconnected.
(CO) line call. The code is incorrect.
The call is
The call reaches the destination. Reorder tone established.

(DISA Ring Time before The call is

The call is Intercept expires) disconnected.
established. The call is not
answered for
The call is not answered. The destination
40 seconds.
extension(s) is(are) busy.
B
The call is
Is Intercept Routing What is the DISA disconnected.
employed? Busy Mode?
Yes No
C Disconnect Call Waiting DISA
Busy tone
(DISA Ring Time
before Intercept expires) A busy DISA
OGM is heard.
The call is sent to The call is
The call is The call is not
another extension. disconnected.
established. answered. Goes to A
(DISA Ring Time after
Intercept expires) Goes to B
The call is The call is not
established. answered.

The call is
disconnected.

Feature Guide 113

1.15 Optional Device Features

Conditions
WARNING
There is a risk that fraudulent telephone calls will be made using the Outside-to-Outside (CO-to-CO)
Line Call feature of DISA.
The cost of such calls will be billed to the owner/renter of the PBX.
To protect the PBX from this kind of fraudulent use, we strongly recommend:
a) Enabling DISA security (Trunk Security or All Security).
b) Maintaining the secrecy of passwords.
c) Selecting passwords that are complex and random, so that they cannot be easily guessed.
d) Changing passwords regularly.

• The maximum recording time of each message is 3 minutes.

• The preinstalled DISA/UCD OGM card can play only one message at a time and the total recording
time of the PBX for DISA/UCD OGMs is 3 minutes.
• To use this feature, "DISA" must be selected as the distribution method for the desired outside (CO) line
port ( CO Line Mode—Day/Night/Lunch [414-416]).
• DISA Delayed Answer Time
It is possible to set the DISA Delayed Answer time ( DISA Delayed Answer Time [504]) so that the
caller will hear a ringback tone for a preprogrammed length of time before hearing a DISA OGM or a
short beep.
• Call Forwarding (FWD) to Outside (CO) Line
When a DISA call is forwarded to an outside party, the caller is not required to enter a DISA security
code regardless of the security mode.
• DISA OGM Mute Time
Certain DTMF signals, such as Caller ID information, may be sent from the telephone company when
a call is first connected. Because these signals may interfere with DISA, the PBX can be programmed
to ignore DTMF signals for a specified amount of time ( OGM Mute Time [519]) after a call is
connected. After the DISA OGM Mute Time passes, DTMF signals are recognised by the PBX and the
DISA OGM begins playing or a short beep is sent.
• SMDR
The following are logged by SMDR for DISA calls ( 1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording
Feature):
– The destination of the DISA call
– DISA security code status
• Call Deny
System programming determines which extensions can receive DISA calls ( DISA Incoming
Assignment [516]). If a DISA call is received at an extension that has Call Deny set, the caller will hear
a reorder tone and the call will be disconnected automatically. If a DISA call is received by a DISA ring
group, this programme does not function for extensions in that DISA ring group and these extensions
will still ring.
• Cyclic Tone Detection
It is possible to select the number of times a cyclic tone must be detected while the DISA OGM is sent
( Cyclic Tone Detection [513]). Cyclic Tone Detection can be used to disconnect an outside-to-
outside (CO-to-CO) line call via DISA.
• Fax Connection
System programming determines the extensions that are able to receive fax data when the PBX
receives a fax (CNG) tone via the DISA feature ( FAX Connection [503]). The preprogrammed
extension will automatically have the Data Line Security feature set.
• Fax Tone Detection
It is possible to select the number of times the fax (CNG) tone must be detected while the DISA OGM

114 Feature Guide

 1.15 Optional Device Features

is sent before the PBX recognises the incoming signal as fax data ( FAX Tone Detection [514]). If the
DISA OGM is short (0–5 s), in some cases the fax (CNG) tone may not be detected. In this case, it is
recommended to set the length of time the PBX continues to search for a fax (CNG) tone after
completing a DISA OGM to "10 s" or "15 s" through system programming ( DISA Wait Time after
OGM [505]). If the assigned DISA OGM has not been recorded, it is recommended to set the length of
time to "6 s" or "9 s" through system programming ( Intercept Time for Internal DISA [515]).
• It is programmable whether a ringback tone ( Ringback Tone Pattern [128]) or Music on Hold (
Music on Hold [111]) is sent to the caller when a DISA call is received ( DISA Ringback Tone [531]).

Feature Guide References

1.1.1.2 Intercept Routing

User Manual References

1.2.7 Accessing Another Party Directly from Outside (Direct Inward System Access [DISA])
3.3.1 Programming Information

Feature Guide 115

1.16 Caller ID Features

1.16 Caller ID Features

1.16.1 Caller ID

Description
The PBX can receive Caller ID information (telephone numbers and callers' names) from calls received on
outside (CO) lines. This information can be shown on the displays of proprietary telephones (PTs) as well
as some single line telephones (SLTs) when receiving calls. Additionally, Caller ID information is logged in
the Incoming Call Log of the extension that received the call, allowing the caller to view a record of incoming
calls or make a call to a person in the call log later.
The PBX can be programmed to modify a caller's telephone number when it is received by, for example,
adding an Outside (CO) Line Access number or adding/deleting certain digits of incoming telephone
numbers automatically. This allows an extension user to make a call later to a telephone number logged in
his or her call log without worrying about Outside (CO) Line Access numbers, area codes, etc.

Notes
• The term "Caller ID" used in this Feature Guide refers to features that can receive caller information
sent from the telephone company and received on outside (CO) lines. Your network provider may
use a different name for this type of service.
• To receive Caller ID information, you must subscribe to the telephone company's Caller ID service
and enable Caller ID for the appropriate outside (CO) lines through system programming ( Caller
ID [900]).
• Caller ID signalling type, FSK (Frequency Shift Keying) (Bell 202 or V.23) or DTMF (Dual Tone
Multi-Frequency), can be selected to match the type used by your telephone company through
system programming ( Caller ID Type [910]).

Caller ID Display on SLT

This feature is available only for SLTs compatible with either FSK-type Caller ID or DTMF-type Caller ID.

Notes
• This feature complies with ETSI (European Telecommunications Standards Institute)-type FSK
and Bellcore-type FSK.
• This feature does not comply with methods using DT-AS signal or line reversal signal.

1. Caller ID-Related Feature

Feature Description Details in

Incoming Call Log Caller ID information is automatically recorded in • 1.16.2 Incoming
the call log of the extension that received the call. Call Log
This information can be used to view a record of
incoming calls or make calls to any number in the
call log.

2. Caller ID Automatic 0 Addition

When a call containing Caller ID information is received, the PBX can add "0"*1 to the caller's telephone
number as a leading number if it does not begin with "0", through system programming ( Caller ID
Automatic 0 Addition [905]).
*1 For New Zealand, "0" can be added to the received telephone number when the maximum length of a telephone number is 8, 9 or 10 digits,
and "00" can be added to the received telephone number when the maximum length is 11 digits or more.

116 Feature Guide

 1.16 Caller ID Features

3. Automatic Caller ID Number Modification

When Caller ID information is checked, the PBX can automatically modify the caller's telephone number
according to a preprogrammed set of rules (Caller ID Modification Table). This modified number allows
the extension user to make a call to this number later without worrying about Outside (CO) Line Access
numbers, area codes, etc.

[Programming Example: Caller ID Modification Table]

Removed No. of
Call Type Code No. Area Code*1 Added No.
Digits
Local Call*2 1 212 3 Not Stored
2 011 3 001
(Cont.) : : : :
: : : :
5
Long-distance Call*3 [Not programmable] 0 1

*1 Caller ID Area Code [901]

*2 Caller ID Modification for Local Calls [902]
*3 Caller ID Modification for Long-distance Calls [903]

Feature Guide 117

1.16 Caller ID Features

<Modification Flowchart>

An outside (CO) line call containing

Caller ID information is received.

Yes Is the caller's area code stored in No

the Caller ID Modification Table?

Modifies the number according to the Modifies the number according to the
method programmed in the corresponding method programmed in the "Long-distance
"Local Call" field. Call" field.

Example: Example:
Removed number of digits: 3 Removed number of digits: 0
Added number: blank Added number: 1

Example: Example:
Received number: 201 555 1234 Received number: 313 555 1234

Modified number: 555 1234 Modified number: 1 313 555 1234

Modification is complete. Modification is complete.

Modified number is logged. Modified number is logged.

4. Displaying the Caller's Name

When a call containing Caller ID information is received, the PBX will search for the caller's name in the
following order, then show that name on the display.
1) The System Speed Dialling Table
2) The Caller ID information received from the telephone company
If a caller's name is not stored in the PBX or sent from the telephone company, it will not be displayed.

Conditions

[General]
• Hardware Requirement: An optional Caller ID card.

[Caller ID Display on SLT]

• Caller ID Display on SLT feature applies to:
Intercom calls and outside (CO) line calls.
Intercom calls include forwarded calls, calls from Transfer Recall and Hold Recall.
Outside (CO) line calls include calls directed to Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) or Direct Inward System

118 Feature Guide

 1.16 Caller ID Features

Access (DISA) ring groups, forwarded calls, intercepted calls, or calls from extensions that placed
outside (CO) line calls on consultation hold.
• SLT Caller ID signalling type can be selected through system programming ( SLT Caller ID Signalling
Type [150]).
• Each SLT (including an SLT connected in parallel with a PT) can be programmed to receive Caller ID
information through system programming ( SLT Caller ID [628]).
• When the caller's telephone number is sent to an SLT, an Outside (CO) Line Access number can be
automatically added to the telephone number through system programming ( SLT Caller ID Line
Access Number [151]), to be used when calling the caller back.
• If a call is transferred, forwarded, or intercepted via Intercept Routing to an SLT, the original caller's
information will be shown on the SLT.
• During a conversation, Caller ID information will not be shown on the SLT.
• When FSK-type Caller ID information is received, the caller's telephone number (max. 20 digits), name
(max. 16 characters), date and time, or the reason for nondisplay of Caller ID information such as
"Private", "Out of Area", or "Long Distance" will be shown on the SLT. If the caller's telephone number
exceeds 20 digits, the SLT receives only the first 20 digits. If the caller's name exceeds 16 characters,
the SLT receives only the first 16 characters.
• When DTMF-type Caller ID information is received, the caller's telephone number (max. 16 digits) or
the reason for nondisplay of Caller ID information will be shown on the SLT. If the caller's telephone
number exceeds 16 digits, the SLT receives only the first 16 digits. However, when a value less than
"1500 ms" is set through system programming ( SLT Ring Bell-on Time [143]), the SLT receives only
the first 10 digits.
• Depending on the type of SLT being used, caller names and the dates and times that calls were
received may not be able to be shown on the SLT.
• If an outside caller disconnects a call to an SLT on which the call's Caller ID information is displayed,
and the SLT receives another outside (CO) line call directly after, the SLT will wait until a
preprogrammed time has passed ( SLT Ring Wait Time for New Call [627]) before it starts to ring,
and the new caller's Caller ID information will be shown on the SLT. A certain amount of time may be
required between calls for an SLT to receive Caller ID information correctly.
• To enable the Caller ID feature, it may be necessary to set the same ring tone pattern ( SLT Fixed
Bell Pattern [629]) as used by the telephone company.
• When an SLT is programmed to receive Caller ID information, the ringing of calls with Caller ID on that
SLT is delayed for a few seconds. Therefore, the length of time before calls are forwarded or intercepted,
and the length of time that intercepted calls ring at the destination SLT, may be slightly shorter than the
duration specified through system programming.

Installation Manual References

2.3.2 3-Port Caller ID Card (KX-TE82494)

Feature Guide References

1.6.1.5 Speed Dialling—Personal/System
1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording Feature
4.2.1 Tones/Ring Tones

Feature Guide 119

1.16 Caller ID Features

1.16.2 Incoming Call Log

Description
When a call containing Caller ID information is received by an extension, the information is shown on the
telephone display, notifying the extension user of the caller's identity.
This information is also automatically logged in the Incoming Call Log of the extension, and can be viewed
later or used to call that caller back.
There are 2 types of call log areas available in the PBX. One is the personal area, which stores logs of calls
received by each extension when a call arrives at a certain proprietary telephone (PT).
The other is the common area, which stores a log of calls arriving at multiple PTs or via the Direct Inward
System Access (DISA) Intercept Routing feature. Caller ID information can be logged by the following
methods:
• Logged automatically when no one answers calls.
• Logged automatically if an extension user presets logging of the caller's information when
answering calls.
• Logged manually by pressing the Caller ID Indication button during a conversation.

[Example]
If the information is stored in record "002",
002:JOHN WHITE --- Caller's name

002: 0011223344 --- Caller's number

002: May15 10:23A --- Date and time of call New:002 Old:001 --- Status* & number of logged calls

Caller ID Indication buttons Caller ID Selection buttons

Personal Personal
Common Common

* "New" is displayed for call records that have not previously been viewed;
"Old" is displayed for call records that have previously been viewed.
Both new and old call records are stored in each personal and common area.

Conditions
• Caller ID Indication—Personal/Common Button
A flexible CO button can be customised as a Caller ID Indication—Personal/Common button, and will
indicate the status of the Incoming Call Log for the extension, as shown below.

Light pattern Status of the corresponding call log

Red on There are new call records since the last time the call log was viewed.
Off There are no new call records in the call log, or the call log has been
already viewed.

The Caller ID Indication—Personal/Common button will alert an extension user to any missed
(unanswered) calls.
The Caller ID Indication—Personal/Common button is also used to store the information of an incoming
call during a conversation, and to view caller information while on-hook and then call back a caller.

120 Feature Guide

 1.16 Caller ID Features

If a Caller ID Indication—Common button is not assigned to any PT, the calls will be logged in the
personal area of the PT that is connected to the lowest-numbered jack, and its Caller ID Indication—
Personal button light will turn red.
• Caller ID Selection—Personal/Common Button
A flexible CO button can be customised as a Caller ID Selection—Personal/Common button. The Caller
ID Selection—Personal/Common button is used to display the number of logged calls while on-hook,
to display and cycle through the information of an incoming call during a conversation, while receiving
a call, or while viewing caller information, and to inform an extension user that the personal or common
area call log is full. The user may also change the displayed information by pressing the "#" key instead
of the Caller ID Selection—Personal/Common button while receiving a call, or while viewing caller
information.
• It is programmable whether the user can view call logs stored in the common area or not ( Common
Area Call Log Check [909]). If this programme is enabled, the Caller ID Indication—Common button
and Caller ID Selection—Common button can be assigned.
• Incoming Call Log Memory
The total number of incoming calls that can be logged by the PBX is limited ( 4.1.1 Capacity of
System Resources). When a call log is full (personal area: 20 calls, common area: 300 calls), the Caller
ID Selection—Personal/Common button light will turn red.
It is possible for an extension user (or the operator/manager) to select whether the oldest call in the
personal area (or common area) will be replaced each time a call is received, or whether the new call
information will be discarded, by entering the 21st Incoming Call Logged in the Personal Area (or 301st
Incoming Call Logged in the Common Area) feature number.
Caller records for all call logs of an extension are numbered sequentially as they are received,
regardless of which call log the information is stored in. For example, information on the first call
received will be stored as record "001" (e.g., 001, logged in the personal area) and information on the
second call received will be stored as record "002" (e.g., 002, logged in the common area), whether it
is logged in the personal area or common area.
If the call log in the personal area becomes full when the 21st call (e.g., 110, logged in the personal
area) has been set to overwrite the oldest call (001, logged in the personal area),
– The oldest call will be deleted and subsequent records will be moved one number down, if the 21st
call is unanswered or if it is answered but has different information from the 20th call.
– The 21st call will be discarded and the previous call information will stay as it is, if the 21st call is
answered and has the same information as the 20th call.
Common area call logs function in the same way.
• If a transferred call (unscreened) is not answered, the information is logged in the personal area of the
final destination.
• Incoming Call Log Display Lock
An extension user can lock the Incoming Call Log stored in his or her personal area, preventing other
users from viewing its contents ( 1.8.4 Extension Lock). The operator or manager can cancel the lock
in the case that the extension user forgets the lock code (Extension Lock—CANCEL ALL).
The Incoming Call Log for the common area can only be locked or unlocked by the operator or manager.
• Automatic Caller ID Number Modification
If the PBX is programmed to automatically modify incoming telephone numbers, the modified numbers
will be displayed when Caller ID information is checked. Extension users can also modify the incoming
telephone numbers manually.
• Initial Display Selection
If the Caller ID service provides both the number and name, the user can select which is shown first on
the display of the PT through system programming ( Caller ID Log Priority [904]).

Feature Guide References

1.16.1 Caller ID

Feature Guide 121

1.16 Caller ID Features

1.18.2 Flexible Buttons

User Manual References

1.9.1 Calling with the Incoming Call Log
2.1.4 Erasing All Caller Information in the Common Area (Incoming Call Log in the Common Area—CLEAR
ALL)
2.1.5 Disregarding the Newest Call or Overwriting the Oldest Call in the Common Area Call Log (301st
Incoming Call Logged in the Common Area)

122 Feature Guide

 1.17 Message Features

1.17 Message Features

1.17.1 Message Waiting

Description
When an extension user calls another extension user who does not answer the call, he or she can leave a
message waiting indication. The appropriate button or lamp on the called extension user's telephone will
light, indicating that a call was missed, or a message recorded by the Voice Processing System (VPS)
feature is waiting. A MESSAGE button can be used to call the caller back or listen to the message.
When a message is left for a proprietary telephone (PT), the MESSAGE button on it lights, or the Message/
Ringer Lamp turns red. Pressing the lit MESSAGE button while on-hook shows the caller's information as
shown below:

[Example]

105:Tom Smith --- Extension no. and name of the person who left the message

Message/Message for Another

Extension buttons
This extension
Other extension*

* This button is useful when, for example, the manager checks messages left for another
extension.

Conditions
• System programming determines the single line telephones (SLTs) that can receive the message
waiting notifications left by another extension ( SLT Message Waiting [619]).
• If a user goes off-hook with an SLT that has messages waiting, a special dial tone (dial tone 3) will be
heard. The user can call a caller back or listen to the message by entering the Message Waiting Answer
feature number.
• Message for Another Extension Button
A flexible CO/Direct Station Selection (DSS) button can be customised as a Message for Another
Extension button. This button can be used on a PT that is allowed through system programming (
Message Waiting for Another Extension [618]) to access messages left for another extension or voice
messages stored in another extension's VPS mailbox.
• Message Waiting for Another Extension Lock
An extension user can lock or unlock message waiting indications to prevent others from viewing,
calling back or clearing message waiting indications left at his or her extension. The operator or
manager can override this lock to unlock it (Extension Lock—CANCEL ALL).
Even while this lock is on, the user can view, call back, or clear message waiting indications left at his
or her own extension.
• Both the calling extension and the called extension can cancel a notification after it has been left.
• Message waiting indications are always left on the originally called extension. Message waiting
indications cannot be sent to an FWD destination ( 1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)) or an idle
extension hunting destination ( 1.2.1 Idle Extension Hunting).

Feature Guide 123

1.17 Message Features

• A message waiting indication is automatically cleared when the called extension calls the caller back
and the call is answered.
• Message Waiting Indication via Voice Mail APT Integration
If a voice message is left for the called extension, it can be heard by following the Voice Mail prompts
after pressing the lit MESSAGE button ( 1.19.1 Voice Mail APT Integration).
• It is possible to activate the Message/Ringer Lamp ( KX-T7700 Series Incoming Lamp Control [968])
on the KX-T7700 series telephones for the following incoming calls:
– Incoming call from another extension to a busy extension when the called extension has set Call
Waiting (Call Waiting Tone 1)
– Incoming doorphone call whose ring tone pattern is set to "S-Double" ( Doorphone Ring Tone
Pattern [706]) (except when using the Parallelled Telephone feature) when an optional doorphone
or doorbell/door chime is connected to the PBX

Feature Guide References

1.18.1 Fixed Buttons
1.18.2 Flexible Buttons

User Manual References

1.2.4 When the Dialled Party is Busy or There is No Answer
1.8.3 If a Voice Processing System is Connected

124 Feature Guide

 1.17 Message Features

1.17.2 Absent Message

Description
Extension users can prepare a brief text message (Absent Message) that will be displayed to other
extension users when they are called. This message can explain the reason for their absence, and can be
used by any extension user.
The following Absent Messages may be programmed:

Message No. Message

1 Will Return Soon
2 Gone Home
3 At Ext %%% (Extension Number)
4 Back at %%:%% (Hour:Minute) AM (or PM)
5 Out Until %%/%% (Month/Day)*
6 In a Meeting

Notes
• * The date order varies depending on the user's country/area.
• The "%" shown above indicates a parameter to be entered when assigning a message at an
individual extension.

Conditions
• An extension user can select only one Absent Message at a time. The selected message is displayed
at the extension every time the user goes off-hook.
• The caller must be using a display proprietary telephone (PT) to see the Absent Message.

User Manual References

1.5.2 Showing a Message on the Caller's Telephone Display (Absent Message)

Feature Guide 125

1.17 Message Features

1.17.3 Fixed Line SMS Terminal Support

Description
When outside (CO) line calls are received from a Short Message Service (SMS) centre, the PBX can route
incoming calls to specific single line telephones (SLTs) that support SMS according to a preprogrammed
set of rules (SMS Routing Table). Fixed Line SMS is a service that allows text messages to be sent and
received via Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) access.
If a user subscribes to his or her telephone company's Caller ID service and the PBX receives an SMS
centre call from the registered SMS centre number, the PBX will relay the text message to the SLT. In all
other cases, incoming outside (CO) line calls will be directed according to system programming ( CO Line
Mode—Day/Night/Lunch [414-416]).
To make or receive SMS centre calls using fixed lines, the PBX and specific SLTs must be programmed so
they will know how to handle those calls. To programme SLTs, refer to the Operating Instructions supplied
with the SLTs.

Notes
• This feature complies with the following ETSI (European Telecommunications Standards Institute)
specifications:
ETSI ES 201 912
• This feature is available only for SLTs that support SMS. SMS service depends on the contract with
your telephone company.

[Programming Example: SMS Routing Table with Sub-address Numbers]

When the SMS centre number used to receive SMS centre calls is "1112224444" and the telephone
numbers of each outside (CO) line are "3847001" for CO 1/2 and "3847002" for CO 3, programme as
follows:
1) PBX setting
SMS Centre Number for Receiving*1: 1112224444

Location No. Outside (CO) Line No.*2 Extension Jack No.*3

1 CO 1, CO 2 Jack 01, Jack 02, Jack 03
2 CO 3 Jack 07, Jack 08
3 Not Stored Not Stored

*1 SMS Centre Number for Receiving [145]

*2 SMS Routing Table—CO [146]
*3 SMS Routing Table—Extension [147]

If the SMS centre supports sub-address numbers, up to 4 SLTs can be assigned as the SMS
destinations for a single location. One location can be used for each outside (CO) line telephone
number.

126 Feature Guide

 1.17 Message Features

2) SLT setting

Extension Jack No. SMS Centre Number for SMS Centre Number for SMS Sub-
Sending Receiving address
Jack 01 89*1 P*21112223333 1112224444 1
Jack 02 89*1 P*21112223333 1112224444 2
Jack 07 89*1 P*21112223333 1112224444 1
(Cont.) : : : :
: : : :

*1 89: Outside (CO) Line Access number used to make SMS centre calls using the fixed outside (CO)
lines.
When the SMS centre can receive an SMS message from any telephone number, the Automatic
Line Access number or Outside (CO) Line Access number can also be used respectively.
* P: Pause
2

In this example:
a) To send an SMS message to the SLT connected to extension jack 01, enter "38470011" as
the destination.
b) To send an SMS message to the SLT connected to extension jack 02, enter "38470012" as
the destination.
c) To send an SMS message to the SLT connected to extension jack 07, enter "38470021" as
the destination.

[Programming Example: SMS Routing Table without Sub-address Numbers]

When the SMS centre number used to receive SMS centre calls is "1112224444" and the telephone
numbers of each outside (CO) line are "3847001" for CO 1, "3847002" for CO 2, and "3847003" for CO 3,
programme as follows:
1) PBX setting
SMS Centre Number for Receiving: 1112224444

Location No. Outside (CO) Line No. Extension Jack No.

1 CO 1 Jack 01
2 CO 2 Jack 02
3 CO 3 Jack 03

If the SMS centre does not support sub-address numbers, only one SLT can be assigned for each
location.
One location can be used for each outside (CO) line telephone number.

Feature Guide 127

1.17 Message Features

2) SLT setting

Extension Jack No. SMS Centre Number for SMS Centre Number for SMS Sub-
Sending Receiving address
Jack 01 89 P1112223333 1112224444 –
Jack 02 89 P1112223333 1112224444 –
Jack 03 89 P1112223333 1112224444 –
(Cont.) : : : :
: : : :

In this example:
a) To send an SMS message to the SLT connected to extension jack 01, enter "3847001" as the
destination.
b) To send an SMS message to the SLT connected to extension jack 02, enter "3847002" as the
destination.
c) To send an SMS message to the SLT connected to extension jack 03, enter "3847003" as the
destination.

Conditions
• Hardware Requirement: An optional Caller ID card.
• The PBX relays text messages from the SMS centre to SMS-enabled SLTs, and vice versa.
• To receive SMS information, you must subscribe to the telephone company's Caller ID service and
enable Caller ID for the appropriate outside (CO) lines through system programming ( Caller ID
[900]).
• Each SMS-enabled SLT must be programmed to receive Caller ID information through system
programming ( SLT Caller ID [628]).
• If an SLT user sets the Automatic Callback Busy feature by dialling "6" because the selected line is busy
when he or she tries to send a text message, the SLT will ring when the line becomes idle. To send the
text message, the user must answer the callback ring, go on-hook, and then make an SMS centre call
again.
• When a call is received on one of the outside (CO) lines preprogrammed in an SMS Routing Table, the
destination SLT may ring one time.
• If a user wants to receive SMS messages on an SLT, it is recommended to not connect a proprietary
telephone (PT) in parallel. If the PT user answers the call, the SMS message will not be received.
• When an SMS centre call is received at an SLT that has set the Call Forwarding (FWD) feature, the
FWD feature will not function and the SMS message is received by that SLT.
• When an SLT user makes an SMS centre call, in some cases the duration of the call may not be verified
with SMDR ( 1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording Feature), because it takes very little time to
send SMS messages. To verify the duration of these calls, it is recommended to set the start timer of
call duration to "5 s" or "Instantly" through system programming ( Call Duration Counter Start [204]).
• When a user on an SLT that is in "TONE (DTMF)" mode makes an SMS call using outside (CO) lines
set to "Pulse" or "Call Block" mode through system programming ( Dial Mode [401]), if the SMS
centre number is longer than supported, for example 16 digits, the SMS call may not be completed. In
this case, set the dialling mode of the SLT to "PULSE" mode using the switch.

128 Feature Guide

 1.17 Message Features

Installation Manual References

2.3.2 3-Port Caller ID Card (KX-TE82494)

Feature Guide 129

1.18 Proprietary Telephone (PT) Features

1.18 Proprietary Telephone (PT) Features

1.18.1 Fixed Buttons

Description
Proprietary telephones (PTs) and Direct Station Selection (DSS) Consoles feature a wide variety of feature
buttons and Line Access buttons, explained below.
Note that certain models do not have certain buttons.
For a description of the buttons found on each PT or DSS Console, please refer to the Operating Instructions
for each PT or DSS Console.

[PT]

Button Function
Navigator Key Used to adjust the volume of the speaker, handset and headset, and the display
contrast, or to select desired items.
Volume Key Used to adjust the volume of the speaker, handset and headset.
PROGRAM Used to enter and exit programming mode.
FLASH/RECALL Used to disconnect the current call and make another call without hanging up
(Flash/Recall mode), or to send an EFA (External Feature Access) signal to the
telephone company or host PBX to access external features (EFA mode).
HOLD Used to place a call on hold.
SP-PHONE Used to select handset or hands-free operation.
(Speakerphone)
MONITOR Used to select hands-free dialling and monitor operation.
MESSAGE Used to leave a message waiting indication, call back the party who left a
message waiting indication, or play back voice messages. This button is
provided with an LED (Light Emitting Diode), except for on KX-T7700 series
telephones. With KX-T7700 series telephones, the Message/Ringer Lamp is lit
when a message waiting indication is left at an extension.
REDIAL Used to redial the last number dialled.
TRANSFER Used to transfer a call to another party.
Flexible CO Used to access an outside (CO) line (or outside (CO) line group) when making
or receiving a call. The button's preprogrammed Outside (CO) Line Access
method determines which line is selected (Default: Single-CO [S-CO]). Can also
be customised as a feature button.
INTERCOM Used to make or receive intercom calls.
AUTO ANS (Auto Used to answer an intercom call automatically in hands-free mode, or to mute
Answer)/MUTE the built-in microphone during a conversation.
VOICE CALL Used to answer an intercom call automatically.
AUTO DIAL/STORE Used for System Speed Dialling/Saved Number Redial, and storing programme
changes.

130 Feature Guide

 1.18 Proprietary Telephone (PT) Features

Button Function
CONF (Conference) Used to establish a 3-party or 5-party conference call.
FWD/DND (Call Used to set the FWD or DND feature for the extension.
Forwarding/Do Not
Disturb)
PAUSE Used to insert a dialling pause in a stored number.
PF (Programmable Used to access a preprogrammed feature (no default). Mostly used as a One-
Feature) touch Dialling button.

[DSS Console]

Button Usage
Flexible DSS Used to call an extension with a one-touch operation. Each button is
programmed to correspond to an extension. DSS buttons can also be
customised as different feature buttons.
PF Used to access a preprogrammed feature (no default). Mostly used as a One-
touch Dialling button.

Conditions
• Certain buttons are equipped with a light to indicate the status of the corresponding line or feature.

User Manual References

1.1.1 Before Operating a Telephone

Feature Guide 131

1.18 Proprietary Telephone (PT) Features

1.18.2 Flexible Buttons

Description
Flexible buttons are buttons whose functions can be customised through either system or personal
programming. The following types of flexible buttons are found on proprietary telephones (PTs) and/or
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Consoles:
a) Flexible CO buttons
b) Flexible DSS buttons
c) Programmable Feature (PF) buttons
d) Flexible MESSAGE button

[Button Usage]

Button Function
Single-CO (S-CO) Used to access a specified outside (CO) line for making or receiving calls (
1.5.3.3 Outside (CO) Line Access).
Group-CO (G-CO) Used to access an idle outside (CO) line in a specified outside (CO) line group
for making calls. Incoming calls from outside (CO) lines in the assigned outside
(CO) line group arrive at this button ( 1.5.3.3 Outside (CO) Line Access).
Other-CO (O-CO) Used to access an idle outside (CO) line for making calls. Incoming calls from
the assigned outside (CO) lines, which are not assigned to S-CO or G-CO
buttons, arrive at this button ( 1.5.3.3 Outside (CO) Line Access).
Direct Station Used to call an extension with a one-touch operation ( 1.5.1.1 Intercom Call).
Selection (DSS)
One-touch Dialling Used to call a preprogrammed party or access a feature with a one-touch
operation ( 1.6.1.2 One-touch Dialling).
Message Used to leave a message waiting indication, call back the party who left the
message waiting indication, or play back voice messages ( 1.17.1 Message
Waiting).
Message for Another Used to access messages stored for another extension ( 1.17.1 Message
Extension Waiting).
FWD/DND (Call Used to set the FWD or DND feature for the extension ( 1.3.1.1 Call
Forwarding/Do Not Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)—OVERVIEW).
Disturb)
Save Used to store a telephone number while in a conversation with an outside party
or while hearing a busy tone, and then easily redial the number later ( 1.6.1.4
Redial).
Conference Used to establish a 3-party or 5-party conference call ( 1.13.1.2 Conference).
Caller ID Indication— Used to inform an extension user of calls logged in his or her personal area,
Personal store the information of an incoming call during a conversation, and view caller
information while on-hook and then call back a caller ( 1.16.2 Incoming Call
Log).

132 Feature Guide

 1.18 Proprietary Telephone (PT) Features

Button Function
Caller ID Selection— Used to display and cycle through the information of an incoming call during a
Personal conversation, while receiving a call, or while viewing caller information, display
the number of logged calls while on-hook, and inform an extension user that the
personal area call log is full ( 1.16.2 Incoming Call Log).
Caller ID Indication— Used to inform an extension user of calls logged in the common area, store the
Common information of an incoming call during a conversation, and view caller
information while on-hook and then call back a caller ( 1.16.2 Incoming Call
Log).
Caller ID Selection— Used to display and cycle through the information of an incoming call during a
Common conversation, while receiving a call, or while viewing caller information, display
the number of logged calls while on-hook, and inform an extension user that the
common area call log is full ( 1.16.2 Incoming Call Log).
Log-in/Log-out Used to switch between Log-in and Log-out status ( 1.2.4 Log-in/Log-out).
Day Used to change the time service mode to day mode ( 2.2.3 Time Service).
Night Used to change the time service mode to night mode ( 2.2.3 Time Service).
Lunch Used to change the time service mode to lunch mode ( 2.2.3 Time Service).
Extension Lock Used to remotely lock or unlock another extension ( 1.8.4 Extension Lock).
2-way Record Used to record a conversation into the user's own mailbox ( 1.19.1 Voice Mail
APT Integration).
2-way Transfer Used to record a conversation into the mailbox of a specified extension (
1.19.1 Voice Mail APT Integration).
Live Call Screening Used to listen while a caller is leaving a message in the user's voice mailbox and,
(LCS) if desired, intercept the call ( 1.19.1 Voice Mail APT Integration).
LCS Cancel Used to stop monitoring the user's own voice mailbox while a caller is leaving a
message, or stop the alert tone heard in private mode while a caller is leaving a
message ( 1.19.1 Voice Mail APT Integration).
Voice Mail (VM) Used to transfer a call to the mailbox of a specified extension ( 1.19.1 Voice
Transfer Mail APT Integration).

Conditions
• Extension button confirmation
A display PT user can confirm the button settings, such as the flexible CO button, by pressing the
corresponding button while on-hook.
• The Day, Night, Lunch, and Extension Lock buttons can only be assigned to flexible DSS buttons at an
extension assigned as the operator or manager.

User Manual References

3.1.3 Customising the Buttons

Feature Guide 133

1.18 Proprietary Telephone (PT) Features

1.18.3 LED Indication

Description
The LED (Light Emitting Diode) of the Message/Ringer Lamp and the following buttons (Line Status Buttons
and Corresponding Extension Status Button) can indicate line status with a variety of light patterns.
Line Status Buttons: Single-CO (S-CO), Group-CO (G-CO), Other-CO (O-CO), INTERCOM
Corresponding Extension Status Button: Direct Station Selection (DSS)

1. Light Pattern of the Message/Ringer Lamp

• Incoming call from an outside (CO) line/another extension: Red flashing
• Message(s) present (no incoming call): Red on
• No messages present and no incoming call: Off

2. Light Pattern of the Line Status Buttons

Line Status
Button Intercom
Outside (CO) Line Status
Line Status
Light
Pattern
S-CO G-CO O-CO INTERCOM
Off Idle
Green on This extension is using the line.
Slow green This extension is holding the line.
flashing
Moderate– This extension is holding the line using Exclusive Call Hold
speed green or using the line for an unattended conference.
flashing
Rapid green – – – Incoming call
flashing
Red on Line(s) in use –
Slow red Another extension – – –
flashing is holding the line.
Rapid red Incoming call –
flashing

134 Feature Guide

 1.18 Proprietary Telephone (PT) Features

3. Light Pattern of the Corresponding Extension Status Button

Corresponding Extension
Status Button DSS

Light Pattern

Off Idle
Slow red flashing Call Forwarding (FWD)*
Moderate-speed red flashing Do Not Disturb (DND)*
Red on Busy

* This setting can be changed through system programming ( DSS Lamp Mode [112]).

4. Flashing Light Patterns

1s

Slow Flashing

Moderate-speed Flashing

Rapid Flashing

Conditions
• Incoming outside (CO) line calls arrive on available buttons in the following priority:
S-CO G-CO O-CO

Feature Guide References

1.2.3 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Ring
1.3.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)
1.12.1 Call Hold
1.13.1.2 Conference

Feature Guide 135

1.18 Proprietary Telephone (PT) Features

1.18.4 Display Information

Description
A display proprietary telephone (PT) can relay the following information to the user while making or receiving
calls:

Display Item Display Example Conditions

The extension number and name of the 101: Tom Smith Extension numbers and names
calling or called extension are programmable ( Extension
Number [009], Extension Name
[604]). If an extension name is not
stored, only the extension number
will be displayed.
The status of the called extension 101: Busy –
The name and number of the doorphone DoorPhone 1 –
The telephone number dialled 1234567890 –
The extension number and name of the 102:Mike –
calling extension after the call is
forwarded
The received call information The first line message can be
either (a) or (b) at each extension
a) Caller's name ABC Company
through system programming (
b) Caller's number 12345678 Caller ID Log Priority [904]).
c) Outside (CO) line number Call on CO 1
The call charge of the current outside CO1: 12.35 EUR The charge of a call is displayed
(CO) line call when Call Charge Calculation is
enabled through system
programming ( Call Charge
Calculation [441]). Settings such
as the call charge rate, decimal
point position and currency can
be assigned through system
programming ( 1.20.2 Call
Charge Calculation).
The duration of the current outside (CO) CO 1 0:01'15 The display remains for 5
line call seconds after the call is finished.
The outgoing outside (CO) line
call duration starts when the
specified time expires ( Call
Duration Counter Start [204]).
The display does not show the
duration of intercom calls.

136 Feature Guide

 1.18 Proprietary Telephone (PT) Features

Conditions
• Display Contrast
The display contrast can be adjusted with the Navigator key or the CONTRAST selector. This is
available only for PTs.
• Ringer Volume
The volume of the ringer can be adjusted with the RINGER Volume selector.
• Self-extension Number
A display PT user can confirm his or her own jack number and extension number on the display. Every
time the " " key is pressed, the display switches between "date (month [day], day [month]) and time",
"date (month [day], day [month], year, day of the week)", and "extension number (and extension name
if stored)".
• Date and Time Set
The current date and time are set through system programming ( Date & Time [000]) or the operator/
manager service features. The time format shown on the display PTs while on-hook, "12 h" or "24 h",
can also be selected through system programming ( LCD Time Display [010]).
• Characters (name) or digits (telephone number) exceeding the maximum length of the display are not
displayed.
However, even if the information is not displayed properly, the received information is not altered. When
the information displayed by pressing specific buttons (One-touch Dialling, REDIAL, Save) while on-
hook exceeds 17 characters, the "&" mark will be shown on the right side of the display.
• The call charge, called party's name (when a call is made using System Speed Dialling with a name
assigned), and call duration can be displayed alternately by pressing the CO button whose indicator is
green. Whether the charge or duration is displayed first can be selected through system programming
( LCD Display Mode [630]). When Call Charge Calculation [441] is set to "Disable", call charge
information is not displayed.
• For each call charge, up to 7 digits excluding the decimal point can be displayed. If the call charge
exceeds 7 digits, considering that the decimal point does not move, all numbers will be replaced by
nines (e.g., 99999.99).
• The number of decimal digits displayed for the call charge can be programmed through system
programming ( Decimal Places [190]). The charge is rounded up to the preprogrammed number of
decimal digits.
• On a conference call, call charge information is not displayed.

User Manual References

2.1.6 Changing System Settings Using Programming Mode
3.1.2 Changing Personal Settings Using Programming Mode

Feature Guide 137

1.19 Voice Mail Features

1.19 Voice Mail Features

1.19.1 Voice Mail APT Integration

Description
A Panasonic Voice Processing System (VPS) that supports APT Integration can provide many features and
conveniences that are unachievable using traditional voice mail systems that rely on Inband (DTMF)
Integration.
Many of these features are explained below. For more information, refer to the Installation Manual supplied
with the Panasonic VPS.

1. Automatic Configuration—Quick Setup (or DIP switch initialisation without a PC)

The PBX shares information with the VPS during setup that allows the VPS to automatically create the
appropriate mailboxes for all extension numbers.
The following settings to enable APT Integration must be programmed through system programming to
match the settings of the VPS.
Extension
group 8
VPS
3 Port 1
PBX
4 Port 2

This example uses a Panasonic KX-TVM50/KX-TVP50 VPS, which can be connected with 2-conductor
wire to 2 extension jacks of the PBX.

[Programming Example: Voice Mail Table]

APT Integration VM 1 APT Port*

Enable Port 03 & 04

* VM 1 APT Port [130]

In this example:
When "Port 03 & 04" is selected for VPS, extension jacks 03 and 04 are placed in extension group 8
automatically ( Extension Group [600]). Also the idle extension hunting type is set as "Circular" (
Hunting Type [101]), and the Voice Mail (VM) Hunting Chain and Automated Attendant (AA) Hunting
Chain are automatically enabled in the extension group ( Hunting Group Set [100]).

Note
When "Disable" is selected, the other settings above are reset to their default values.

2. AA Service
Allows the VPS to answer calls and direct callers to dial a number in order to connect themselves to the
desired party (e.g., "Enter the extension number of the desired party.").
It is possible to access VM service from AA service to, for example, record messages.

138 Feature Guide

 1.19 Voice Mail Features

3. VM Service
Allows callers to leave voice messages for specific parties, such as an extension user. Extension users
can then listen to the messages left in their mailboxes at their convenience.

AA Service
A VPS can be used for the AA service as well as the VM service. When a call is directed to a port of the
VPS that is in AA service mode, the caller will hear an outgoing message (OGM). After or while listening to
the OGM, the caller may dial an extension number as directed (e.g., "Enter the extension number of the
desired party.").
1. AA to Extension
AA receives and answers outside (CO) line calls and offers services such as transferring to an
extension or mailbox using DTMF signalling from the calling party.
Outside (CO) Line Call
DIL

PBX

VPS
Transfer
Extension AA 1 AA 2
Busy/No Answer AA Hunting Chain
(Record message)

2. Extension Backup
If the VPS is assigned to ring with other extensions, for example the operator, for the same outside (CO)
line, the VPS can be used as a backup for the operator when the operator cannot answer an incoming
outside (CO) line call.
In order to use this feature, Delayed Ringing must be set for the VPS ( Delayed Ringing—Day/Night/
Lunch [411-413]).

Outside (CO) Line Call

Normal
PBX

Extension
Immediately (e.g., Operator)

VPS

AA 1
10 s delay
AA 2
15 s delay

3. Status Notification to the VPS

When a call is redirected to the VPS, the PBX sends the status of the called extension to the VPS. This
allows the VPS to appropriately handle the call, playing the appropriate OGM for the caller. For
example, if the called extension is in Do Not Disturb (DND) mode, the OGM (e.g., "I am unable to
answer your call right now, but I will get back to you shortly.") can be played.

Feature Guide 139

1.19 Voice Mail Features

VM Service
1. Accessing a Mailbox
The PBX sends special messages to the VPS to indicate which mailbox should be accessed (Follow-
on ID).

2. FWD to a Mailbox of the VPS

An extension user can set his or her calls to be forwarded to the VPS ( 1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding
(FWD)). When a call is received at the extension, the PBX sends the extension's mailbox number to the
VPS, and the VPS answers the call with the appropriate OGM (e.g., "Hi, I'm out of the office today...").

Outside (CO) Line Call

DIL, DISA

Intercom Call PBX

(by Extension,
Operator, etc.)

VPS
FWD
Extension Port 1 Port 2
VM Hunting
Chain

3. Intercept Routing to a Mailbox of the VPS

Outside (CO) line calls via DISA ( 1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)) can be programmed
to be automatically redirected to an extension user's mailbox when the extension user does not or
cannot answer them ( 1.1.1.2 Intercept Routing). The VPS can answer the call with an OGM (e.g., "I
can't take your call now...") and callers can leave messages in the mailbox. In order to use this feature,
a voice mail extension number must be assigned as the intercept destination for the original destination
extension that received the call ( CO Line Mode—Day/Night/Lunch [414-416], Flexible Ringing—
Day/Night/Lunch [408-410], Delayed Ringing—Day/Night/Lunch [411-413]), and "Intercept" must be
selected through system programming ( DISA Intercept Mode [507]).
Outside (CO) Line Call
DISA
PBX

VPS
Intercept
Extension Port 1
Immediately
Port 2
5 s delay

4. Transferring to a Mailbox of the VPS

Extension users can transfer calls to a mailbox, after which callers can leave a message for the desired
party. While answering a call, the extension user simply presses the VM Transfer button and enters the
extension number of the party the caller wishes to leave a message for. The VPS will answer the
transferred call and record a message into the appropriate mailbox.
VM Transfer Button
In order to use this feature, the extension user must use a flexible CO/Direct Station Selection (DSS)
button customised as a VM Transfer button. A voice mail extension number must be assigned to the

140 Feature Guide

 1.19 Voice Mail Features

button when creating it.

5. Listening to Recorded Messages

After the VPS records a message, it will light the appropriate lamp or button on the extension for which
the message was intended, to indicate that there is a new message ( 1.17.1 Message Waiting). The
proprietary telephone (PT) user can play the message back simply by pressing the MESSAGE button
used for mailbox access; he or she does not need to enter a mailbox number. A single line telephone
(SLT) user hears a special dial tone (dial tone 3) when going off-hook if there are any messages in his
or her mailbox, and can play the message back by entering the Message Waiting Answer feature
number.

6. Live Call Screening (LCS)

Similar to a conventional home answering machine, LCS allows a PT user to monitor his or her own
mailbox as a caller is leaving a message and, if desired, answer the call simply by pressing the LCS
button.
PT users can choose one of 2 ways to perform LCS, through personal programming (Live Call
Screening [LCS] Mode Set):
Hands-free mode: The user can screen calls automatically through the built-in speaker.
Private mode: The user will hear an alert tone when a message is being recorded in his or her mailbox.
To screen calls, the user must press the MONITOR, SP-PHONE, or LCS button.
LCS/LCS Cancel Button
A flexible CO/DSS button can be customised as an LCS or LCS Cancel button.

7. 2-way Recording into the VPS

PT users can record their own telephone conversations. These recordings can be stored in the PT
user's own mailbox (2-way Record) or in another user's mailbox (2-way Transfer), depending on which
button the user presses to begin recording.
2-way Record/2-way Transfer Button
A flexible CO/DSS button can be customised as a 2-way Record or 2-way Transfer button.

Note
You should inform the other party that the conversation will be recorded before beginning to record
any telephone conversation.

Conditions

[General]
• A VPS can be assigned as the destination for the following features:
– FWD—All Calls
– FWD—Busy/No Answer
– DISA Intercept Routing—No Answer (IRNA)
For these features, the caller does not need to know the mailbox number of the called extension
because the code is automatically transmitted to the VPS. If a DISA call is forwarded to the VPS by the
IRNA feature from a DISA ring group, the PBX will send the VPS the mailbox number of the extension
within the DISA ring group that is connected to the lowest-numbered jack.

[Live Call Screening (LCS)]

• To prevent the unauthorised screening of calls, a 3-digit password must be entered when activating LCS
for an extension. If the user forgets his or her password, it can be cleared by the operator or manager
(LCS Password Control).

Feature Guide 141

1.19 Voice Mail Features

• If an extension user is screening a call and then goes off-hook to answer it, the VPS will either stop or
continue recording the message, according to system programming ( LCS Recording Mode Set
[620]).
• If a call arrives while an extension user is having a conversation with another party and the extension
has Call Waiting activated, the user will hear a call waiting tone. The user can put the existing call on
hold before accessing LCS.

[2-way Recording into the VPS]

• If all ports of the VPS are busy when a user tries to record a conversation:
– The user hears an alarm tone when pressing the 2-way Record button.
– The user hears an alarm tone after pressing the 2-way Transfer button followed by an extension
number.

Feature Guide References

1.18.2 Flexible Buttons

User Manual References

1.8.3 If a Voice Processing System is Connected
3.1.2 Changing Personal Settings Using Programming Mode

142 Feature Guide

 1.19 Voice Mail Features

1.19.2 Voice Mail Inband (DTMF) Integration

Description
A Panasonic Voice Processing System (VPS) or similar product from another manufacturer can provide
Automated Attendant (AA) and Voice Mail (VM) services when connected to the PBX.
The VPS and PBX communicate with each other by sending DTMF (Dual Tone Multi-Frequency) signals.
For more information, refer to the documentation provided with the VPS.
1. AA Service
Allows the VPS to answer calls and direct callers to dial a number in order to connect themselves to the
desired party (e.g., "Enter the extension number of the desired party."). It is possible to access VM
service from AA service to, for example, record messages.

2. VM Service
Allows callers to leave voice messages for specific parties, such as an extension user. Extension users
can then listen to the messages left in their mailboxes at their convenience.

AA Service
A VPS can be used for the AA service as well as the VM service. When a call is directed to a port of the
VPS that is in AA service mode, the caller will hear an outgoing message (OGM). After or while listening to
the OGM, the caller may dial an extension number as directed (e.g., "Enter the extension number of the
desired party.").
If the VPS transfers a call via the AA service, the PBX will inform the VPS of the status of the called party
using a DTMF status signal so that the VPS will know the status. This enables the VPS to quickly play an
appropriate OGM to the caller (e.g., "I'm handling another call now...", "I'm away from my desk now...", etc.).
The DTMF status signals sent by the PBX are explained below.

[DTMF Status Signals]

Status Condition DTMF Status Signal

Ringback Tone The PBX is ringing the corresponding 1
extension.
Busy Tone The called extension is busy. 2
Reorder Tone The dialled number is invalid. 3
DND Tone The called extension has set DND ( 1.3.1.3 4
Do Not Disturb (DND)).
Answer The called extension has answered the call. 5
Confirm The PBX confirms that a feature (such as 9
Message Waiting) has been set or cancelled on
the extension.
Disconnect The caller has hung up. #9
FWD to VM Ringback Tone The called extension has set FWD to VPS ( 6
1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)) and the PBX is
calling another port of the VPS.
FWD to VM Busy Tone The called extension has set FWD to VPS and 7
all ports of the VPS are busy.

Feature Guide 143

1.19 Voice Mail Features

Status Condition DTMF Status Signal

FWD to Extension Ringback The PBX is calling an extension other than the 8
Tone one dialled, most likely because the called
extension has set its calls to be forwarded to
another extension or because it is a member of
an idle extension hunting group ( 1.2.1 Idle
Extension Hunting).

System Programming
The following settings to enable Inband (DTMF) Integration must be programmed through system
programming to match the settings of the VPS. This example uses a Panasonic KX-TVM/KX-TVP series
VPS, which can be connected to up to 2 extension jacks of the PBX.

[Programming Example: Voice Mail Table]

Voice Mail Port*2

DTMF Integration*1 Numbering Plan*3
Jack 03 Jack 04
Enable Enable Enable Plan 1 or Plan 2

*1 DTMF Integration [103]

*2 DTMF Integration Port [102]
*3 Extension Number [009]

In this example:
To enable the VM Hunting Chain and AA Hunting Chain, programme as follows:
1) Assign all Voice Mail extensions to one extension group in Extension Group [600].
2) Assign "Enable" to the group in Hunting Group Set [100].
3) Select the hunting type of the group in Hunting Type [101].

VM Service
1. Accessing a Mailbox
The PBX sends DTMF signals to the VPS to indicate which mailbox should be accessed (Follow-on
ID).

2. Listening to Recorded Messages

After the VPS records a message, it will light the appropriate lamp or button on the extension for which
the message was intended, to indicate that there is a new message ( 1.17.1 Message Waiting). The
proprietary telephone (PT) user can play the message back simply by pressing the MESSAGE button
used for mailbox access. When the button is pressed, the PBX calls the voice mail extension, then
sends DTMF signals to the VPS to indicate the extension's mailbox number.
A single line telephone (SLT) user hears a special dial tone (dial tone 3) when going off-hook if there
are any messages in his or her mailbox, and can play the message back by entering the Message
Waiting Answer feature number.

Conditions
• A VPS can be assigned as the destination for the following features:

144 Feature Guide

 1.19 Voice Mail Features

– FWD—All Calls
– FWD—Busy/No Answer
– DISA Intercept Routing—No Answer (IRNA) ( 1.1.1.2 Intercept Routing, 1.15.6 Direct Inward
System Access (DISA))
For these features, the caller does not need to know the mailbox number of the called extension
because the code is automatically transmitted to the VPS. If a DISA call is transferred to the VPS by
IRNA from a DISA ring group, the PBX will transmit the mailbox number of the receiving extension with
the lowest jack number.
• In order to achieve proper recording quality, Data Line Security should be turned on for the VPS (
1.10.5 Data Line Security).
• Each extension's mailbox number is the same as its extension number.
• If "TA series" cannot be selected with the PBX type setup menu of the KX-TVM/KX-TVP series VPS,
select "KX-T1232". Follow the steps for the KX-T1232.
• If a call is directed to a VPS port while the operator or manager is recording or playing back an OGM
for DISA/UCD, the PBX cannot send a DTMF signal to the VPS, and so the VPS answers the call with
an OGM (e.g., "Enter the extension number of the desired party.").

User Manual References

1.8.3 If a Voice Processing System is Connected

Feature Guide 145

1.20 Administrative Information Features

1.20 Administrative Information Features

1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording Feature

1.20.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

Description
Automatically logs detailed information for the PBX.

1. SMDR Output Port

The Serial Interface (RS-232C) port can be used to output Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
data to a PC, printer, etc.

2. SMDR Output Data

The following data can be logged and sent to the SMDR output port:
a) Outside (CO) line call information (incoming/outgoing)
b) Call charge information (outgoing)

Memory for SMDR: A limited number of call records can be stored in the PBX. If the memory becomes
full, the oldest call will be overwritten each time a call is received.

146 Feature Guide

 1.20 Administrative Information Features

3. SMDR Format and Contents

[Example]
Pattern A: Without call charge information

Date Time Ext. CO Dial number Duration Code

12/31/05 12:52PM 103 03 12345678901234567890123456789012 00:00'16" ....

12/31/05 12:53PM 103 02 < incoming > 2013570846 00:01'43" ....
12/31/05 *12:54PM 101 02 < incoming > 2013570846 00:07'48" ....
12/31/05 12:56PM 107 03 < DIL incoming >0921234557 00:01'43" ....
12/31/05 1:04PM 103 01 092. . . 1438 00:00'06" 4536
12/31/05 1:04PM 102 03 < DISA incoming > 2013570846 00:00'09" .... 0
12/31/05 1:05PM 103 01 < DISA incoming > 00:00'08" .... 0
12/31/05 1:06PM 103 01 092123456789 00:00'08" ....
12/31/05 1:06PM C-03 02 0921234567 00:00'17" .... 2
12/31/05 1:07PM 103 01 0921234567 00:11'00" . . 13
12/31/05 2:15PM 103 01 0921234567 00:11'00" .101
12/31/05 2:26PM 103 01 F/0927654321 00:03'00" .101
12/31/05 2:27PM 108 03 9=0924567123 00:13'55" ....
12/31/05 3:25PM 02 < UCD waiting > 00:11'48" ....

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)

Pattern B: With call charge information

Date Time Ext. CO Dial number Duration Charge Code

12/31/05 12:52PM 103 03 123456789012345678901234 00:00'16" 0.04 EUR ....

12/31/05 12:53PM 103 02 < incoming > 00:01'43" ....
12/31/05 *12:54PM 101 02 < incoming > 00:07'48" ....
12/31/05 12:56PM 107 03 < DIL incoming > 00:01'43" ....
12/31/05 1:04PM 103 01 092. . . 1438 00:00'06" 0.02 EUR 4536
12/31/05 1:04PM 102 03 < DISA incoming > 00:00'09" .... 0
12/31/05 1:05PM 103 01 < DISA incoming > 00:00'08" .... 0
12/31/05 1:06PM 103 01 092123456789 00:00'08" 0.02 EUR ....
12/31/05 1:06PM C-03 02 0921234567 00:00'17" 0.04 EUR .... 2
12/31/05 1:07PM 103 01 0921234567 00:11'00" 0.55 EUR . . 13
12/31/05 2:15PM 103 01 0921234567 00:11'00" 0.55 EUR .101
12/31/05 2:26PM 103 01 F/0927654321 00:03'00" 0.15 EUR .101
12/31/05 2:27PM 108 03 9=0924567123 00:13'55" 0.67 EUR ....
12/31/05 3:25PM 02 < UCD waiting > 00:11'48" ....

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (8) (7)

Feature Guide 147

1.20 Administrative Information Features

[Explanation]
The following table explains the types of data logged by SMDR. The section numbers below refer to the
field indicated by the numbers above.

Section Number Data Description

(1) Date Shows the date (Month/Day/Year) of the call ( Date & Time
[000]). The date order varies depending on the user's country/
area.
(2) Time Shows the start time of a call as hour/minute/AM or PM. Also
shows the following code:
*: Transferred call ( 1.11.1 Call Transfer)
(3) Ext. (Extension) Shows the number of the extension that was engaged in the
call.
Also shows the following code:
C-xx: Outside-to-Outside (CO-to-CO) line call via the DISA
feature ( 1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA))
(xx=Outside (CO) line number that receives the DISA call)
(4) CO Shows the outside (CO) line number used for the call.
(5) Dial number [Outside (CO) Line Call]
Outgoing Outside (CO) Line Call
Shows the dialled telephone number*1. Digits shown are as
follows:
0 through 9, , #, - (hyphen)
F/: Flash/recall signal ( 1.10.6 Flash/Recall)
=: Host PBX Access code marker ( 1.5.2.8 Host PBX
Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from
a Host PBX)) The marker is displayed between the Host PBX
Access code and the dialled number when a Host PBX Access
code is entered.
. (dot): Secret Dialling

Incoming Outside (CO) Line Call

Shows <incoming> + the caller's telephone number (max. 16
digits). A caller's telephone number is displayed only when an
optional Caller ID card is installed and "With CID" is selected
in Caller ID SMDR Format [906]. It is also possible to show a
caller's telephone number before the call is answered (
Caller ID SMDR Printout [907]).
Also shows the following codes:
<DISA incoming>: Incoming outside (CO) line call via the
DISA feature
<DIL incoming>: Incoming outside (CO) line call via the DIL
feature ( 1.1.1.1 Direct In Line (DIL))
<UCD waiting>: Incoming outside (CO) line call via the UCD
feature ( 1.2.2 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD))
When the UCD waiting call is answered, a new record is
started.

148 Feature Guide

 1.20 Administrative Information Features

Section Number Data Description

(6) Duration Shows the duration of the outside (CO) line call or the UCD call
waiting time in hours/minutes/seconds.
(7) Code Shows the account code appended to the call ( 1.5.2.3
Account Code Entry), the account code index number (e.g.,
13), the number of the extension that used the Walking COS
feature (e.g., 101), or DISA security code status (e.g., 0).
0: A DISA incoming call without a DISA security code
1 to 4: A DISA incoming call with a DISA security code number
Actual DISA security codes are not printed by SMDR ( DISA
Security Code [512]).
(8) Charge Shows the call charge of the outside (CO) line call ( Call
Charge Calculation [441]). Up to 3 currency characters (e.g.,
EUR for Euro) can be assigned through system programming
( Currency [921]). The charge can consist of up to 7 digits
(e.g., 88888.75), and the number of decimal places can be
assigned through system programming ( 1.20.2 Call Charge
Calculation).

*1 A maximum of 32 digits can be shown when "Without Charge" is selected in Call Charge Information SMDR Format 1 [922].
If "With Charge" is selected, the maximum is 24 digits.

The following data can be controlled through system programming to adjust whether (or how) they are
printed or displayed by SMDR.

[Programmable Items]

Item Description
Incoming/Outgoing outside Controls whether incoming/outgoing outside (CO) line calls are
(CO) line call shown ( Incoming/Outgoing Call Selection for Printing [802]). Even
if "On" or "Toll" is selected for outgoing outside (CO) line calls or even
if "On" is selected for incoming outside (CO) line calls, when "MODE
2" is selected in SMDR Mode for Printing [929], the call log
information is not displayed by SMDR, but the information for each
extension is displayed by Call Log Printout.
If "Toll" is selected for outgoing outside (CO) line calls, only calls that
are checked in TRS—COS 2-5 Denied Code [302-305] and are
allowed, are shown.
Caller's identification Controls whether a caller's telephone number is shown ( Caller ID
SMDR Format [906]). When this is set to display telephone numbers,
even if the PBX receives a caller's name by the Caller ID feature, only
the telephone number is shown.
Secret Dialling Controls whether a secret dialling number stored in System Speed
Dialling Number [001] or stored as a One-touch Dialling button is
shown by SMDR ( Secret Number SMDR Print Suppression [803]).
Account Code Controls whether the account code stored in Account Code [310] or
just the index of the account code is shown ( SMDR Account Code
[805]). The index of the account code is shown when "Verify-All" or
"Verify-Toll" is selected in Account Code Mode [605].

Feature Guide 149

1.20 Administrative Information Features

Item Description
Call Charge Controls whether the charge for outside (CO) line calls is shown or
not ( Call Charge Information SMDR Format 1 [922]), or whether
nonessential zeros that precede the charge are shown by SMDR (
Call Charge Information SMDR Format 2 [923]).
System programming items Controls whether system programming items that have already been
assigned are shown based on the following parameters ( System
Data Dump [804]):
a) All para: All data
b) System para: All data except for "CO para", "Extn. para",
"DSS para" and "Speed dial"
c) CO para: The data assigned for each outside (CO) line
d) Extn. para: The data assigned for each extension
e) DSS para: The data assigned on the Direct Station
Selection (DSS) buttons and Programmable Feature (PF)
buttons on the DSS Console
f) Speed dial: The System Speed Dialling numbers and
names in System Speed Dialling Number [001] and System
Speed Dialling Name [011]
g) Stop output: Not shown

Conditions
• SMDR data is not deleted even if the PBX is restarted. It is cleared when output via RS-232C to a PC,
printer, etc., or by performing System Data Clear.
• Multilingual Display by SMDR
It is possible to select the display language used for SMDR through system programming ( SMDR
Language [806]).
• The PBX waits for a preprogrammed length of time ( Call Duration Counter Start [204]) after the end
of seizing an outside (CO) line or dialling, before starting the call duration counter for outgoing outside
(CO) line calls. When the PBX has sent out all dialled digits to the telephone company and this timer
expires, the PBX begins measuring the duration of the call. A display proprietary telephone (PT) shows
the elapsed time of the call. The starting time and the total duration of the call are logged by SMDR.
If Reverse Signal Detection is enabled for an outside (CO) line ( Polarity Reverse Detection [424]),
the PBX will start the call duration counter immediately after the outside party answers the call.
• For SMS users
When an SLT user makes an SMS centre call ( 1.17.3 Fixed Line SMS Terminal Support), in some
cases the duration of the call may not be verified with SMDR, because it takes very little time to send
SMS messages. To verify the duration of these calls, it is recommended to set the start timer of call
duration to "5 s" or "Instantly" through system programming ( Call Duration Counter Start [204]).
• SMDR Format
The following SMDR format parameters can be set through system programming ( SMDR Parameter
[801]) in order to match the paper size being used by the printer:
a) Page Length: determines the number of lines per page.
b) Skip Perforation: determines the number of lines to be skipped at the end of every page.
The page length should be at least 4 lines longer than the skip perforation length.
The title is placed on the first 3 lines of every page.

150 Feature Guide

 1.20 Administrative Information Features

To enable the changes, you must turn the power switch of the PBX off and back on again after changing
this setting.

Page
Length
Skip (66 lines)
Perforation

Machine
Perforation

• Serial Interface (RS-232C) Parameters

The following communication parameters can be assigned for the Serial Interface (RS-232C) port
through system programming ( SMDR RS-232C Parameter [800]):
a) New Line (NL) Code: Select the code appropriate for the PC or printer. If the PC or printer
automatically feeds lines with carriage return, select "CR". If not, select "CR+LF".
b) Baud Rate: Baud rate indicates the transmission speed of data from the PBX to the PC or printer.
c) Word Length: Word length indicates how many bits compose each character.
d) Parity Bit: Parity bit indicates what type of parity is used to detect errors in the string of bits
composing a character. Make an appropriate selection depending on the requirements of the PC
or printer.
e) Stop Bit Length: Stop bit indicates the end of a bit string that composes a character. Select an
appropriate value depending on the requirements of the PC or printer.
• The codes for "Dial number" will be abbreviated as shown below, if all of the following conditions are
met:
– an optional Caller ID card is installed.
– "With CID" is selected in Caller ID SMDR Format [906].
– "With Charge" is selected in Call Charge Information SMDR Format 1 [922].
Abbreviation of codes:
<incoming> <I>
<DISA incoming> <DI>
<DIL incoming> <LI>
<UCD waiting> <UW>
• If the charge of a call exceeds 7 digits, considering that the decimal point does not move, all numbers
will be replaced by nines (e.g., 99999.99).
• Before changing the decimal point position ( Decimal Places [190]), output or clear all SMDR data.
Otherwise, the charge value for the accumulated data will be displayed incorrectly.

Installation Manual References

2.8.1 Connecting Peripherals
4.1.5 System Reset with System Data Clear

Feature Guide 151

1.20 Administrative Information Features

1.20.1.2 Call Log Printout for Each Extension

Description
Calls can also be logged according to which extension they were made from, and printed out. An extension
assigned as the manager extension can use the following features through manager programming:
a) Call Log Print Out and Clear, for Each Extension
b) All Clear

[Example]
The manager can print out call logs for each extension. Up to 500 outgoing outside (CO) line calls can be
logged in the PBX. If the memory becomes full, the oldest call will be overwritten each time a call is received.
Calls stored since the manager cleared the call log for an extension can be printed out.

**********************************************
* 103 : Tony Viola *
**********************************************
(1) Starting Date : Dec.29.05 07:00PM**
Present Date : Dec.31.05 09:00PM

Date Time Ext. CO Dial number Duration Charge Code

12/31/05 *12:52PM 103 03 123456789012345678901234 00:00'16" 0.04 EUR ....

12/31/05 1:04PM 103 01 092...1438 00:00'06" 0.02 EUR 4536
12/31/05 1:06PM 103 01 092123456789 00:00'08" 0.02 EUR ....
12/31/05 1:07PM 103 01 0921234567 00:11'00" 0.55 EUR ..13
12/31/05 2:15PM 103 01 0921234567 00:11'00" 0.55 EUR .101
12/31/05 2:26PM 103 01 F/0927654321 00:03'00" 0.15 EUR .101
Total 1.33 EUR

(2)

(1) "Starting Date" shows the start date (Month/Day/Year) of the call log. "**" indicates that there may
be overwritten calls that are not shown on the print out. In this case, the total of the shown call charges
may be different from the actual total charge. The total charge under the line is the correct one. The
date format varies depending on the user's country/area.
(2) "Charge" shows the call charge when Call Charge Calculation is enabled ( Call Charge
Calculation [441]) and "With Charge" is selected ( Call Charge Information SMDR Format 1 [922])
through system programming. A call charge of up to 7 digits is shown for each call, and the Total can
consist of up to a maximum of 17 digits including whole numbers (max. 10 digits), the decimal point,
and a preprogrammed number of decimal digits (max. 6 digits) ( Decimal Places [190]). If the call
charge exceeds the maximum number of digits, considering that the decimal point does not move, all
numbers will be replaced by nines.

Conditions
• Call Log Printout data is not deleted even if the PBX is restarted. It is cleared through manager
programming or by performing System Data Clear.
• Even if an extension user holds a call, the duration of the call will be counted. If an extension user
transfers the call, the count of duration will restart at the destination extension.
• SMDR Mode for Printing
One of the following modes can be selected through system programming ( SMDR Mode for Printing
[929]):

152 Feature Guide

 1.20 Administrative Information Features

a) MODE 1
Outside (CO) line call information is displayed by SMDR ( 1.20.1.1 Station Message Detail
Recording (SMDR)), and call log information for each extension is displayed by Call Log Printout.
b) MODE 2
Only call log information for each extension is displayed by Call Log Printout.
• It is possible to control whether a secret dialling number stored in System Speed Dialling Number [001]
or stored as a One-touch Dialling button is shown by Call Log Printout ( Secret Number SMDR Print
Suppression [803]). When "No Printing" is selected, numbers dialled secretly will be shown as dots.
• It is possible to control whether "Dial number" is shown by Call Log Printout ( Secret Printing [924]).
• Before changing the decimal point position ( Decimal Places [190]), clear all Call Log Printout data.
Otherwise, the charge value for the accumulated data will be displayed incorrectly.

Installation Manual References

4.1.5 System Reset with System Data Clear

User Manual References

3.2.2 Managing Call Logs and Call Charges

Feature Guide 153

1.20 Administrative Information Features

1.20.2 Call Charge Calculation

Description
The PBX can calculate call charges for outside (CO) line calls to preprogrammed destinations. The call
charge information can be shown on SMDR and the display of proprietary telephones (PTs).

Note
This feature is a simple estimation of call charges and will not necessarily match the charges billed by
your telephone company.

[Programming Procedures]
1. Call Charge Calculation
Turn on Call Charge Calculation for each outside (CO) line to enable this feature ( Call Charge
Calculation [441]).

2. Time Table
Since the charge of a call may vary depending on the time of day and the day of the week, 3 call charge
rates, Peak/Off Peak/Economy, can be assigned for each hour of each day of the week.
Up to 4 different Time Tables can be programmed ( Call Charge Calculation—Time Table 1/2/3/4
[162/169/176/183]). Which Time Table is applied to a certain call is decided by the outside (CO) line
carrying the call ( Call Charge Table Assignment [442]).

3. Call Charge Table

A total of 100 leading numbers*1 (Max. 10 digits) can be stored as destinations to decide how a call is
charged for each call charge rate (Peak/Off Peak/Economy). A leading number can have different
values in each of the 4 tables. Which Call Charge Table is applied to a certain call is decided by the
outside (CO) line carrying the call ( Call Charge Table Assignment [442]).
The values to be set for each call charge rate are as follows*2:
– Flat Charge
– Flat Duration
– Unit Charge
– Unit Duration

*1 Call Charge Calculation—Registering Leading Numbers [161]

*2 Call Charge Table 1/2/3/4—Peak Flat Charge and Duration [163/170/177/184],
Call Charge Table 1/2/3/4—Peak Unit Charge and Duration [164/171/178/185],
Call Charge Table 1/2/3/4—Off Peak Flat Charge and Duration [165/172/179/186],
Call Charge Table 1/2/3/4—Off Peak Unit Charge and Duration [166/173/180/187],
Call Charge Table 1/2/3/4—Economy Flat Charge and Duration [167/174/181/188],
Call Charge Table 1/2/3/4—Economy Unit Charge and Duration [168/175/182/189]

154 Feature Guide

 1.20 Administrative Information Features

[Programming Example]
<Table Selection> <Time Table>
Outside (CO) Time Table 1
Table No.
Line No. Week 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
1 1 E E E O O O O O O O O O
AM
2 3 Sunday
PM O O O E E E E P P P P P
3 4
AM E E E P P O O O O O O O
Monday
PM E E E E P P P P P P P P
(Cont.) : : : : : : : : : : : : : :
: : : : : : : : : : : : : :
AM E E E E E E E E E E E E
Saturday
PM E E E E E E E E E E E E
P: Peak O: Off Peak E: Economy
<Call Charge Table>
Call Charge Table 1
Location Leading Peak Off Peak Economy
No. No. Flat Charge Unit Charge Flat Charge Unit Charge Flat Charge Unit Charge
and Duration and Duration and Duration and Duration and Duration and Duration
00 013 70 / 60 s 40 / 30 s 50 / 60 s 30 / 30 s 40 / 60 s 25 / 30 s
01 012
02 02
03 03 100 / 180 s 50 / 30 s 20 / 40 s 10 / 50 s 20 / 40 s 10 / 60 s
(Cont.) : : : : : : : :
: : : : : : : :
99 099 100 / 180 s 50 / 30 s 20 / 40 s 10 / 50 s 20 / 40 s 10 / 60 s

Note
If the dialled number does not match any Leading Number stored in the call charge table, the call
charge for location number "99" is applied to the call. Therefore it is necessary to set the values for
location number "99".

4. Calculation Method
The call charge is calculated based on the following graph:
Charge

Unit Charge
Unit Duration
Flat Charge

Flat Duration

Call Duration

Duration

Waiting time before the

call duration counter starts : Point where the call charge increases

Feature Guide 155

1.20 Administrative Information Features

a) If the Call Duration is less than the Flat Duration:

Call Charge = Flat Charge

b) If the Call Duration is more than the Flat Duration:

Call Duration Flat Duration
Call Charge = Flat Charge Unit Charge Unit Charge Whole Number Part of
Unit Duration

[Programming Example] (Using the example shown in "3. Call Charge Table")
If the dialled number is "03XXXX", and the call is made at Peak time.
a) If the Call Duration is 160 s:

Call Charge = 100

Flat Charge

b) If the Call Duration is 250 s:

Call Charge = 100 50 50 2 = 250

Flat Charge
Unit Charge
Call Duration Flat Duration
Unit Charge
250 180
= 2.333...
30

Unit Duration

5. Call Charge Display

Information about the call charge can be shown on the display of a PT. The display can contain up to 3
characters (e.g., EUR for Euro) for the currency ( Currency [921]) and up to 7 digits, excluding the
decimal point, for each call charge. The decimal point position (the number of significant decimal digits)
for the charge can also be programmed ( Decimal Places [190]). Additionally, the order in which
information is displayed can be programmed ( LCD Display Mode [630]). For more information, refer
to "1.18.4 Display Information".

6. Budget Management
It is possible to limit telephone usage to a preprogrammed budget on each extension ( Budget
Management [925]). For example, an extension in a rented office may have a prepaid limit for telephone
usage. If the total of call charges reaches the limit, the extension user cannot make further outside (CO)
line calls ( Budget Limit Selection [926]). An extension assigned as the manager can increase the
limit or clear the previous call charges. For more information, refer to "1.8.3 Budget Management".

7. Call Charge Management

An extension assigned as the manager extension can access the following features through manager
programming:
a. Call Charge Reference and Clear, for Each Extension/Each Outside (CO) Line/Account Code
b. All Clear

156 Feature Guide

 1.20 Administrative Information Features

c. Call Charge Print Out

d. Budget Management for Each Extension ( 1.8.3 Budget Management)

[Example of Call Charge Reference]

Call Log Printout for Each Extension:

**********************************************
* 103 : Tony Viola *
**********************************************
Starting Date : Dec.29.05 07:00PM**
Present Date : Dec.31.05 09:00PM

Date Time Ext. CO Dial number Duration Charge Code

12/31/05 *12:52PM 103 03 123456789012345678901234 00:00'16" 0.04 EUR ....

12/31/05 1:04PM 103 01 092...1438 00:00'06" 0.02 EUR 4536
12/31/05 1:06PM 103 01 092123456789 00:00'08" 0.02 EUR ....
12/31/05 1:07PM 103 01 0921234567 00:11'00" 0.55 EUR ..13
12/31/05 2:15PM 103 01 0921234567 00:11'00" 0.55 EUR .101
12/31/05 2:26PM 103 01 F/0927654321 00:03'00" 0.15 EUR .101
Total 1.33 EUR

Conditions
• When searching for a Leading Number in a Call Charge Table, the PBX checks only the dialled
telephone number, excluding Carrier Exception codes ( Carrier Exception Code [300]), Host PBX
Access codes ( Host PBX Access Code [403]), and 1st Carrier Selection code ( 1st Carrier
Selection Code [359]).
• When the dialled number matches several Leading Numbers in the Call Charge Table, the location with
the longest matching number is selected.
• The PBX only checks the numbers dialled within a preprogrammed length of time ( Call Duration
Counter Start [204]). The rest of the numbers are not applied for the Leading Number check.
[Example]

<Call Charge Table>

Call Charge Table 1
Location Leading Peak
No. No. Flat Charge Unit Charge
and Duration and Duration
00 014 50 / 60 s 30 / 30 s
01 01 45 / 60 s 25 / 30 s
(Cont.) : : : :
: : : :
In this example:
When dialling "014XXXX" and "4" is dialled after the Call Duration Counter Start [204], location number
"01" will be selected. SMDR shows "014XXXX" as the "Dial number".
• To increase the accuracy of Call Charge Calculation, match the Call Duration Counter Start [204] timer
with your telephone company's inter-digit timer.
• The call charge rate (Peak/Off Peak/Economy) when a call is established is used to calculate the call
charge.
• If Reverse Signal Detection is enabled for an outside (CO) line ( Polarity Reverse Detection [424]),
the PBX will start the call duration counter ( Call Duration Counter Start [204]) immediately after the

Feature Guide 157

1.20 Administrative Information Features

outside party answers the call.

Note that Call Charge Calculation will not function if the call duration counter is set to "Instantly" when
Reverse Signal Detection is disabled.
• When a call is disconnected due to the Extension-to-CO Line Call Duration [212] timer, if the call charge
is set to increase at the same time as disconnection, the increase will not be registered by the PBX.
• When Flat Duration is set to "0", the total of the Flat Charge and Unit Charge is charged immediately
after the preprogrammed length of time ( Call Duration Counter Start [204]) or the outside party
answers the call.
When Unit Duration is set to "0", the Flat Charge is charged immediately after the preprogrammed
length of time or the outside party answers the call. Then, the Unit Charge is charged just once, when
the Flat Duration expires.
[Example]
a) Flat Duration: 0 s; Flat Charge: 0; Unit Duration: 60 s; Unit Charge: 10
Charge

40
30
20

Waiting time before the 10

call duration counter starts
60 s Duration

b) Flat Duration: 0 s; Flat Charge: 100; Unit Duration: 60 s; Unit Charge: 10

Charge

140
130
120
110

Waiting time before the

call duration counter starts
60 s Duration

c) Flat Duration: 0 s*; Flat Charge: 10; Unit Duration: 0 s*; Unit Charge: 0
* In this case, Flat Duration and Unit Duration could be any value.
Charge

10
Waiting time before the
call duration counter starts
Duration

d) Flat Duration: 60 s; Flat Charge: 10; Unit Duration: 0 s; Unit Charge: 100
Charge

110

10
Waiting time before the
call duration counter starts
60 s Duration

158 Feature Guide

 1.20 Administrative Information Features

• Flat Charges and Unit Charges for each call charge rate (Peak/Off Peak/Economy) consist of up to 7
digits excluding the decimal point (e.g., 12345.67).
• The charge of a call can consist of no more than 7 digits. For example, if the number of decimal places
( Decimal Places [190]) is set to 3, the maximum call charge will be calculated as 9 999.999 even if
the actual charge exceeds this.
• To log the charge of calls on SMDR, "With Charge" must be selected in Call Charge Information SMDR
Format 1 [922]. Whether nonessential zeros that precede the charge are shown can be programmed
in Call Charge Information SMDR Format 2 [923].
• It is possible to control whether "Dial number" is shown by Call Log Printout ( Secret Printing [924]).

User Manual References

3.2.2 Managing Call Logs and Call Charges

Feature Guide 159

1.21 Extension Controlling Features

1.21 Extension Controlling Features

1.21.1 Extension Feature Clear

Description
Extension users can simultaneously clear all of the following features set on their own telephone:

Feature Value after Extension Feature Clear

Absent Message Off
Automatic Callback Busy Off
Background Music (BGM) Off
Call Forwarding (FWD) Off
Call Pickup Deny Allow
Call Waiting Disable
Data Line Security Off
Do Not Disturb (DND) Off
Executive Busy Override Deny Allow
Hot Line The stored telephone numbers will be cleared.
Log-in/Log-out Log-in
Message Waiting All messages left by other extensions will be cleared.
Paging Deny Allow
Room Monitor Off
Timed Reminder Cleared
Voice Mail Integration Off

This feature is also known as Station Feature Clear or Station Programme Clear.

User Manual References

1.7.8 Clearing Features Set at Your Extension (Extension Feature Clear)

160 Feature Guide

 1.21 Extension Controlling Features

1.21.2 Timed Reminder

Description
Each extension user can set an alarm to be used as a wake-up call or reminder. This feature can be
programmed to activate daily or one time only. If the user goes off-hook during the alarm, a special dial tone
(dial tone 3) will be heard.

Remote Timed Reminder

An extension assigned as the operator or manager extension can remotely set, cancel, and confirm the
timed reminder of the desired extension. This feature is useful, for example, for a small hotel or motel to set
a wake-up call for an extension in a guest room, or for a parent to set a wake-up call for an extension in a
child's room.

Conditions
• Be sure that the PBX clock is set to the correct time.
• Setting a new alarm time clears the previous alarm time.
• There is no limit for the number of the extensions that can set Timed Reminder at the same time.

User Manual References

1.7.1 Setting the Alarm (Timed Reminder)
2.1.3 Setting an Alarm for Other Extensions (Remote Timed Reminder [Wake-up Call])

Feature Guide 161

1.22 Audible Tone Features

1.22 Audible Tone Features

1.22.1 Dial Tone

Description
The following dial tones inform extension users about features activated on their extensions:

Type Description
Tone 1 A normal dial tone is heard when none of the features listed for dial tones 2 and
3 have been set.
Tone 2 Heard when any of the following features is set.
• Absent Message
• Background Music (BGM) (for proprietary telephones [PTs] only)
• Call Forwarding (FWD)
• Call Pickup Deny
• Data Line Security
• Do Not Disturb (DND)
• Extension Lock
• Hot Line (for single line telephones [SLTs] only)
• Message Waiting (for PTs only)
• Remote Extension Lock
• Timed Reminder
Tone 3 Heard when any of the following features is performed.
• Account Code Entry
• Answering a call from Timed Reminder
• Going off-hook with an SLT that has messages waiting

Conditions
• Dial Tone Type for ARS/Account Code Entry (Verify-Toll mode only)
Through system programming, it is possible to select the dial tone type for the Automatic Route
Selection (ARS)/Account Code Entry (Verify-Toll mode only) feature ( ARS Dial Tone [362]).

Feature Guide References

4.2.1 Tones/Ring Tones

162 Feature Guide

 1.22 Audible Tone Features

1.22.2 Confirmation Tone

Description
At the end of a feature operation, the PBX confirms the success of the operation by sending a confirmation
tone to the extension user.

Type Description
Tone 1 Sent when the setting is accepted, or sent when the Extension Lock feature is
set or cancelled.
Tone 2 Sent when the new setting is identical to the previous one, or sent when certain
features are successfully performed or accessed (e.g., Call Hold, Automatic
Callback Busy).
Tone 3 Sent before a conversation is established when accessing the following features:
• Call Pickup
• Call Hold Retrieve with the Feature Number
• Conference
• Paging/Paging Answer

Conditions
• It is possible to eliminate confirmation tone 3 (except for Call Hold Retrieve with the Feature Number)
through system programming ( Call Pickup Tone [117], Conference Tone [105], External Pager
Access Tone [106]).

Feature Guide References

4.2.1 Tones/Ring Tones

Feature Guide 163

1.22 Audible Tone Features

164 Feature Guide

 Section 2
System Configuration and Administration
Features

Feature Guide 165

2.1 System Configuration—Hardware

2.1 System Configuration—Hardware

2.1.1 Extension Jack Configuration

Description
Extension jacks are used to connect proprietary telephones (PTs), single line telephones (SLTs), Direct
Station Selection (DSS) Consoles, and Voice Processing Systems (VPSs) to the PBX.

Conditions
• PT and SLT in Parallel Mode
A PT and an SLT can be connected to an extension jack and used in parallel mode.
• DSS Console and Paired Telephone Assignment
When a DSS Console is connected, a PT must be paired with the DSS Console through system
programming ( DSS Console Jack Assignment [003], Console Paired Telephone [004]). Each
extension jack number should be unique.
• Automatic Detection
A PT and an SLT can be connected to an extension jack with no programming required.

166 Feature Guide

 2.2 System Configuration—Software

2.2 System Configuration—Software

2.2.1 Class of Service (COS)

Description
Each extension is assigned a class of service (COS) number ( TRS-COS—Day/Night/Lunch [601-603]).
The following features operate differently depending on an extension's COS.
a) TRS ( 1.8.1 Toll Restriction (TRS))
b) Walking COS ( 1.8.5 Walking COS)

Conditions
• Walking COS
An extension user can make a call from an extension with a lower COS by using his or her own COS
temporarily.

User Manual References

1.2.6 Using Your Calling Privileges at Another Extension (Walking COS)

Feature Guide 167

2.2 System Configuration—Software

2.2.2 Group

Description
This PBX supports various types of groups.

1. Outside (CO) Line Group

Outside (CO) lines can be grouped into 3 outside (CO) line groups based on properties such as carrier
or outside (CO) line type ( CO Line Group Number [404]).
Each outside (CO) line can belong to only one outside (CO) line group.

2. Extension Group
Extensions can be grouped into 8 extension groups ( Extension Group [600]).
Each extension group can have the following attribute set:
a) Call Pickup Group
b) Paging Group
c) Idle Extension Hunting Group
d) Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) Group
e) Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Ring Group
Every extension must belong to one extension group and cannot belong to more than one extension
group.
Assignable Extensions: Proprietary telephones (PTs)/single line telephones (SLTs)
[Example]

Extension Group 1 Extension Group 2 Extension Group 3 Extension Group 4

Extn. 101 Extn. 102 Extn. 103 Extn. 104 Extn. 105 Extn. 106 Extn. 107 Extn. 108

2.1. Call Pickup Group

Using the Call Pickup feature, extensions can answer any calls within the call pickup group to which
they belong.

2.2. Paging Group

Using the Paging feature, extensions can make a page to any paging group, or answer a page
made to any group.

2.3. Idle Extension Hunting Group

If a called extension is busy, Idle Extension Hunting redirects the incoming call to an idle member
of the same extension group ( Hunting Group Set [100]). When calls are received, idle
extensions are automatically searched for according to a preprogrammed hunting type ( Hunting
Type [101]): Circular Hunting or Terminated Hunting.

2.4. Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) Group

A UCD group is a group of extensions that receives UCD calls directed to the group ( UCD Group
[520]). To use this feature, "UCD" must be selected as the distribution method for the desired
outside (CO) line port ( CO Line Mode—Day/Night/Lunch [414-416]).

168 Feature Guide

 2.2 System Configuration—Software

2.5. Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Ring Group

A DISA ring group is a specific extension group that receives DISA calls directed to the group. All
extensions in the group assigned as an Automated Attendant (AA) destination ( DISA Built-in
AA [501]) ring simultaneously. To use this feature, "DISA" must be selected as the distribution
method for the desired outside (CO) line port ( CO Line Mode—Day/Night/Lunch [414-416]) and
"With AA" must be selected as the destination of incoming outside (CO) line calls via the DISA
feature ( DISA Incoming Call Dial Mode [500]).

Feature Guide References

1.2.1 Idle Extension Hunting
1.2.2 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
1.2.3 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Ring
1.4.1.3 Call Pickup
1.14.1 Paging

Feature Guide 169

2.2 System Configuration—Software

2.2.3 Time Service

Description
Time service modes are used by many PBX features to determine how they will function during different
times of day. For example, incoming calls can be directed to sales staff during the day and to a Voice
Processing System (VPS) at night, extension users can be prohibited from making long-distance calls
during lunch time, etc.
There are 3 time service modes—day, night, and lunch. The start times of each time service mode and end
time of lunch mode are programmed for each day of the week in a Time Table.

1. Time Service Switching Mode

The current time service mode can switch automatically to another time service mode at the time
assigned in the Time Table. It is possible, however, to switch time service modes manually.
Whether time service modes are normally switched manually or automatically is determined through
system programming ( Time Service Switching Mode [006]).

Switching Mode Description Condition

Automatic The current time service mode will switch The current time service
automatically to another time service mode at mode (day/night/lunch)
the time assigned in the Time Table, and can be and the switching mode
switched manually by pressing the Day, Night, (automatic/manual) can
or Lunch button or by entering the Time Service be switched manually by
feature number. an extension assigned
as the operator or
Manual The current time service mode will switch only
manager extension.
when the Day, Night, or Lunch button is pressed
or when the Time Service feature number is
entered.

2. Time Table
A Time Table has 3 modes—day, night, and lunch. A Time Table can be programmed to control when
each time service mode starts (and therefore, the previous time service mode ends), and can be
programmed separately for each day of the week.

[Programming Example: Time Table]

Time Schedule* Day Night Lunch

Start Time Start Time Start Time End Time
Sunday Not Stored Not Stored Not Stored Not Stored
Monday 09:00 17:00 12:00 13:00
Tuesday 09:00 17:00 12:00 13:00
(Cont.) : : : : :
: : : : :

* Time Service Start Time [007]

170 Feature Guide

 2.2 System Configuration—Software

[Visualisation of Time Schedule]

Monday Tuesday

00:00 03:00 06:00 09:00 12:00 15:00 18:00 21:00 00:00

Time Table

Night Day Lunch Day Night

Day Lunch Night

Note that time service modes can be arranged as they are needed (for example, night mode can occur
in the morning and afternoon, if necessary) and not all time service modes need to be used in a time
schedule. Also note that day mode or night mode resumes automatically when lunch mode ends.

3. Programming Items Using Time Service

The following programming items will be affected by the time service:
a) Flexible Outward Dialling—Day/Night/Lunch [405-407]
b) Flexible Ringing—Day/Night/Lunch [408-410]
c) Delayed Ringing—Day/Night/Lunch [411-413]
d) CO Line Mode—Day/Night/Lunch [414-416]
e) DRD Ring Pattern 2 Extension Assignment—Day/Night/Lunch [427-429] (New Zealand only)
f) DRD Ring Pattern 3 Extension Assignment—Day/Night/Lunch [430-432] (New Zealand only)
g) TRS-COS—Day/Night/Lunch [601-603]
h) Doorphone Ringing—Day/Night/Lunch [700-702]
i) Door Opener—Day/Night/Lunch [703-705]

4. Day/Night/Lunch Button
A flexible Direct Station Selection (DSS) button can customised as a Day, Night, or Lunch button by the
operator or manager.
These buttons can be used to switch the current time service mode.
Each button shows the current status as follows:

Light Pattern Status

Off Day/Night/Lunch off
Red on Day/Night/Lunch on

Note
Extension users can press the "#" key on their proprietary telephones (PTs) to display the current
time service mode.

Conditions
• The start times of each time service mode and end time of lunch mode can be specified through system
programming ( Time Service Start Time [007]).

Feature Guide 171

2.2 System Configuration—Software

Feature Guide References

1.18.2 Flexible Buttons

User Manual References

1.7.7 Checking the Time Service Mode
2.1.2 Switching the Time Service Mode (Time Service)

172 Feature Guide

 2.2 System Configuration—Software

2.2.4 Operator/Manager Features

Description
This PBX supports one operator and one manager. Any extension can be designated as the operator
through system programming ( Operator Assignment [008]). The operator is the destination of Operator
Call. The extension connected to extension jack 01 is the manager extension. An extension assigned as the
operator or manager extension is allowed to use certain features that most extensions cannot, as follows:

Manager
Feature Description Details in
Password*
Manager System Speed Sets the System Speed Required • 1.6.1.5 Speed
Programming Dialling Number Dialling number. Dialling—
[001] Personal/System
System Speed Sets the System Speed Required • 1.6.1.5 Speed
Dialling Name Dialling name. Dialling—
[011] Personal/System
DISA Security Sets the DISA security Required • 1.15.6 Direct
Code [512] code. Inward System
Access (DISA)
DISA Security Sets the number of digits for Required • 1.15.6 Direct
Code Digits the DISA security code. Inward System
[530] Access (DISA)
Call Log Printout Prints and clears call logs Required • 1.20.1.2 Call
for Each for each extension. Log Printout for
Extension Each Extension
Call Charge Sets, displays, clears, and Required • 1.20.2 Call
Management prints the call charge data. Charge
Calculation
Extension Sets the extension Required –
Password Set password. This password is
used for the Walking COS
feature and the Remote
Extension Lock feature.
Each extension's password
should be unique.
Remote Extension Lock Sets or cancels Extension Not required • 1.8.4 Extension
Lock on an extension Lock
remotely.
Time Service Switches the time service Not required • 2.2.3 Time
mode manually. Service
Remote Timed Reminder (Wake-up Sets or cancels Timed Not required • 1.21.2 Timed
Call) Reminder to any extension Reminder
remotely.
Incoming Call Log in the Common Clears all Caller ID Not required • 1.16.2 Incoming
Area—CLEAR ALL information stored in the Call Log
common area.

Feature Guide 173

2.2 System Configuration—Software

Manager
Feature Description Details in
Password*
Incoming Call Log Display Lock in Locks or unlocks the Not required • 1.8.4 Extension
the Common Area Incoming Call Log for the Lock
common area. • 1.16.2 Incoming
Call Log
301st Incoming Call Logged in the Selects how new calls are Not required • 1.16.2 Incoming
Common Area treated when Incoming Call Call Log
Log for the common area is
full.
Outgoing Message (OGM) for Records and plays back Not required • 1.15.5 Outgoing
DISA/UCD OGMs used by DISA, Message (OGM)
Uniform Call Distribution for DISA/UCD
(UCD), and 3-level
Automated Attendant (AA).
Erases OGMs used by
DISA and UCD.
Date and Time Setting Adjusts the current date Not required –
and time.
Extension Lock—CANCEL ALL Cancels Extension Lock, Not required • 1.8.4 Extension
Incoming Call Log Display Lock
Lock in the Personal Area, • 1.16.2 Incoming
and Message Waiting for Call Log
Another Extension Lock at
• 1.17.1 Message
all extensions.
Waiting
LCS Password Control Clears the Live Call Not required • 1.19.1 Voice
Screening (LCS) password. Mail APT
Integration

* The system password may be entered instead of the extension password for the manager (manager
password).

Operator Call
An extension user can call the operator by entering the Operator Call number ( Automatic Line Access
[121]), often simply, "0". If no operator is assigned, the caller will hear a reorder tone. If the Automatic Line
Access number is assigned to "0" through system programming, the Operator Call number will be changed
to "9".

Note
For New Zealand, the Automatic Line Access number may be either 1 or 9.

User Manual References

1.2.1 Basic Calling
2.1 Control Features
3.2.2 Managing Call Logs and Call Charges

174 Feature Guide

 2.3 System Data Control

2.3 System Data Control

2.3.1 PC Programming

Description
System programming settings can be accessed using a PC and the Panasonic KX-TEB308 Maintenance
Console software as well as by using a proprietary telephone (PT) ( 2.3.2 PT Programming). System
programming and data upload/download can be performed either through on-site programming or remote
programming.
1. On-site Programming: Programming that is performed using an on-site PC connected directly to
the PBX.
2. Remote Programming: Programming that is performed using an off-site PC that connects to the
PBX via an outside (CO) line.

1. Connection Methods for On-site Programming

Required
Method Description
Hardware
Serial Interface The PC is connected to the PBX via the Serial Interface (RS- —
(RS-232C) 232C) port of the PBX.
USB The PC is connected to the PBX via the USB port of the PBX. —

Feature Guide 175

2.3 System Data Control

2. Connection Methods for Remote Programming

Required
Method Description
Hardware
Remote modem Call the PBX and have the call directed to the internal modem User-supplied
using one of the following methods: modem

Direct Access: Using a modem, dial the telephone number to

connect to the internal modem. To use this feature, "MODEM"
must be selected as the distribution method for the desired
outside (CO) line port ( CO Line Mode—Day/Night/Lunch
[414-416]).

DISA: Using a telephone, dial the telephone number to reach

the DISA line ( 1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)).
After hearing a DISA outgoing message (OGM), enter the
Remote Maintenance feature number to access the internal
modem. To use this feature, "DISA" must be selected as the
distribution method for the desired outside (CO) line port (
CO Line Mode—Day/Night/Lunch [414-416]).

Call Transfer: Using a telephone, call an extension user, such

as the operator, to request to be transferred to the internal
modem using the Remote Maintenance feature number (
1.11.1 Call Transfer).

Conditions
• Only one system programming session is permitted at a time. Access will be denied to a second party
who tries to perform system programming, including system programming via a PT.
• System programming can be performed either in interactive or batch mode.
• System Password
To access system programming in interactive mode, a valid password must be entered. The password
is set at the factory but can be changed through system programming ( System Password [002]).
• A user can upload system programming data from a PC to the PBX or download it from the PBX to a
PC.
• If communications between the PBX and PC fail before completing Firmware Upgrade or system
programming data upload from a PC to the PBX, the successfully transferred portion of the data can
still be used.
• Firmware Upgrade can be performed only through on-site programming using the Serial Interface (RS-
232C) port or USB port.

Installation Manual References

3.2.1 Connection
3.2.3 Accessing PBX via Internal Modem

Feature Guide References

1.1.1.1 Direct In Line (DIL)

176 Feature Guide

 2.3 System Data Control

3.2 PC Programming

Feature Guide 177

2.3 System Data Control

2.3.2 PT Programming

Description
A proprietary telephone (PT) can be used to customise the settings of the PBX or of an extension, using the
following programming features:

Authorised
Programming Type Description Example
Programmer
Personal Used by an extension user to One-touch Dialling, Extension user
Programming customise the extension's Line Preference—
settings. Outgoing, etc.
System Programming Used by an authorised party to System Password, Authorised
customise the PBX. Extension Number, etc. administrator
Manager Used by the manager to System Speed Dialling Manager
Programming customise 4 system Number, Extension
programming settings of the Password Set, Call Log
PBX, set a password to each Printout for Each
extension, print out call log Extension, Call Charge
information for each extension, Management etc.
and programme call charges.

Conditions
• The manager extension is the extension that is connected to the lowest-numbered jack (jack 01) of the
PBX and can therefore perform manager programming.
• Only one system programming (including PC programming) or manager programming session is
permitted at a time. These 2 programming features cannot be performed simultaneously by 2 users.
• During programming, the PT is considered to be busy and will not receive calls.
• System Password
To access system programming, the administrator system password must be entered. The system
password is set at the factory but can be changed through system programming ( System Password
[002]). The administrator can programme all system programming.
• Manager Password
To set the manager password, it is necessary to use the system password to perform Extension
Password Set. Once set, the manager password can be used to access manager programming.
The manager can assign a password to each extension (extension password).
• Personal Programming Data Reset
A PT user can simultaneously reset all settings made through personal programming (Line
Preference—Incoming/Outgoing, Call Waiting Tone Type Selection, etc.) to their default settings.
This feature also cancels pressing the AUTO ANS/MUTE button in the Hands-free Answerback feature
and the Room Monitor feature.
• System Programming Data Reset
The PBX can return all or specific settings made through system programming to their default settings
based on the following parameters ( System Data Clear [999]):
a) All para: All data
b) System para: All data except for "CO para", "Extn. para", and "DSS para"
c) CO para: The data assigned for each outside (CO) line
d) Extn. para: The data assigned for each extension

178 Feature Guide

 2.3 System Data Control

e) DSS para: The data assigned on the Direct Station Selection (DSS) buttons and Programmable
Feature (PF) buttons on the DSS Console
f) Speed dial: The System Speed Dialling numbers and names in System Speed Dialling Number
[001] and System Speed Dialling Name [011]

Installation Manual References

2.10.1 Starting the Advanced Hybrid System

Feature Guide References

2.2.4 Operator/Manager Features
3.3 PT Programming

User Manual References

3.1 Customising Your Phone (Personal Programming)
3.2 Managing Call Logs and Call Charges
3.3 Customising Your PBX (System Programming)

Feature Guide 179

2.3 System Data Control

2.3.3 Automatic Time Adjustment

Description
The PBX clock can be adjusted automatically according to the time information received from your
telephone company. Time information can be received when an incoming call with Caller ID that includes
time information is received.
The PBX clock will be adjusted every day with the first call after 3:05 A.M., if enabled through system
programming ( Automatic Time Adjustment [152]).

Note
Since the PBX clock is put ahead by one hour on the Summer Time start date, a timed reminder set
within one hour of the Automatic Time Adjustment feature will not ring.
Since the PBX clock is put back by one hour on the Summer Time end date, a timed reminder set within
one hour before the Automatic Time Adjustment feature will ring 2 times.

Conditions
• SMDR will log call information using the PBX clock so that the logging time will be overlapped at the
end of Summer Time ( 1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording Feature).

Feature Guide References

1.21.2 Timed Reminder

180 Feature Guide

 2.3 System Data Control

2.3.4 Feature Numbering

Description
To call another extension user or to access PBX features, access numbers (extension numbers or feature
numbers) are required.
Feature numbers are available while:
1. a dial tone is heard
2. a busy tone or Do Not Disturb (DND) tone is heard
3. dialling or talking
4. on-hook

1. Feature Numbering (available while a dial tone is heard)

Extension numbers and features that are available while a dial tone is heard have fixed numbers and
flexible numbers respectively, shown in the following table:
a) Extension Numbers:
The extension numbering plan can be selected through system programming ( Extension
Number [009]).
When the extension numbering plan is selected, the default extension numbers change
automatically as follows*:
Plan 1/Plan 2: extension jacks 01 through 08—extension numbers 101 through 108
Plan 3: extension jacks 01 through 08—extension numbers 11 through 18
If a rotary single line telephone (SLT) is used at any extension, select "Plan 1".

Note
* For United Kingdom and New Zealand, when the extension numbering plan is selected, the
default extension numbers change automatically as follows:
Plan 1/Plan 2: extension jacks 01 through 08—extension numbers 201 through 208
Plan 3: extension jacks 01 through 08—extension numbers 21 through 28

b) Feature Numbers:
When "Plan 2" or "Plan 3" is selected, feature numbers starting with "7" are useable with and
without "#" added before "7".

[Example]
The default feature number for setting "Do Not Disturb (DND)" is "714#". "714#" and "#714#" are
both available for "Plan 2" and "Plan 3".
To make them easier to remember, it may be helpful to replace the new feature numbers for "Plan
2" and "Plan 3" with the code numbers 50 through 59, through system programming ( Second
Feature Numbering Plan [012]).

Feature Guide 181

2.3 System Data Control

[Feature Numbering Table (available while a dial tone is heard)]

Numbering
Feature Additional Number
Plan 1 Plan 2 Plan 3
Absent Message (set/cancel) 75 (1–6 [+ parameter]/
0) + #/0
Account Code Entry for an SLT or 49 account code +
outside phone no.
Automatic Line Access (Local Access)*1 9/0 outside phone no.
Call Forwarding (FWD)—All Calls, Busy/No 71 ([1 or 2 + extn. no.]/
Answer (set/cancel) 0) + #/0
Call Hold (Hold Mode 2 or 3) for an SLT*2 20 #20
Call Hold Retrieve for outside (CO) line calls/ 53/5 #59/#5 outside (CO) line no.
intercom calls (1–3)/extn. no.
Call Park/Call Park Retrieve*3 22/52 #22/#56 0–9
Call Pickup Deny (set/cancel) 72 (1/0) + #/0
Call Waiting for intercom calls/doorphone 732 (1/0) + #/0
calls (set/cancel)
Call Waiting for outside (CO) line calls (set/ 731 (1/0) + #/0
cancel)
Conference (5-party) 22 #22 (phone no. + CONF)
4 times + CONF
Data Line Security (set/cancel) 730 (1/0) + #/0
Directed Call Pickup 4 #41 extn. no.
Do Not Disturb (DND) (set/cancel) 71 (4/0) + #/0
Doorphone Call/Door Open 31/55 #31/#55 1/2
Executive Busy Override Deny (set/cancel) 733 (0/1) + #/0
Extension Lock (set/cancel) 77 0000–9999 (2 times/
one time) + #/0
Extension Number*4 100–199 100–499 10–49
External Feature Access (EFA) for an SLT 6
Extension Feature Clear 79 #/0
FWD—Follow Me (set/cancel) 71 (5/8) + extn. no. + #/
0
FWD to Outside (CO) Line (set/cancel) 71 (3 + outside (CO)
line access no. +
outside phone no. +
#)/(0 + #/0)
FWD to Voice Processing System (VPS) 71 ([1 or 2 + extn. no.]/
(set/cancel) 0) + #/0
Group Call Pickup 40 #40

182 Feature Guide

 2.3 System Data Control

Numbering
Feature Additional Number
Plan 1 Plan 2 Plan 3
Hot Line for an SLT (programme) 74 2 + phone no. + #
Hot Line for an SLT (set/cancel) 74 (1/0) + #/0
Incoming Call Log in the Personal Area— 70 #
CLEAR ALL
Incoming Call Log in the Common Area— 70 #
CLEAR ALL
Last Number Redial for an SLT ## or 80 ### or 80
Live Call Screening (LCS) Password (set/ 77 000–999 (2 times/
cancel) one time) + #
Log-in/Log-out 736 (0/1) + #/0
Logging of Caller ID Information in the 738 (2/0) + #/0
Common Area (set/cancel)
Logging of Caller ID Information in the 738 (1/0) + #/0
Personal Area (set/cancel)
Message Waiting (leave/cancel for a caller) 70 (1/2) + extn. no. + #/
0
Message Waiting (cancel all for a called 70 0 + #/0
extension)
Message Waiting (cancel all for another 70 3 + extn. no. + #
extension)
Message Waiting Answer 784 #/0
Message Waiting for Another Extension 70 4000–9999 (2 times/
Lock (set/cancel) one time) + #/0
Operator Call 0/9
Outside (CO) Line Group Access 8 1–3 + outside phone
no.
Paging—All Extensions & External 33 #33 or 9
Paging—All Extensions/Group 33 #33 0/1–8
Paging—External 34 #34
Paging Answer 43 #43
Paging Deny (set/cancel) 734 (1/0) + #
Personal Speed Dialling (confirm) 3 0–9 + #

Personal Speed Dialling (dial) 1 or # 1 or ## 0–9

Personal Speed Dialling (programme) 2 0–9 + phone no. + #

Remote Maintenance 729

Feature Guide 183

2.3 System Data Control

Numbering
Feature Additional Number
Plan 1 Plan 2 Plan 3
Remote Timed Reminder (set/cancel/ 764 extn. no. + # + 76 +
confirm) ([hhmm +
parameter]*5/2/3) +
#
Room Monitor (set/cancel) 735 (1/0) + #
Room Monitor through a doorphone 31 #31 1/2
System Speed Dialling for an SLT (dial) 00–99

Timed Reminder (set/cancel) 76 ([hhmm +

parameter]*5/2) + #/
0
Timed Reminder (confirm) 76 3+#
Time Service (set/cancel) 78 ([1–3]/0) + #
Walking COS 7 extn. password + the
user's extn. no. + #/0
21st Incoming Call Logged in the Personal 737 (0/1) + #
Area (disregard the newest call/overwrite
the oldest call)
301st Incoming Call Logged in the Common 737 (2/3) + #
Area (disregard the newest call/overwrite
the oldest call)

*1 For New Zealand: 1 or 9

*2 For United Kingdom/New Zealand: Plan 1: 50; Plan 2/Plan 3: #50
*3 For United Kingdom/New Zealand: Plan 1: 36/56; Plan 2/Plan 3: #36/#56
*4 For United Kingdom/New Zealand: Plan 1: 200–299; for New Zealand: Plan 2: 200–
499, Plan 3: 20–49
*5 hh: hour (01–12), mm: minute (00–59), AM/PM (0/1), one time/daily (1/2)

2. Feature Numbering (available while a busy tone or DND tone is heard)

Features that are available while a busy tone or DND tone is heard have fixed numbers, as shown in
the following table:

[Feature Numbering Table (available while a busy tone or DND tone is heard)]

Feature Numbering
Automatic Callback Busy 6
Busy Station Signalling (BSS)/DND Override 2
Executive Busy Override 3

3. Feature Numbering (available while dialling or talking)

Features that are available while dialling or talking have fixed numbers, as shown in the following table:

[Feature Numbering Table (available while dialling or talking)]

184 Feature Guide

 2.3 System Data Control

Feature Numbering
Alternate Calling—Ring/Voice

Call Retrieving from a Telephone Answering Machine (TAM) 4*1

Conference (3-party) for an SLT 3*2
Door Open 5
Pulse to Tone Conversion #

*1 Dial after dialling the TAM's extension number and hearing its busy tone.
*2 Plan 1: 3; Plan 2/Plan 3: #3

4. Feature Numbering (available while on-hook)

Features that are available while on-hook have fixed numbers, as shown in the following table:

[Feature Numbering Table (available while on-hook)]

Feature Numbering
Background Music (BGM) set/cancel 1
Time Service mode display #
Extension number and extension name display/
date (month [day]/day [month]) and time display/
date (month [day]/day [month]/year/day of the week) display
changing

Conditions
• If a feature number includes " " or "#" except for those that can use "0" instead of "#", rotary SLT users
cannot use it.
• Feature number + Additional number (Parameter)
Certain feature numbers require additional digits to make the feature active. For example, to set Call
Waiting, the feature number for "Call Waiting" must be followed by "1" and to cancel it, the same feature
number should be followed by "0".

User Manual References

4.2.1 Feature Number Table

Feature Guide 185

2.3 System Data Control

2.3.5 Automatic Configuration for Outside (CO) Line Type

Description
The dialling mode (DTMF [Dual Tone Multi-Frequency]/Pulse) of connected outside (CO) lines is
automatically assigned after restarting the PBX using the System Clear Switch or through system
programming ( System Data Clear [999]). No system programming in Dial Mode [401] and Pulse Speed
[402] is required unless the dialling mode of the connected outside (CO) line is Call Blocking. Automatic
Configuration for Outside (CO) Line Type can also be programmed the first time the PBX is accessed with
a PC using the KX-TEB308 Maintenance Console software (Quick Setup). For more information about
Quick Setup, refer to the Installation Manual ( 3.1.1 Installing KX-TEB308 Maintenance Console on a PC).

Conditions
• If no outside (CO) lines are connected to the outside (CO) line ports of the PBX, the default values are
assigned automatically.
• It takes a maximum of 4 minutes to complete checking the dialling mode, unless the outside (CO) line
is in use. In this case, the PBX will start checking it after the outside (CO) line becomes idle.
• This feature will not function properly when:
– It takes 3 seconds or more to detect the dialling mode of your telephone company.
– The cable from the outside (CO) line is disconnected while the PBX is checking the dialling mode.
• If your telephone company or a host PBX can receive both DTMF and Pulse signals, the PBX selects
an outside (CO) line type according to the following priority:
DTMF Pulse (High) Pulse (Low)

Installation Manual References

4.1.5 System Reset with System Data Clear

Feature Guide References

1.5.2.4 Dial Type Selection

186 Feature Guide

 2.3 System Data Control

2.3.6 Country Setting

Description
The country code of the PBX can be selected through system programming ( Country [995]). The PBX
will restart with the default settings of the user's country/area. During this operation, communication
between the PBX and PC will be disconnected one time. Country Setting can also be programmed the first
time the PBX is accessed with a PC using the KX-TEB308 Maintenance Console software (Quick Setup).
For more information about Quick Setup, refer to the Installation Manual ( 3.2.2 Starting KX-TEB308
Maintenance Console for the first time).

Conditions
• This feature is only available when the suffix of the connected PBX is "NE" or "CE".

Feature Guide 187

2.3 System Data Control

2.3.7 Firmware Upgrade

Description
It is possible to upgrade the PBX software via the Serial Interface (RS-232C) port or USB port using the KX-
TEB308 Maintenance Console software. Even if a user upgrades the PBX software, the system data will not
be lost. For more information on how to upgrade the PBX software, refer to the on-line help.

Conditions
• The ROM and the firmware version can be confirmed through system programming ( Firmware
Version [998]).

Installation Manual References

2.8.1 Connecting Peripherals

188 Feature Guide

 2.4 Fault Recovery/Diagnostics

2.4 Fault Recovery/Diagnostics

2.4.1 Power Failure Transfer

Description
If the power supply to the PBX fails, outside (CO) line 1 will be automatically connected to extension jack 01
(Power Failure Connections). The PBX will switch from the current connections to Power Failure
Connections, and all existing conversations will be disconnected.
Only outside (CO) line calls handled by Power Failure Connections can be made during a power failure.

Conditions
• We recommend connecting an SLT in parallel at extension jack 01, so that the SLT can be used during
a power failure.
Note that if the parallelled SLT is on an outside (CO) line call when the power is restored, that call will
be disconnected.
• Only outside (CO) line calls are possible during a power failure. All other features will not function.
• Automobile-type batteries, which must be user-supplied, can be connected as a system backup power
supply to operate all the features during a power failure.
The batteries can be connected directly to the unit with optional cables. For more information, refer to
the Installation Manual.

Installation Manual References

2.2.6 Connecting Backup Batteries
2.9 Power Failure Connections

Feature Guide References

1.10.9 Parallelled Telephone

Feature Guide 189

2.4 Fault Recovery/Diagnostics

2.4.2 Power Failure Restart

Description
When the electricity is turned back on, the PBX restarts and automatically loads stored data.

Conditions
• In the event of a power failure, PBX memory is protected by a factory-installed lithium battery. There is
no memory loss except the memories of Automatic Callback Busy ( 1.7.1 Automatic Callback Busy
(Camp-on)), Call Park ( 1.12.2 Call Park), and Redial ( 1.6.1.4 Redial).

190 Feature Guide

 Section 3
Programming Instructions

Feature Guide 191

3.1 Introduction

3.1 Introduction

3.1.1 Introduction
These programming instructions are designed to serve as an overall system programming reference for the
Panasonic Advanced Hybrid System. The PBX has default settings that can be changed to meet your
needs. These settings control the manner in which the PBX features described in this Feature Guide
function, and changing these settings is referred to as "system programming". System programming can be
performed by only one person at a time. A second person attempting to programme the system will be
denied access to system programming.

Ways to Programme
There are 2 programming methods:
• PC Programming
PC programming is described in Section 3.2 PC Programming.
• PT (Proprietary Telephone) Programming
PT programming is described in Section 3.3 PT Programming. An authorised administrator or the
manager can perform system programming by entering 3-digit programming numbers with a PT.

Password Security
To maintain system security, a password is required to perform system programming. When KX-TEB308
Maintenance Console is started for the first time, the Quick Setup utility will ask you to set the system
password. To avoid unauthorised access and possible fraudulent dialling, do not disclose the password.
Warning to the Administrator or Installer regarding the system password
1. Please inform the customer of the importance of the password and the possible dangers if it
becomes known to others.
2. To avoid unauthorised access and possible fraudulent dialling, maintain the secrecy of the
password.
3. We strongly recommend that you change the default password value to something else for reasons
of system security. It is best to use a password of 7 digits.
4. Please change the password periodically.
5. If a system password is forgotten, it can be found by loading a backup of the system data into a
PC, and checking the password using the KX-TEB308 Maintenance Console software. If you do
not have a backup of the system data, you must reset the PBX to its factory defaults and
reprogramme it. Therefore, we strongly recommend maintaining a backup of the system data. For
more information on how to back up the system data, refer to the on-line help that appears by
selecting the Help menu during PC programming. However, as system passwords can be extracted
from backup copies of the system data file, do not allow unauthorised access to these files.

Note
This PBX has only one system password. It can be changed by either PT programming or PC
programming. For this reason, the password can consist of numerals only.

192 Feature Guide

 3.2 PC Programming

3.2 PC Programming

3.2.1 Installing and Starting KX-TEB308 Maintenance Console

To programme and administer the PBX by PC (Personal Computer), you need to install KX-TEB308
Maintenance Console onto the PC. To install and start KX-TEB308 Maintenance Console when the PC and
the PBX are connected, refer to the Installation Manual ( 3.1.1 Installing KX-TEB308 Maintenance
Console on a PC). KX-TEB308 Maintenance Console starts the programme using the drive where you
installed the software automatically.

System Requirements
Required Operating System
• Microsoft ® Windows ® 98 SE, Windows Me, Windows 2000, or Windows XP
Minimum Hardware Requirements
• CPU: 300 MHz Intel ® Celeron ® microprocessor
• HDD: 100 MB of available hard disk space
• RAM: 128 MB of available RAM

Feature Guide 193

3.3 PT Programming

3.3 PT Programming

3.3.1 Programming Instructions

Required Telephone
PBX settings can be customised through system programming by using a proprietary telephone (PT) with
a display, such as the KX-T7730. An authorised administrator or the manager extension connected to
extension jack 01 can access system programming.
Only one system programming session can be performed at a time; that is, only one user can access system
programming at a time. This includes PC programming.

Buttons and Functions

Fixed Button (KX-T7730/KX-T7735) Function

PREV (PREVIOUS)

NEXT

SECRET

STORE

PAUSE

PROGRAM

END

SELECT

194 Feature Guide

 3.3 PT Programming

Fixed Button (KX-T7730/KX-T7735) Function

FLASH

CLEAR

Entering System Programming Mode

Using a PT to perform system programming allows an authorised administrator to set a wide range of PBX
features and parameters. To enter system programming mode, the system password is required. With the
system password, all system programming is accessible.

System Password for

# Programming No.
Administrator—for PT Programming
3 digits
1234

Note
means default value throughout these programming instructions.

Entering Manager Programming Mode

Using a PT to perform manager programming allows the manager extension (extension jack 01) to set
certain PBX features and parameters. To enter manager programming mode, the extension password for
the manager (manager password) is required.
With the manager password, the following 4 system programming settings are accessible:
• System Speed Dialling Number [001]
• System Speed Dialling Name [011]
• DISA Security Code [512]
• DISA Security Code Digits [530]

Extension Password for Manager

# Programming No.
—for PT Programming
3 digits

Notes
• The system password may be entered instead of the manager password.
• With the manager password, the manager can also set a password to each extension, print out call
log information for each extension, and programme call charges. For more information on how to
assign a password to each extension including the manager password and to print out call log
information for each extension, refer to the User Manual ( 2.1.6 Changing System Settings Using
Programming Mode, 3.2.2 Managing Call Logs and Call Charges).

Feature Guide 195

3.3 PT Programming

Entering Characters
The PT's dialling buttons can be used to enter characters when storing a name or message. The following
tables depict the available characters:
Table 1 (Alphabet mode)/Table 2 (Numeral mode)

* This character is only available with the CE (Central Europe) and PD (Poland) models, when programming
Currency [921].

196 Feature Guide

 3.3 PT Programming

Table 3 (Cyrillic alphabet mode for RU [Russia]/UA [Ukraine] model)

* This character is only available for the KX-T7735RU.

[Example of Entering Characters]

To enter "Ann":

A n n

2 6 (5 times) OR 6 (5 times)

Notes
• To toggle between "Alphabet mode" and "Numeral mode" or between "Alphabet mode", "Cyrillic
alphabet mode (assignable only in Extension Name in Cyrillic [616] )", and "Numeral mode", press
SELECT.
• To move the cursor right, press .
• To delete all characters, press CLEAR. To delete a character, press .

Feature Guide 197

3.3 PT Programming

List of Abbreviations
A AA Automated Attendant
APT Analogue Proprietary Telephone
ARS Automatic Route Selection
B BGM Background Music

C CO Outside (CO) Line

COS Class of Service
CPC Calling Party Control
D DIL Direct In Line
DISA Direct Inward System Access
DND Do Not Disturb
DRD Distinctive Ring Detection
DSS Direct Station Selection
DTMF Dual Tone Multi-Frequency
E EFA External Feature Access

G GRP Group

I IRNA Intercept Routing—No Answer

L LCS Live Call Screening

O OGM Outgoing Message

P PT Proprietary Telephone

S SLT Single Line Telephone

SMDR Station Message Detail Recording
SMS Short Message Service
T TAM Telephone Answering Machine
TRS Toll Restriction
U UCD Uniform Call Distribution

V VM Voice Mail

198 Feature Guide

 3.3 PT Programming

3.3.2 Programming Procedures

Notes
• means default value throughout these programming instructions.
• means to select "All", except when setting the charge in Call Charge Calculation related
programming items where it means "Decimal point".
• The following are displayed when you store a number, such as a telephone number, or feature
number:
P: PAUSE; -: CONF; F: FLASH/RECALL; [ ]: INTERCOM
x: PAUSE (substitutes for any number [i.e., wild card])
• To return to the previous programming item, press .
• To correct a wrong entry, press CLEAR and then enter the new input.
• To delete a stored parameter, press CLEAR, enter the new input, and then press STORE.
• Press or to scroll the display.
• Some programming items cannot have a value left empty.

Date & Time [000]

0 0 0 NEXT year ➞ SELECT ➞ day ➞
(00…99) (Jan.…Dec.) (1…31)

SELECT ➞ hour ➞ minute ➞ SELECT STORE END

(Sun…Sat) (1…12) (00…59) (AM/PM)

Notes
• The clock starts immediately after the STORE button is pressed.
• The PBX supports years from 2000 to 2099.

Feature & Programming References

1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording Feature

System Speed Dialling Number [001]

NEXT or PREV
To continue

0 0 1 NEXT speed dialling no. phone no. STORE END

(00…99) Max. 32 digits
(0…9, , #, P, –, F, [ ])
To continue
SELECT

Feature Guide 199

3.3 PT Programming

Notes
• An Outside (CO) Line Access number (9/0 [for New Zealand: 1 or 9], 81 through 83) should be
included before the phone number. When dialling, a pause will automatically be inserted after the
Outside (CO) Line Access number.
• When storing an account code assigned in Account Code [310], enter and the account code
after an Outside (CO) Line Access number.

Feature & Programming References

1.6.1 Memory Dialling Features

System Password [002]

0 0 2 NEXT password STORE END
4-7 digits
(0000…9999999)
1234

WARNING
To maintain system security, a password is required to perform system programming.
To avoid unauthorised access and possible fraudulent dialling, do not disclose the
password.
Warning to the Administrator regarding the system password
1. Please inform the customer of the importance of the password and the possible dangers if it
becomes known to others.
2. To avoid unauthorised access and possible fraudulent dialling, maintain the secrecy of the
password.
3. We strongly recommend that you change the default password value to something else for reasons
of system security. It is best to use a password of 7 digits.
4. Please change the password periodically.
5. If a system password is forgotten, it can be found by loading a backup of the system data into a
PC, and checking the password using the KX-TEB308 Maintenance Console software. If you do
not have a backup of the system data, you must reset the PBX to its factory defaults and
reprogramme it. Therefore, we strongly recommend maintaining a backup of the system data. For
more information on how to back up the system data, refer to the on-line help that appears by
selecting the Help menu during PC programming. However, as system passwords can be extracted
from backup copies of the system data file, do not allow unauthorised access to these files.

Note
This PBX has only one system password. It can be changed by either PT programming or PC
programming. For this reason, the password can consist of numerals only.

Feature & Programming References

2.3.1 PC Programming
2.3.2 PT Programming

200 Feature Guide

 3.3 PT Programming

DSS Console Jack Assignment [003]

0 0 3 NEXT DSS console no. extension jack no. STORE END
(1…2) (02…04*/Disable)
To continue

NEXT or PREV

Notes
• * The highest extension jack number may be "08", depending on your country/area.
• To delete (disable) an extension jack number, press CLEAR in the extension jack number step.
• The same jack number cannot be assigned to 2 DSS Consoles.
• Do not assign extension jack 01 (manager extension) as the DSS Console jack.
• The extension jack number preassigned as a paired telephone in Console Paired Telephone [004]
should not be assigned in this programme.

Feature & Programming References

1.18.1 Fixed Buttons
2.1.1 Extension Jack Configuration

Console Paired Telephone [004]

0 0 4 NEXT DSS console no. extension jack no. STORE END
(1…2) (01…04*/Disable)
To continue

NEXT or PREV

Notes
• * The highest extension jack number may be "08", depending on your country/area.
• To delete (disable) an extension jack number, press CLEAR in the extension jack number step.
• The extension jack number preassigned as a DSS Console in DSS Console Jack Assignment [003]
should not be assigned in this programme.
• An SLT cannot be paired with the DSS Console.

Feature & Programming References

1.18.1 Fixed Buttons
2.1.1 Extension Jack Configuration

One-touch Transfer Using a DSS Button [005]

0 0 5 NEXT SELECT STORE END

(With Transfer/
Without Transfer)

Feature Guide 201

3.3 PT Programming

Note
With Transfer: Press the DSS button to transfer an outside (CO) line call.
Without Transfer: Press the TRANSFER button, then the DSS button to transfer an outside (CO) line
call.

Feature & Programming References

1.11.1 Call Transfer
1.18.1 Fixed Buttons

Time Service Switching Mode [006]

0 0 6 NEXT SELECT STORE END

(Manual/Automatic)

Feature & Programming References

2.2.3 Time Service
Time Service Start Time [007]

Time Service Start Time [007]

0 0 7 NEXT NEXT or PREV or SELECT ➞

(Sun…Sat) (Every day) (Day/Night/
Lunch-start/
Lunch-end)
To go to another day of the week
To go to another mode

hour or SELECT* ➞ minute ➞ SELECT STORE END

(1…12) (00…59)
(AM/PM)
To keep the settings unchanged,
keep pressing SELECT until "None" is displayed

Notes
• This programme is available when switching mode is enabled in automatic mode in Time Service
Switching Mode [006].
• * Pressing SELECT shows the previous entry. When the display shows "None", press SELECT to
set the start time.

Feature & Programming References

2.2.3 Time Service

Operator Assignment [008]

0 0 8 NEXT extension jack no. STORE END
(01…08/Disable)

202 Feature Guide

 3.3 PT Programming

Note
To delete (disable) an extension jack number, press CLEAR in the extension jack number step.

Feature & Programming References

2.2.4 Operator/Manager Features

Extension Number [009]

0 0 9 NEXT SELECT STORE

(Plan 1/2/3)

NEXT or PREV
To continue

extension jack no. extension no. STORE END

(01…08)
To continue
SELECT

Notes
• Programmable extension numbers are as follows:
Plan 1: 100–199; Plan 2: 100–499; Plan 3: 10–49
(for United Kingdom/New Zealand: Plan 1: 200–299; for New Zealand: Plan 2: 200–499, Plan 3:
20–49)
• The same extension number cannot be entered for 2 different extension jacks.

Feature & Programming References

1.5.1.1 Intercom Call
1.6.1.6 Quick Dialling
1.19.2 Voice Mail Inband (DTMF) Integration
2.3.4 Feature Numbering

LCD Time Display [010]

0 1 0 NEXT SELECT STORE END

(12/24 h)

Note
The following settings and features use 12-hour format even if 24-hour format is assigned in this
programme:
Date & Time [000]
Time Service Start Time [007]
1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording Feature
1.21.2 Timed Reminder

Feature Guide 203

3.3 PT Programming

System Speed Dialling Name [011]

NEXT or PREV
To continue

0 1 1 NEXT speed dialling no. name* STORE END

(00…99) Max.
16 characters To continue

SELECT

Note
* A name can be entered using a PT's dialling buttons. The displayed character varies depending on
the number of times that the dialling button is pressed. It is possible to toggle between "Alphabet mode"
and "Numeral mode" by pressing SELECT.

Feature & Programming References

1.6.1.5 Speed Dialling—Personal/System
3.3.1 Programming Instructions—Entering Characters

Second Feature Numbering Plan [012]

NEXT or PREV
To continue

0 1 2 NEXT code no. feature no. STORE END

(50…59) Max. 10 digits
(0…9, , #, P, –, F, [ ]) To continue

SELECT

Note
This programme is available only when "Plan 2" or "Plan 3" is selected in Extension Number [009].

Feature & Programming References

1.6.1.6 Quick Dialling
2.3.4 Feature Numbering

204 Feature Guide

 3.3 PT Programming

KX-T7710 One-touch Dialling [013]

NEXT or PREV
To continue

0 1 3 NEXT location no. feature no. STORE END

(1…9) Max. 24 digits
(0…9, , #, P, –, F, [ ])
To continue
SELECT

Notes
• Any feature number can be stored in a One-touch button. However, the feature numbers for
Personal Speed Dialling, System Speed Dialling, and Quick Dialling do not function.
• This feature is not available when the KX-T7710 is connected in parallel with a PT.

Feature & Programming References

1.6.1.3 KX-T7710 One-touch Dialling

Hunting Group Set [100]

NEXT or PREV
To continue

1 0 0 NEXT extension group no. SELECT STORE END

(1…8/ ) (Enable/
Disable) To continue

SELECT

Feature & Programming References

1.2.1 Idle Extension Hunting
Extension Group [600]

Hunting Type [101]

NEXT or PREV
To continue

1 0 1 NEXT extension group no. SELECT STORE END

(1…8/ ) (Terminate/
Circular) To continue

SELECT

Note
This programme is available when the extension group is enabled in Hunting Group Set [100].

Feature Guide 205

3.3 PT Programming

Feature & Programming References

1.2.1 Idle Extension Hunting

DTMF Integration Port [102]

NEXT or PREV
To continue

1 0 2 NEXT extension jack no. SELECT STORE END

(03, 04/ ) (Enable/
Disable) To continue

SELECT

Feature & Programming References

1.19.2 Voice Mail Inband (DTMF) Integration

DTMF Integration [103]

1 0 3 NEXT SELECT STORE END

(Enable/Disable)

Note
When a KX-TVM/KX-TVP series VPS is connected to the PBX, to enable Inband (DTMF) Integration
between the VPS and the PBX, select "Plan 1" or "Plan 2" in Extension Number [009] and "Enable" in
this programme.

Feature & Programming References

1.19.2 Voice Mail Inband (DTMF) Integration
DTMF Integration Port [102]

SLT Hold Mode [104]

1 0 4 NEXT SELECT STORE END

(Hold-1/Hold-2/
Hold-3)
Feature & Programming References
1.12.1 Call Hold

Conference Tone [105]

1 0 5 NEXT SELECT STORE END

(Enable/Disable)
Feature & Programming References
1.7.2 Executive Busy Override
1.13.1.2 Conference

206 Feature Guide

 3.3 PT Programming

External Pager Access Tone [106]

1 0 6 NEXT SELECT STORE END

(Enable/Disable)
Feature & Programming References
1.14.1 Paging

DTMF Receiver Check [107]

NEXT or PREV
To continue

1 0 7 NEXT DTMF receiver no. SELECT STORE END

(1…2/ ) (Enable/Disable)

Note
This programme enables each DTMF receiver (1–2: checking extension jacks 01–08) to check whether
it is operating normally or not.

Installation Manual References

4.1.3 Operation

Flash/Recall Mode for a Locked Extension [108]

1 0 8 NEXT SELECT STORE END

(Enable/Disable)

Note
This programme enables a locked extension to send a flash/recall signal during a conversation with an
outside party.

CO Indicator [109]
1 0 9 NEXT SELECT STORE END

(Enable/Disable)

Note
This programme is available for the extension(s) assigned not to ring in Flexible Ringing—Day/Night/
Lunch [408-410], to answer incoming outside (CO) line calls.

Flash/Recall Key Mode [110]

1 1 0 NEXT SELECT STORE END

(MODE1: EFA mode/

MODE2: Flash/Recall mode)

Feature Guide 207

3.3 PT Programming

Feature & Programming References

1.10.6 Flash/Recall
1.10.7 External Feature Access (EFA)

Music on Hold [111]

1 1 1 NEXT SELECT STORE END

(Internal/
External/Tone)

Note
Selections vary depending on your country/area.

Feature & Programming References

1.12.4 Music on Hold
1.15.4 Background Music (BGM)

DSS Lamp Mode [112]

1 1 2 NEXT SELECT STORE END

(Enable/Disable)

Note
Enable: FWD—Flashing slowly, DND—Flashing at moderate speed
Disable: FWD—Off, DND—Off

Feature & Programming References

1.18.3 LED Indication

Automatic Redial Repeat Count [113]

1 1 3 NEXT SELECT STORE END

(0/3/10/
15 times)
Feature & Programming References
1.6.1.4 Redial

Automatic Redial Interval [114]

1 1 4 NEXT SELECT STORE END

(40/60 s)
Feature & Programming References
1.6.1.4 Redial

208 Feature Guide

 3.3 PT Programming

Extension Ring Tone Pattern [115]

1 1 5 NEXT SELECT STORE END

(Single/Double/
Triple)
Feature & Programming References
1.1.3.3 Ring Tone Pattern Selection
1.5.1.1 Intercom Call
4.2.1 Tones/Ring Tones

Conference Pattern [116]

1 1 6 NEXT SELECT STORE END

(3-party C-0 E-3/

3-party C-1 E-3/
3-party C-2 E-3/
5-party C-2 E-4)

Note
3-party C-0 E-3: No outside parties can attend a 3-party conference call.
3-party C-1 E-3: One outside party can attend a 3-party conference call.
3-party C-2 E-3: A maximum of 2 outside parties can attend a 3-party conference call.
5-party C-2 E-4: A maximum of 2 outside parties can attend a 3-party to 5-party conference call.
The PBX allows up to 2 outside parties to participate in a conference call. [C: CO, E: Extension]

Feature & Programming References

1.13.1.2 Conference

Call Pickup Tone [117]

1 1 7 NEXT SELECT STORE END

(Enable/Disable)
Feature & Programming References
1.4.1.3 Call Pickup

Pulse Restriction [118]

1 1 8 NEXT SELECT STORE END

(Enable/Disable)

Note
It is programmable whether pulse dialling is sent or not to the telephone company during a conversation
with an outside party when "Pulse" or "Call Block" mode is enabled in Dial Mode [401].

Feature Guide 209

3.3 PT Programming

Redialling after Pulse to Tone Conversion [119]

1 1 9 NEXT SELECT STORE END

(Enable/Disable)
Feature & Programming References
1.5.2.4 Dial Type Selection

Bell Frequency [120]

1 2 0 NEXT SELECT STORE END

(20/25 Hz)

Note
This programme selects the bell frequency sent to an SLT.

Automatic Line Access [121]

1 2 1 NEXT SELECT STORE END

(Dial 0/9)*

Note
* For New Zealand: 1 or 9

Feature & Programming References

1.5.3.3 Outside (CO) Line Access
2.2.4 Operator/Manager Features

Automatic Rotation for CO Line Access [122]

1 2 2 NEXT SELECT STORE END

(Enable/Disable)
Feature & Programming References
1.5.3.3 Outside (CO) Line Access

Break Ratio [123]

1 2 3 NEXT SELECT STORE END

(MODE1: 66 %/
MODE2: 60 %)

Note
This programme selects the pulse break ratio (the ratio between the length of the pulse and the length
of the pause) when a pulse is sent to the telephone company while dialling a telephone number.

210 Feature Guide

 3.3 PT Programming

TRS Check for * and # [125]

1 2 5 NEXT SELECT STORE END

(Enable/Disable)
Feature & Programming References
1.8.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)

DSS Off-hook Mode [126]

1 2 6 NEXT SELECT STORE END

(Enable/Disable)
Feature & Programming References
1.5.1.1 Intercom Call

Pickup Group [127]

NEXT or PREV
To continue

1 2 7 NEXT extension group no. SELECT STORE END

(1…8/ ) (Enable/
Disable) To continue

SELECT

Feature & Programming References

1.4.1.3 Call Pickup
CO Indicator [109]

Ringback Tone Pattern [128]

1 2 8 NEXT SELECT STORE END

(Single 3 s/Single 5 s/
Double 3 s/Double 5 s)

Note
This programme selects the ringback tone pattern for outgoing intercom calls and for incoming outside
(CO) line calls (including a DISA call).

Feature & Programming References

1.5.1.1 Intercom Call
1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
4.2.1 Tones/Ring Tones

Feature Guide 211

3.3 PT Programming

VM 1 APT Port [130]

1 3 0 NEXT SELECT STORE END

(Port03/Port03 & 04/

Disable)

Notes
• To change the current setting (other than "Disable"), select "Disable", then select the desired
setting.
• This programme is not available when "Enable" is selected in DTMF Integration [103].

Feature & Programming References

1.19.1 Voice Mail APT Integration

SLT Ring/Silence Ratio [142]

1 4 2 NEXT SELECT STORE END

(1:2/1:3/1:4)
[On:Off]

Note
This programme selects the ratio between the bell signals of an SLT (a set of bell-on and bell-off).

Feature & Programming References

1.1.3.3 Ring Tone Pattern Selection
SLT Ring Bell-on Time [143]

SLT Ring Bell-on Time [143]

1 4 3 NEXT SELECT STORE END

(1000…2000 ms)
[100 ms increments]

Notes
• This programme selects the length of the bell-on signal of an SLT. This determines the ring tone
pattern for incoming calls to SLTs, combined with the setting in SLT Ring/Silence Ratio [142].
• This programme also determines the maximum number of digits of an SLT Caller ID number, when
"DTMF1" or "DTMF2" is selected in SLT Caller ID Signalling Type [150].

Feature & Programming References

1.1.3.3 Ring Tone Pattern Selection
1.16.1 Caller ID

212 Feature Guide

 3.3 PT Programming

SMS Centre Number for Receiving [145]

1 4 5 NEXT SMS centre no. STORE END
Max. 16 digits
(0…9, , #)
Feature & Programming References
1.17.3 Fixed Line SMS Terminal Support

SMS Routing Table—CO [146]

NEXT or PREV
To continue

1 4 6 NEXT CO line no. SELECT STORE END

(1…3) (Disable/1…3)
To continue

SELECT

Feature & Programming References

1.17.3 Fixed Line SMS Terminal Support

SMS Routing Table—Extension [147]

NEXT or PREV
To continue

1 4 7 NEXT extension jack no. SELECT STORE END

(01…08*) (Disable/1…3)
To continue

SELECT

Notes
• * The highest extension jack number may be "04", depending on your country/area.
• Each location 1–3 has a maximum of 4 extensions.

Feature & Programming References

1.17.3 Fixed Line SMS Terminal Support

SLT Caller ID Signalling Type [150]

1 5 0 NEXT SELECT STORE END

(FSK1 [During ring]/

FSK2 [RP-AS]/
DTMF1 [Immediately]/
DTMF2 [During ring])

Feature Guide 213

3.3 PT Programming

Feature & Programming References

1.16.1 Caller ID

SLT Caller ID Line Access Number [151]

1 5 1 NEXT SELECT STORE END

(Enable/Disable)

Feature & Programming References

1.16.1 Caller ID

Automatic Time Adjustment [152]

1 5 2 NEXT SELECT STORE END

(Enable/Disable)
Feature & Programming References
2.3.3 Automatic Time Adjustment

Incoming Reverse [153]

1 5 3 NEXT SELECT STORE END

(Enable/Disable)
Feature & Programming References
1.10.10 Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection

CO Busy Out [154]

1 5 4 NEXT SELECT STORE END
(Enable/Disable)
Feature & Programming References
1.5.2.6 CO Busy Out

CO Busy Out Check Time [155]

1 5 5 NEXT hour ➞ minute ➞ SELECT STORE END
(1…12) (00…59) (AM/PM)
Feature & Programming References
1.5.2.6 CO Busy Out

214 Feature Guide

 3.3 PT Programming

Call Charge Calculation—Registering Leading Numbers [161]

NEXT or PREV
To continue

1 6 1 NEXT location no. leading no. STORE END

(00…99) Max. 10 digits
(0…9, , #) To continue

SELECT

Feature & Programming References

1.20.2 Call Charge Calculation

Call Charge Calculation—Time Table 1/2/3/4 [162/169/176/183]

1 X X NEXT NEXT or PREV or ➞

(62/69/76/83) (Sun…Sat) (Every day)
62: Table 1
69: Table 2
76: Table 3
83: Table 4 NEXT or PREV

To go to another day of the week

hour ➞ SELECT or ➞ SELECT STORE END

(1…12) (Every (Peak/Off Peak/

(AM/PM) hour) Economy)
To go to another hour

SELECT

Feature & Programming References

1.20.2 Call Charge Calculation

Call Charge Table 1/2/3/4—Peak Flat Charge and Duration [163/170/177/

184]
NEXT or PREV
To continue

1 X X NEXT location no. flat charge ➞ duration STORE END

(00…99) Max. 7 digits (0…9999 s)
(63/70/77/84) (exc. decimal point)
63: Table 1 (0…9, ) To continue
70: Table 2
77: Table 3
84: Table 4 SELECT

Feature Guide 215

3.3 PT Programming

Feature & Programming References

1.20.2 Call Charge Calculation

Call Charge Table 1/2/3/4—Peak Unit Charge and Duration [164/171/178/

185]
NEXT or PREV
To continue

1 X X NEXT location no. unit charge ➞ duration STORE END

(00…99) Max. 7 digits (0…9999 s)
(64/71/78/85) (exc. decimal point)
64: Table 1 (0…9, ) To continue
71: Table 2
78: Table 3
85: Table 4 SELECT

Feature & Programming References

1.20.2 Call Charge Calculation

Call Charge Table 1/2/3/4—Off Peak Flat Charge and Duration [165/172/
179/186]
NEXT or PREV
To continue

1 X X NEXT location no. flat charge ➞ duration STORE END

(00…99) Max. 7 digits (0…9999 s)
(65/72/79/86) (exc. decimal point)
65: Table 1 (0…9, ) To continue
72: Table 2
79: Table 3
86: Table 4 SELECT

Feature & Programming References

1.20.2 Call Charge Calculation

Call Charge Table 1/2/3/4—Off Peak Unit Charge and Duration [166/173/
180/187]
NEXT or PREV
To continue

1 X X NEXT location no. unit charge ➞ duration STORE END

(00…99) Max. 7 digits (0…9999 s)
(66/73/80/87) (exc. decimal point)
66: Table 1 (0…9, ) To continue
73: Table 2
80: Table 3
87: Table 4 SELECT

216 Feature Guide

 3.3 PT Programming

Feature & Programming References

1.20.2 Call Charge Calculation

Call Charge Table 1/2/3/4—Economy Flat Charge and Duration [167/174/

181/188]
NEXT or PREV
To continue

1 X X NEXT location no. flat charge ➞ duration STORE END

(00…99) Max. 7 digits (0…9999 s)
(67/74/81/88) (exc. decimal point)
67: Table 1 (0…9, ) To continue
74: Table 2
81: Table 3
88: Table 4 SELECT

Feature & Programming References

1.20.2 Call Charge Calculation

Call Charge Table 1/2/3/4—Economy Unit Charge and Duration [168/175/

182/189]
NEXT or PREV
To continue

1 X X NEXT location no. unit charge ➞ duration STORE END

(00…99) Max. 7 digits (0…9999 s)
(68/75/82/89) (exc. decimal point)
68: Table 1 (0…9, ) To continue
75: Table 2
82: Table 3
89: Table 4 SELECT

Feature & Programming References

1.20.2 Call Charge Calculation

Decimal Places [190]

1 9 0 NEXT no. of digits STORE END
(0…6)
Feature & Programming References
1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording Feature
1.20.2 Call Charge Calculation

Feature Guide 217

3.3 PT Programming

Hold Recall Time [200]

2 0 0 NEXT SELECT STORE END

(30 s/
1/1.5/2/3/4/5/6 min/
Disable)
Feature & Programming References
1.12.1 Call Hold
1.12.2 Call Park

Transfer Recall Time [201]

2 0 1 NEXT SELECT STORE END

(15/30 s/
1/2 min)
Feature & Programming References
1.11.1 Call Transfer

Call Forwarding Start Time [202]

2 0 2 NEXT SELECT STORE END

(5/10/15/
20 s delay)
Feature & Programming References
1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)

Hot Line Waiting Time [203]

2 0 3 NEXT SELECT STORE END

(0…4 s)
Feature & Programming References
1.6.1.7 Hot Line

Call Duration Counter Start [204]

2 0 4 NEXT SELECT STORE END

(5/10/15/20/25/30/35/
40/45/50 s after dialling/
Instantly)
Feature & Programming References
1.5.2.5 Reverse Circuit
1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording Feature
Polarity Reverse Detection [424]

218 Feature Guide

 3.3 PT Programming

CO-to-CO Line Call Duration [205]

2 0 5 NEXT time STORE END
(1…32 min)
Feature & Programming References
1.10.8 Outside (CO) Line Call Limitation

Dialling Start Time [206]

2 0 6 NEXT SELECT STORE END

Refer to the note.*

Note
* The minimum length of time that the PBX waits after seizing an outside (CO) line before dialling that
can be selected depends on your country/area as follows:
For Czech Republic: 0 ms, 250 ms, 500 ms, 750 ms, 1000 ms, 1250 ms, 3500 ms
For Others: 0 ms, 250 ms, 500 ms, 750 ms, 1000 ms, 1250 ms, 1500 ms

Feature & Programming References

1.5.3.3 Outside (CO) Line Access

Hookswitch Flash Timing Range [207]

2 0 7 NEXT SELECT STORE END

(MODE1: 50-180 ms/

MODE2: 80-180 ms/
MODE3: 80-650 ms/
MODE4: 80-1000 ms/
MODE5: 200-1000 ms)
Feature & Programming References
1.12.1 Call Hold

Inter-digit Time [208]

2 0 8 NEXT SELECT STORE END

(5/10/15/20 s)
Feature & Programming References
1.8.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)
No Dial Disconnection [211]

DTMF Time [210]

2 1 0 NEXT SELECT STORE END

(MODE1: 80 ms/
MODE2: 160 ms)

Feature Guide 219

3.3 PT Programming

Note
This programme selects the minimum duration of the DTMF signal sent to outside (CO) lines that have
been set to "DTMF" in Dial Mode [401].

Feature & Programming References

1.5.2.4 Dial Type Selection

No Dial Disconnection [211]

2 1 1 NEXT SELECT STORE END

(Enable/Disable)
Feature & Programming References
1.8.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)
Inter-digit Time [208]

Extension-to-CO Line Call Duration [212]

2 1 2 NEXT time STORE END
(1…32 min)

Note
This programme is available for the extension(s) enabled in CO Line Call Duration Limitation [613].

Feature & Programming References

1.10.8 Outside (CO) Line Call Limitation

Bell-off Detection [213]

2 1 3 NEXT SELECT STORE END

(3/6/12 s)

Note
This programme selects the minimum time required by the PBX to confirm that the bell signal is no
longer being sent from the telephone company, before the PBX acknowledges that the call is lost.

Carrier Exception Code [300]

NEXT or PREV
To continue

3 0 0 NEXT code no. carrier code STORE END

(01…20) Max. 10 digits
(0…9, , #, x) To continue

SELECT

220 Feature Guide

 3.3 PT Programming

Feature & Programming References

1.8.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)
1.9.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

TRS—System Speed Dialling Class [301]

3 0 1 NEXT SELECT STORE END

(Class-1…5)
Feature & Programming References
1.6.1.5 Speed Dialling—Personal/System
1.8.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)

TRS—COS 2-5 Denied Code [302-305]

NEXT or PREV
To continue

3 X NEXT code no. phone no. STORE END

(02…05) (01…20) Max. 11 digits

02: for Class 2 (0…9, , #, x) To continue
03: for Class 3
04: for Class 4 SELECT
05: for Class 5
Feature & Programming References
1.8.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)

TRS—Exception Code [306]

NEXT or PREV
To continue

3 0 6 NEXT code no. phone no. STORE END

(01…80) Max. 11 digits
(0…9, , #, x) To continue

SELECT

Feature & Programming References

1.8.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)
TRS—COS 2-5 Denied Code [302-305]

Feature Guide 221

3.3 PT Programming

Emergency Number [309]

NEXT or PREV
To continue

3 0 9 NEXT code no. emergency no. STORE END

(1…5) Max. 24 digits
(0…9) To continue

SELECT

Feature & Programming References

1.5.2.2 Emergency Call
1.8.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)

Account Code [310]

NEXT or PREV
To continue

3 1 0 NEXT code no. account code STORE END

(01…50) 4 digits
(0…9) To continue

SELECT

Feature & Programming References

1.5.2.3 Account Code Entry
1.8.2 Toll Restriction (TRS) Override by Account Code
Account Code Mode [605]

Automatic Pause Insertion Code [311]

NEXT or PREV
To continue

3 1 1 NEXT code no. pause code STORE END

(01…40) Max. 11 digits
(0…9) To continue

SELECT

Feature & Programming References

1.5.2.7 Pause Insertion
Pause Time [417]

222 Feature Guide

 3.3 PT Programming

TRS—Extension Lock Class [312]

3 1 2 NEXT SELECT STORE END

(COS-2…5/
Disable)
Feature & Programming References
1.8.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)
1.8.4 Extension Lock

ARS Selection [350]

NEXT or PREV
To continue

3 5 0 NEXT CO line no. SELECT STORE END

(1…3/ ) (Enable/
Disable) To continue

SELECT

Feature & Programming References

1.9.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

Route 1-4 Selection Code [351-354]

NEXT or PREV
To continue

3 X NEXT code no. area code STORE END

(51…54) (01…80) Max. 7 digits
51: for Route 1 (0…9, , #, x) To continue
52: for Route 2
53: for Route 3 SELECT
54: for Route 4
Feature & Programming References
1.9.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

Route 1-4 Exception Code [355-358]

NEXT or PREV
To continue

3 X NEXT code no. area code STORE END

(55…58) (01…80) Max. 7 digits
55: for Route 1 (0…9, , #, x) To continue
56: for Route 2
57: for Route 3 SELECT
58: for Route 4

Feature Guide 223

3.3 PT Programming

Feature & Programming References

1.9.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

1st Carrier Selection Code [359]

3 5 9 NEXT first carrier access code STORE END
Max. 4 digits (0…9)

Feature & Programming References

1.9.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

ARS Modification—Removed Digits [360]

NEXT or PREV
To continue

3 6 0 NEXT route no. removed digits STORE END

(1…4) (0…9)
To continue

SELECT

Feature & Programming References

1.9.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

ARS Modification—Added Number [361]

NEXT or PREV
To continue

3 6 1 NEXT route no. added number STORE END

(1…4) Max. 20 digits
(0…9, , #, P) To continue

SELECT

Feature & Programming References

1.9.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

ARS Dial Tone [362]

3 6 2 NEXT SELECT STORE END

(Tone1/Tone2/
Tone3/Disable)
Feature & Programming References
1.22.1 Dial Tone

224 Feature Guide

 3.3 PT Programming

ARS Inter-digit Time [363]

3 6 3 NEXT time STORE END
(1…20 s)

Note
This assignment should be the same as the inter-digit timer assigned in Inter-digit Time [208].

Feature & Programming References

1.9.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

ARS CO Line Group [364]

NEXT or PREV
To continue

3 6 4 NEXT route no. CO line group no. STORE END

(1…4) (1…3/ )
To continue

SELECT

Note
The assignments in Route 1-4 Selection Code [351-354] are effective for this programme.

Feature & Programming References

1.9.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

Route 1-4 Authorisation Code [381-384]

NEXT or PREV
To continue

3 X NEXT CO line no. authorisation code STORE END

(81…84) (1…3/ ) Max. 19 digits

(0…9, , #, P) To continue
81: for Route 1
82: for Route 2
83: for Route 3 SELECT
84: for Route 4
Feature & Programming References
1.9.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

Feature Guide 225

3.3 PT Programming

Route 1-4 Itemised Billing [385-388]

NEXT or PREV
To continue

3 X NEXT CO line no. SELECT STORE END

(85…88) (1…3/ ) (Enable/

85: for Route 1 Disable) To continue
86: for Route 2
87: for Route 3 SELECT
88: for Route 4
Feature & Programming References
1.9.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

Itemised Billing Code [389]

NEXT or PREV
To continue

3 8 9 NEXT extension jack no. itemised billing code STORE END

(01…08/ ) Max. 3 digits
(0…9, , #, P) To continue

SELECT

Feature & Programming References

1.9.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

Authorisation and Itemised Billing Code Order [390]

NEXT or PREV
To continue

3 9 0 NEXT route no. SELECT STORE END

(1…4/ ) (C.A.I.H/
C.I.A.H) To continue

SELECT

Note
C: Carrier Access Code; A: Authorisation Code; I: Itemised Billing Code; H: Telephone Number

Feature & Programming References

1.9.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

226 Feature Guide

 3.3 PT Programming

CO Line Connection [400]

NEXT or PREV
To continue

4 0 0 NEXT CO line no. SELECT STORE END

(1…3/ ) (Connect/
Not connect) To continue

SELECT

Note
The numbers of outside (CO) line ports that do not have lines connected should be set to "Not connect".
The PBX seizes the highest available outside (CO) line number when selecting an idle outside (CO)
line automatically. If an unconnected outside (CO) line number is set to "Connect" and is numbered
higher than any connected outside (CO) line number, the PBX will try to seize the unconnected outside
(CO) line.

Feature & Programming References

1.5.3.2 Line Preference—Outgoing
1.5.3.3 Outside (CO) Line Access

Dial Mode [401]

NEXT or PREV
To continue

4 0 1 NEXT CO line no. SELECT STORE END

(1…3/ ) (DTMF/Pulse/
Call Block mode) To continue

SELECT

Feature & Programming References

1.5.2.4 Dial Type Selection

Pulse Speed [402]

NEXT or PREV
To continue

4 0 2 NEXT CO line no. SELECT STORE END

(1…3/ ) (Low Speed: 10 pps/
High Speed: 20 pps) To continue

SELECT

Feature & Programming References

1.5.2.4 Dial Type Selection

Feature Guide 227

3.3 PT Programming

Dial Mode [401]

Host PBX Access Code [403]

NEXT or PREV
To continue

4 0 3 NEXT CO line no. access code STORE END

(1…3/ ) Up to 8 access codes
1 or 2 digits To continue
(0…9, , #)

SELECT

Note
Insert "," (CONF/MESSAGE button) between each access code using the comma button on the overlay.
For example, to store access codes 81 and 82 on outside (CO) line 1, programme as follows:
403 NEXT 1 81,82 STORE END

Feature & Programming References

1.5.2.8 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX)
Pause Time [417]

CO Line Group Number [404]

NEXT or PREV
To continue

4 0 4 NEXT CO line no. CO line group no. STORE END

(1…3/ ) (1…3)
To continue
SELECT

Feature & Programming References

1.5.3.3 Outside (CO) Line Access
2.2.2 Group

228 Feature Guide

 3.3 PT Programming

Flexible Outward Dialling—Day/Night/Lunch [405-407]

NEXT or PREV To continue
Go to next or prev. line number

➞ or ➞

To continue
Go to next or prev.
jack number

4 X NEXT CO line no. # extension jack no. SELECT STORE END

(05…07) (1…3/ ) (01…08/ ) (Enable/

05: for day Disable)
06: for night To continue
07: for lunch
Go to another jack number
SELECT To continue
Go to another line number

Note
It is impossible to disable all extensions for all outside (CO) lines in each time service mode (day/night/
lunch). In each mode, at least one extension must be allowed to make an outside (CO) line call.

Feature & Programming References

1.5.3.2 Line Preference—Outgoing
1.5.3.3 Outside (CO) Line Access

Flexible Ringing—Day/Night/Lunch [408-410]

NEXT or PREV To continue
Go to next or prev. line number

➞ or ➞

To continue
Go to next or prev.
jack number

4 X NEXT CO line no. # extension jack no. SELECT STORE END

(08…10) (1…3/ ) (01…08/ ) (Enable/

08: for day
Disable)
09: for night To continue
10: for lunch Go to another jack number
SELECT To continue
Go to another line number

Feature & Programming References

1.1.3.2 Outside (CO) Line Ringing Selection

Feature Guide 229

3.3 PT Programming

1.4.1.2 Line Preference—Incoming

Delayed Ringing—Day/Night/Lunch [411-413]

NEXT or PREV To continue
Go to next or prev. line number

➞ or ➞

To continue
Go to next or prev.
jack number

4 X NEXT CO line no. # extension jack no. SELECT STORE END

(11…13) (1…3/ ) (01…08/ ) Refer to the note.*

11: for day

12: for night To continue
13: for lunch Go to another jack number
SELECT To continue
Go to another line number

Note
* The ringing start time that can be selected for extension(s) selected in Flexible Ringing—Day/Night/
Lunch [408-410] depends on your country/area as follows:
For United Kingdom: Immediately, 10 s, 20 s, 30 s
For Others: Immediately, 5 s, 10 s, 15 s

Feature & Programming References

1.2.3 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Ring
1.4.1.2 Line Preference—Incoming

CO Line Mode—Day/Night/Lunch [414-416]

<To select Normal, UCD, and/or MODEM>

NEXT or PREV
To continue

4 X NEXT CO line no. SELECT STORE END

(14…16) (1…3/ ) (Normal/UCD/

MODEM) To continue
14: for day
15: for night
16: for lunch SELECT

230 Feature Guide

 3.3 PT Programming

<To select DISA>

NEXT or PREV
To continue

4 X NEXT CO line no. SELECT DISA OGM no. STORE END

(14…16) (1…3/ ) (DISA) (1…8)
14: for day To continue
15: for night
16: for lunch SELECT

<To select DIL>

NEXT or PREV
To continue

4 X NEXT CO line no. SELECT extension jack no. STORE END

(14…16) (1…3/ ) (DIL) (01…08)

14: for day To continue
15: for night
16: for lunch SELECT

Note
When you select "UCD", it is necessary to assign an extension group as the UCD group in UCD Group
[520].

Feature & Programming References

1.1.1.1 Direct In Line (DIL)
1.2.2 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
2.3.1 PC Programming
Flexible Ringing—Day/Night/Lunch [408-410]

Pause Time [417]

NEXT or PREV
To continue

4 1 7 NEXT CO line no. SELECT STORE END

(1…3/ ) (1.5/2.5/
3.5/4.5 s) To continue

SELECT

Feature & Programming References

1.5.2.7 Pause Insertion
1.5.2.8 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX)
Automatic Pause Insertion Code [311]
Host PBX Access Code [403]

Feature Guide 231

3.3 PT Programming

Flash/Recall Time [418]

NEXT or PREV
To continue

4 1 8 NEXT CO line no. SELECT STORE END

(1…3/ ) (80/100/160/
300/600/900/
To continue
1200 ms)

SELECT

Feature & Programming References

1.10.6 Flash/Recall
1.10.7 External Feature Access (EFA)

Automatic Designated Line Access [419]

NEXT or PREV
To continue

4 1 9 NEXT CO line no. SELECT STORE END

(1…3/ ) (Enable/
Disable) To continue

SELECT

Feature & Programming References

1.5.3.2 Line Preference—Outgoing
1.5.3.3 Outside (CO) Line Access
Automatic Line Access [121]

CPC Signal Detection—Incoming [420]

NEXT or PREV
To continue

4 2 0 NEXT CO line no. X STORE END

(1…3/ ) (00…75)
To continue
SELECT

Note
CPC signal detect time selection number:
00: Disable; 01–75: 22–614 ms (detect time: 8 ms increments)

Feature & Programming References

1.10.10 Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection

232 Feature Guide

 3.3 PT Programming

CPC Signal Detection—Outgoing [421]

NEXT or PREV
To continue

4 2 1 NEXT CO line no. SELECT STORE END

(1…3/ ) (Enable/
Disable) To continue

SELECT

Note
When this programme is disabled, CPC Signal Detection is only activated during an incoming outside
(CO) line call.

Feature & Programming References

1.10.10 Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection

Disconnect Time [422]

NEXT or PREV
To continue

4 2 2 NEXT CO line no. SELECT STORE END

(1…3/ ) Refer to the note.*

To continue
SELECT

Notes
• * The disconnect signal lengths that can be selected depend on your country/area as follows:
For United Kingdom: 0.5 s, 2.0 s, 4.0 s
For South Africa: 0.8 s, 1.5 s, 4.0 s
For Others: 0.5 s, 1.5 s, 4.0 s
• The time you select must be longer than the requirements of your telephone company or host PBX.

Feature & Programming References

1.10.6 Flash/Recall

Feature Guide 233

3.3 PT Programming

CO Line Ring Tone Pattern [423]

NEXT or PREV
To continue

4 2 3 NEXT CO line no. SELECT STORE END

(1…3/ ) (Single/Double/
Triple) To continue
SELECT

Note
It is recommended that you set a different ring tone pattern from the ring tone patterns specified in
Extension Ring Tone Pattern [115] and Doorphone Ring Tone Pattern [706].

Feature & Programming References

1.1.3.3 Ring Tone Pattern Selection

Polarity Reverse Detection [424]

NEXT or PREV
To continue

4 2 4 NEXT CO line no. SELECT STORE END

(1…3/ ) (Enable/
Disable) To continue

SELECT

Feature & Programming References

1.5.2.5 Reverse Circuit

Collect Call Block [425] (Brazil only)

NEXT or PREV
To continue

4 2 5 NEXT CO line no. SELECT STORE END

(1…3/ ) (Enable/
Disable) To continue

SELECT

Note
This programme enables the PBX to automatically reject collect calls from the telephone company.

234 Feature Guide

 3.3 PT Programming

Distinctive Ring Detection (DRD) [426] (New Zealand only)

NEXT or PREV
To continue

4 2 6 NEXT CO line no. SELECT STORE END

(1…3/ ) (Enable/
Disable) To continue

SELECT

Feature & Programming References

1.1.3.4 Distinctive Ring Detection (DRD) for New Zealand
DRD Ring Pattern 2 Extension Assignment—Day/Night/Lunch [427-429] (New Zealand only)
DRD Ring Pattern 3 Extension Assignment—Day/Night/Lunch [430-432] (New Zealand only)

DRD Ring Pattern 2 Extension Assignment—Day/Night/Lunch [427-429]

(New Zealand only)
NEXT or PREV To continue
Go to next or prev. line number

➞ or ➞

To continue
Go to next or prev.
jack number

4 X NEXT CO line no. # extension jack no. SELECT STORE END

(27…29) (1…3/ ) (01…08/ ) (Enable/

27: for day Disable)
28: for night To continue
29: for lunch
Go to another jack number
SELECT To continue
Go to another line number

Note
This is effective only when the DRD feature is enabled in Distinctive Ring Detection (DRD) [426] (New
Zealand only).

Feature & Programming References

1.1.3.4 Distinctive Ring Detection (DRD) for New Zealand

Feature Guide 235

3.3 PT Programming

DRD Ring Pattern 3 Extension Assignment—Day/Night/Lunch [430-432]

(New Zealand only)
NEXT or PREV To continue
Go to next or prev. line number

➞ or ➞

To continue
Go to next or prev.
jack number

4 X NEXT CO line no. # extension jack no. SELECT STORE END

(30…32) (1…3/ ) (01…08/ ) (Enable/

30: for day Disable)
31: for night To continue
32: for lunch
Go to another jack number
SELECT To continue
Go to another line number

Note
This is effective only when the DRD feature is enabled in Distinctive Ring Detection (DRD) [426] (New
Zealand only).

Feature & Programming References

1.1.3.4 Distinctive Ring Detection (DRD) for New Zealand

DRD Pattern 2 and 3 Ring Tone [433-434] (New Zealand only)

NEXT or PREV
To continue

4 X NEXT CO line no. SELECT STORE END

(33…34) (1…3/ ) (Single/Double/

33: for Pattern 2 Triple) To continue
34: for Pattern 3
SELECT

Feature & Programming References

1.1.3.4 Distinctive Ring Detection (DRD) for New Zealand

236 Feature Guide

 3.3 PT Programming

Call Charge Calculation [441]

NEXT or PREV
To continue

4 4 1 NEXT CO line no. SELECT STORE END

(1…3/ ) (Enable/Disable)
To continue

SELECT

Feature & Programming References

1.20.2 Call Charge Calculation

Call Charge Table Assignment [442]

NEXT or PREV
To continue

4 4 2 NEXT CO line no. SELECT STORE END

(1…3/ ) (Table1/Table2/
Table3/Table4) To continue

SELECT

Feature & Programming References

1.20.2 Call Charge Calculation

DISA Incoming Call Dial Mode [500]

5 0 0 NEXT SELECT STORE END

(Without AA/
With AA)

Note
Without AA: Available destinations are extension numbers assigned in Extension Number [009],
Outside (CO) Line Access numbers (9/0 [for New Zealand: 1 or 9], 81 through 83), and the Operator
Call number (0 or 9)
With AA: Available destinations are numbers available in "Without AA" mode and numbers (0 through
9) assigned in DISA Built-in AA [501]

Feature & Programming References

1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

Feature Guide 237

3.3 PT Programming

DISA Built-in AA [501]

NEXT or PREV
To continue

extension
jack no.
(01…08)
5 0 1 NEXT AA no. SELECT
or STORE END
(0…9) extension
(Jack/GRP/
3-level AA/ group no.
Not Stored) (1…8)

Note
If you would like to use the Automatic Line Access number (9/0 [for New Zealand: 1 or 9]) and/or
Operator Call number in AA mode, do not assign AA number(s) that correspond to Automatic Line
Access or Operator Call numbers (9 and/or 0).

Feature & Programming References

1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

FAX Connection [503]

5 0 3 NEXT extension jack no. STORE END
(01…08*/Disable)

Notes
• * The highest extension jack number may be "04", depending on your country/area.
• To delete (disable) an extension jack number, press CLEAR in the extension jack number step.
• The assigned extension will automatically have the Data Line Security feature set.

Feature & Programming References

1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

DISA Delayed Answer Time [504]

5 0 4 NEXT SELECT STORE END

(0/3/6/12 s)
Feature & Programming References
1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

DISA Wait Time after OGM [505]

5 0 5 NEXT SELECT STORE END

(0/5/10/15 s)
Feature & Programming References
1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

238 Feature Guide

 3.3 PT Programming

DISA Busy Mode [506]

<To select Disconnect or Call Waiting>

5 0 6 NEXT SELECT STORE END

(Disconnect/
Call Waiting)
<To select DISA>

5 0 6 NEXT SELECT DISA OGM no. STORE END

(DISA) (1…8)
Feature & Programming References
1.15.5 Outgoing Message (OGM) for DISA/UCD
1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

DISA Intercept Mode [507]

5 0 7 NEXT SELECT STORE END

(Intercept/
Disconnect)
Feature & Programming References
1.1.1.2 Intercept Routing
1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
1.19 Voice Mail Features

DISA Ring Time before Intercept [508]

5 0 8 NEXT SELECT STORE END

(10/20/30/
40/60/120 s)
Feature & Programming References
1.1.1.2 Intercept Routing
1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
DISA Intercept Mode [507]

DISA Ring Time after Intercept [509]

5 0 9 NEXT SELECT STORE END

(10/20/30/
40/60/120 s)
Feature & Programming References
1.1.1.2 Intercept Routing
1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
DISA Intercept Mode [507]
DISA Ring Time before Intercept [508]

Feature Guide 239

3.3 PT Programming

DISA No Dial Mode [510]

5 1 0 NEXT SELECT STORE END

(Intercept/
Disconnect)
Feature & Programming References
1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

DISA Security Mode [511]

5 1 1 NEXT SELECT STORE END

(Trunk/All/
None Security)

Note
Trunk Security: Requires the caller to enter a DISA security code assigned in DISA Security Code [512]
before making an outside (CO) line call.
All Security: Requires the caller to enter a DISA security code before making either an outside (CO)
line or intercom call.
No Security: Allows the caller to make either an outside (CO) line or intercom call without entering a
DISA security code.

Feature & Programming References

1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

DISA Security Code [512]

NEXT or PREV
To continue

5 1 2 NEXT code no. security code STORE END

(1…4) 4…10 digits
(0…9) To continue

SELECT

WARNING
There is a risk that fraudulent telephone calls will be made using the Outside-to-Outside (CO-to-CO)
Line Call feature of DISA.
The cost of such calls will be billed to the owner/renter of the PBX.
To protect the PBX from this kind of fraudulent use, we strongly recommend:
a) Enabling DISA security (Trunk Security or All Security).
b) Maintaining the secrecy of passwords.
c) Selecting passwords that are complex and random, so that they cannot be easily guessed.
d) Changing passwords regularly.

Notes
• This setting is required if "Trunk Security" or "All Security" is selected in DISA Security Mode [511].

240 Feature Guide

 3.3 PT Programming

• Each DISA security code should be unique.

• The number of digits for DISA security codes is selected in DISA Security Code Digits [530].

Feature & Programming References

1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
DISA Security Mode [511]

Cyclic Tone Detection [513]

5 1 3 NEXT SELECT STORE END

(Disable/
2/3/4 times)
Feature & Programming References
1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

FAX Tone Detection [514]

5 1 4 NEXT SELECT STORE END

(1/2 time(s))
Feature & Programming References
1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
FAX Connection [503]

Intercept Time for Internal DISA [515]

5 1 5 NEXT SELECT STORE END

(3/6/9 s)
Feature & Programming References
1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
DISA No Dial Mode [510]

DISA Incoming Assignment [516]

NEXT or PREV
To continue

5 1 6 NEXT extension jack no. SELECT STORE END

(01…08/ ) (Enable/
Disable) To continue

SELECT

Feature & Programming References

1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

Feature Guide 241

3.3 PT Programming

DISA AA Wait Time [517]

5 1 7 NEXT SELECT STORE END

(1…5 s)
Feature & Programming References
1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
DISA Built-in AA [501]

DISA Tone after Security Code [518]

5 1 8 NEXT SELECT STORE END

(Enable/Disable)
Feature & Programming References
1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
DISA Security Code [512]

OGM Mute Time [519]

5 1 9 NEXT SELECT STORE END

(0/2/4/6 s)
Feature & Programming References
1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

UCD Group [520]

5 2 0 NEXT extension group no. STORE END
(1…8)
Feature & Programming References
1.2.2 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
2.2.2 Group

UCD Busy Waiting Time [521]

5 2 1 NEXT waiting time SELECT STORE END

(1…32 min/1…59 s) (min/s)

Feature & Programming References
1.2.2 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
UCD Busy Mode [523]

UCD OGM Message Interval Time [522]

5 2 2 NEXT SELECT STORE END

(30 s/
1/1.5/2 min)

242 Feature Guide

 3.3 PT Programming

Feature & Programming References

1.2.2 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
UCD Busy Waiting Time [521]

UCD Busy Mode [523]

<To select Intercept-Normal or Disconnect>

5 2 3 NEXT SELECT STORE END

(Intercept-Normal/
Disconnect)
<To select Intercept-DISA or Disconnect-OGM>

5 2 3 NEXT SELECT DISA/UCD OGM no. STORE END

(1…8)
(Intercept-DISA/
Disconnect-OGM)
Feature & Programming References
1.2.2 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)

UCD Intercept Mode [524]

5 2 4 NEXT SELECT STORE END

(Intercept/
Disconnect)
Feature & Programming References
1.2.2 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)

UCD Ring Time before Intercept [525]

5 2 5 NEXT SELECT STORE END

(10/20/30/
40/60/120 s)
Feature & Programming References
1.2.2 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
UCD Intercept Mode [524]

UCD Ring Time after Intercept [526]

5 2 6 NEXT SELECT STORE END

(10/20/30/
40/60/120 s)
Feature & Programming References
1.2.2 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
UCD Intercept Mode [524]

Feature Guide 243

3.3 PT Programming

UCD Waiting Message [527]

5 2 7 NEXT UCD OGM no. STORE END
(1…8/
Not Stored)

Feature & Programming References

1.2.2 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
1.15.5 Outgoing Message (OGM) for DISA/UCD

DISA Security Code Digits [530]

5 3 0 NEXT SELECT STORE END

(4…10 digits)

Note
When this setting is changed, DISA security codes that have already been assigned in DISA Security
Code [512] will be cleared.

Feature & Programming References

1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

DISA Ringback Tone [531]

5 3 1 NEXT SELECT STORE END

(Ringback Tone/
Hold Music)
Feature & Programming References
1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

3-level AA Assignment [540-549]

Go to another third AA number

NEXT or PREV Go to next or prev.

third AA number

extension To continue
jack no.
second third (01…08)
5 X NEXT AA no. AA no. SELECT
or
STORE END

(40…49) (0…9) (0…9, ) (Jack/GRP/ extension

[40-49: AA no. 0-9] [ : Skip] 3-level AA/ group no.
Not Stored) (1…8)

Notes
• This programme is available only when "3-level AA" is selected for each AA number in DISA Built-
in AA [501].
• Only when you select " " as the third AA number, you can select "3-level AA" in the next step.

244 Feature Guide

 3.3 PT Programming

Feature & Programming References

1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

Clear All OGMs of DISA/UCD [599]

5 9 9 NEXT STORE END

Feature & Programming References

1.15.5 Outgoing Message (OGM) for DISA/UCD

Extension Group [600]

NEXT or PREV
To continue

6 0 0 NEXT extension jack no. extension group no. STORE END

(01…08/ ) (1…8)
To continue

SELECT

Feature & Programming References

1.2.1 Idle Extension Hunting
2.2.2 Group

TRS-COS—Day/Night/Lunch [601-603]
NEXT or PREV
To continue

6 X NEXT extension jack no. COS no. STORE END

(01…03) (01…08/ ) (1…5)

01: for day To continue
02: for night
03: for lunch SELECT

Feature & Programming References

1.8.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)
2.2.1 Class of Service (COS)

Feature Guide 245

3.3 PT Programming

Extension Name [604]

NEXT or PREV
To continue

6 0 4 NEXT extension jack no. extension name* STORE END

(01…08) Max.
10 characters To continue

SELECT

Note
* An extension name can be entered using a PT's dialling buttons. The displayed character varies
depending on the number of times that the dialling button is pressed. It is possible to toggle between
"Alphabet mode" and "Numeral mode" by pressing SELECT.

Feature & Programming References

1.5.1.1 Intercom Call
3.3.1 Programming Instructions—Entering Characters

Account Code Mode [605]

NEXT or PREV
To continue

6 0 5 NEXT extension jack no. SELECT STORE END

(01…08/ ) (Option/Forced/
Verify-All/Verify-Toll)
To continue
SELECT

Feature & Programming References

1.5.2.3 Account Code Entry
1.8.2 Toll Restriction (TRS) Override by Account Code
Account Code [310]

Call Transfer to CO Line [606]

NEXT or PREV
To continue

6 0 6 NEXT extension jack no. SELECT STORE END

(01…04*/ ) (Enable/
Disable) To continue

SELECT

246 Feature Guide

 3.3 PT Programming

Note
* The highest extension jack number may be "08", depending on your country/area.

Feature & Programming References

1.11.1 Call Transfer
1.13.1.2 Conference

Call Forwarding to CO Line [607]

NEXT or PREV
To continue

6 0 7 NEXT extension jack no. SELECT STORE END

(01…08/ ) (Enable/
Disable) To continue

SELECT

Feature & Programming References

1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)

Executive Busy Override [608]

NEXT or PREV
To continue

6 0 8 NEXT extension jack no. SELECT STORE END

(01…08/ ) (Enable/
Disable) To continue

SELECT

Feature & Programming References

1.7.2 Executive Busy Override

DND Override [609]

NEXT or PREV
To continue

6 0 9 NEXT extension jack no. SELECT STORE END

(01…08/ ) (Enable/
Disable) To continue

SELECT

Feature & Programming References

1.3.1.3 Do Not Disturb (DND)

Feature Guide 247

3.3 PT Programming

Parallelled Telephone [610]

NEXT or PREV
To continue

6 1 0 NEXT extension jack no. SELECT STORE END

(01…04/ )
(Enable/
Disable) To continue

SELECT

Feature & Programming References

1.10.9 Parallelled Telephone

TAM Extension [611]

NEXT or PREV
To continue

6 1 1 NEXT extension jack no. SELECT STORE END

(01…08*/ ) (Enable/
Disable) To continue

SELECT

Note
* The highest extension jack number may be "04", depending on your country/area.

Feature & Programming References

1.4.1.3 Call Pickup

Room Monitor [612]

NEXT or PREV
To continue

6 1 2 NEXT extension jack no. SELECT STORE END

(01…04*/ ) (Enable/
Disable) To continue

SELECT

Notes
• * The highest extension jack number may be "08", depending on your country/area.
• Extensions that are to be monitored must have their jacks set to "Enable" in this programme in
advance.

248 Feature Guide

 3.3 PT Programming

Feature & Programming References

1.10.2 Room Monitor

CO Line Call Duration Limitation [613]

NEXT or PREV
To continue

6 1 3 NEXT extension jack no. SELECT STORE END

(01…08/ ) (Enable/
Disable) To continue

SELECT

Feature & Programming References

1.10.8 Outside (CO) Line Call Limitation
Extension-to-CO Line Call Duration [212]

Internal Pulse Detection [614]

NEXT or PREV
To continue

6 1 4 NEXT extension jack no. SELECT STORE END

(01…08*/ ) (Enable/
Disable) To continue

SELECT

Note
* The highest extension jack number may be "04", depending on your country/area.

Feature & Programming References

1.12.1 Call Hold
Hookswitch Flash Timing Range [207]

LCD Language [615]

NEXT or PREV
To continue

6 1 5 NEXT extension jack no. SELECT STORE END

(01…04*1/ ) Refer to the note.*2
To continue

SELECT

Feature Guide 249

3.3 PT Programming

Notes
• *1 The highest extension jack number may be "08", depending on your country/area.
• *2 The following languages are available for the LCD:
English; Spanish; Portuguese; Russian; Greek; Czech; Hungarian; Slovak; Polish; Italian;
Ukrainian
Selections vary depending on your country/area.
• Russian display is only available for the KX-T7730/KX-T7735RU.
• When "Russian" or "Ukrainian" is selected in this programme, during intercom calls, the calling
extension's name assigned in Extension Name in Cyrillic [616] is displayed at the called extension.
When another language is selected, the calling extension's name assigned in Extension Name
[604] is displayed.

Extension Name in Cyrillic [616]

NEXT or PREV
To continue

6 1 6 NEXT extension jack no. extension name* STORE END

(01…08) Max.
10 characters To continue

SELECT

Notes
• * An extension name can be entered using a PT's dialling buttons. The displayed character varies
depending on the number of times that the dialling button is pressed. It is possible to toggle
between "Alphabet mode", "Cyrillic alphabet mode", and "Numeral mode" by pressing SELECT.
• Russian display is only available for the KX-T7730/KX-T7735RU.

Feature & Programming References

1.5.1.1 Intercom Call
3.3.1 Programming Instructions—Entering Characters
LCD Language [615]

Message Waiting for Another Extension [618]

NEXT or PREV
To continue

6 1 8 NEXT extension jack no. SELECT STORE END

(01…04*/ ) (Enable/
Disable)
To continue

SELECT

Note
* The highest extension jack number may be "08", depending on your country/area.

250 Feature Guide

 3.3 PT Programming

Feature & Programming References

1.17.1 Message Waiting

SLT Message Waiting [619]

NEXT or PREV
To continue

6 1 9 NEXT extension jack no. SELECT STORE END

(01…08*/ ) (Enable/
Disable) To continue

SELECT

Note
* The highest extension jack number may be "04", depending on your country/area.

Feature & Programming References

1.17.1 Message Waiting

LCS Recording Mode Set [620]

NEXT or PREV
To continue

6 2 0 NEXT extension jack no. SELECT STORE END

(01…04*/ ) (Stop recording/
Keep recording)
To continue

SELECT

Note
* The highest extension jack number may be "08", depending on your country/area.

Feature & Programming References

1.19.1 Voice Mail APT Integration

Feature Guide 251

3.3 PT Programming

BGM Control for APT [626]

NEXT or PREV
To continue

6 2 6 NEXT extension jack no. SELECT STORE END

(01…04*/ ) (Enable/
Disable)
To continue

SELECT

Note
* The highest extension jack number may be "08", depending on your country/area.

Feature & Programming References

1.15.4 Background Music (BGM)

SLT Ring Wait Time for New Call [627]

NEXT or PREV
To continue

6 2 7 NEXT extension jack no. SELECT STORE END

(01…08*/ ) (0…15 s)
To continue
SELECT

Note
* The highest extension jack number may be "04", depending on your country/area.

Feature & Programming References

1.16.1 Caller ID

SLT Caller ID [628]

NEXT or PREV
To continue

6 2 8 NEXT extension jack no. SELECT STORE END

(01…08*/ ) (Enable/
Disable) To continue

SELECT

Note
* The highest extension jack number may be "04", depending on your country/area.

252 Feature Guide

 3.3 PT Programming

Feature & Programming References

1.16.1 Caller ID

SLT Fixed Bell Pattern [629]

NEXT or PREV
To continue

6 2 9 NEXT extension jack no. SELECT STORE END

(01…08*/ ) (Disable/
Single/Double) To continue

SELECT

Note
* The highest extension jack number may be "04", depending on your country/area.

Feature & Programming References

1.1.3.3 Ring Tone Pattern Selection
1.16.1 Caller ID

LCD Display Mode [630]

NEXT or PREV
To continue

6 3 0 NEXT extension jack no. SELECT STORE END

(01…04*/ ) (Charge/
Duration) To continue

SELECT

Note
* The highest extension jack number may be "08", depending on your country/area.

Feature & Programming References

1.20.2 Call Charge Calculation

Feature Guide 253

3.3 PT Programming

Doorphone Ringing—Day/Night/Lunch [700-702]

NEXT or PREV To continue
Go to next or prev. doorphone number

➞ or ➞

To continue
Go to next or prev.
jack number

7 X NEXT doorphone no. # extension jack no. SELECT STORE END

(00…02) (1…2/ ) (01…08/ ) (Enable/

00: for day Disable)
01: for night To continue
02: for lunch
Go to another jack number
SELECT To continue
Go to another doorphone number

Feature & Programming References

1.15.1 Doorphone Call

Door Opener—Day/Night/Lunch [703-705]

NEXT or PREV To continue
Go to next or prev. door opener number

➞ or ➞

To continue
Go to next or prev.
jack number

7 X NEXT door opener no. # extension jack no. SELECT STORE END

(03…05) (1…2/ ) (01…08/ ) (Enable/

03: for day Disable)
04: for night To continue
05: for lunch
Go to another jack number
SELECT To continue
Go to another door opener number

Feature & Programming References

1.15.2 Door Open

254 Feature Guide

 3.3 PT Programming

Doorphone Ring Tone Pattern [706]

NEXT or PREV
To continue

7 0 6 NEXT doorphone no. SELECT STORE END

(1…2/ ) (Single/Double/
Triple/S-Double) To continue

SELECT

Note
It is recommended that you set a different ring tone pattern from the ring tone patterns specified in
Extension Ring Tone Pattern [115] and CO Line Ring Tone Pattern [423].

Feature & Programming References

1.1.3.3 Ring Tone Pattern Selection
1.15.1 Doorphone Call

Doorphone Access Tone [707]

NEXT or PREV
To continue

7 0 7 NEXT doorphone no. SELECT STORE END

(1…2/ ) (Enable/
To continue
Disable)
SELECT

Feature & Programming References

1.10.2 Room Monitor
1.15.1 Doorphone Call

Doorphone Ring Time [708]

NEXT or PREV
To continue

7 0 8 NEXT doorphone no. SELECT STORE END

(1…2/ ) (15/30 s)
To continue

SELECT

Feature & Programming References

1.15.1 Doorphone Call

Feature Guide 255

3.3 PT Programming

Door Open Duration [709]

NEXT or PREV
To continue

7 0 9 NEXT door opener no. SELECT STORE END

(1…2/ ) (1…8 s)
To continue

SELECT

Feature & Programming References

1.15.2 Door Open

Doorphone Ring/Chime [710]

NEXT or PREV
To continue

7 1 0 NEXT doorphone no. SELECT STORE END

(1…2/ ) (Ring/Chime/
Ring & Chime) To continue

SELECT

Feature & Programming References

1.15.3 Doorbell/Door Chime
Doorphone Ringing—Day/Night/Lunch [700-702]

Doorphone Chime Assignment [711]

NEXT or PREV
To continue

7 1 1 NEXT doorphone no. SELECT STORE END

(1…2/ ) (Relay1…2)
To continue

SELECT

Feature & Programming References

1.15.3 Doorbell/Door Chime
Doorphone Ring/Chime [710]

256 Feature Guide

 3.3 PT Programming

Doorphone Chime Pattern [712]

NEXT or PREV
To continue

7 1 2 NEXT doorphone no. SELECT STORE END

(1…2/ ) (Pattern1…8)
To continue

SELECT

Feature & Programming References

1.15.3 Doorbell/Door Chime
4.2.1 Tones/Ring Tones

SMDR RS-232C Parameter [800]

<Select the new line code> <Select the baud rate>
8 0 0 NEXT SELECT STORE NEXT SELECT STORE

(CR+LF/CR) (1200/2400/
CR: Carriage Return 4800/9600 B)
LF: Line Feed
<Select the word length> <Select the parity bit> <Select the stop bit length>
NEXT SELECT STORE NEXT SELECT STORE NEXT SELECT STORE END

(7/8 bits) (Mark/Space/ (1 bit/2 bits)

Even/Odd/
None*)

Notes
• * Select "None" when the printer does not require error checking.
• The following combinations are invalid.

Parity Word length Stop bit length

Mark 8 2
Space 8 1
Space 8 2

If any of the above invalid combinations are selected, an alarm tone will be heard.

Feature & Programming References

1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording Feature

Feature Guide 257

3.3 PT Programming

SMDR Parameter [801]

<Select the page length>
page length
8 0 1 NEXT STORE
(4…99 lines)
<Select the skip perforation>
NEXT skip perforation STORE END
(0…95 lines)

Note
To enable the changes, you must turn the power switch of the PBX off and back on again after changing
this setting.

Feature & Programming References

1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording Feature

Incoming/Outgoing Call Selection for Printing [802]

<Select an outgoing call> <Select an incoming call>
8 0 2 NEXT SELECT STORE NEXT SELECT STORE END

(On/Off/Toll) (On/Off)

Note
Outgoing Call: On (Print all calls)/Off (No printing)/Toll (Print toll calls only)
Incoming Call: On (Print all calls)/Off (No printing)

Feature & Programming References

1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording Feature
TRS—COS 2-5 Denied Code [302-305]

Secret Number SMDR Print Suppression [803]

8 0 3 NEXT SELECT STORE END

(No Printing/
Printing)

Feature & Programming References

1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording Feature
System Speed Dialling Number [001]

258 Feature Guide

 3.3 PT Programming

System Data Dump [804]

<To select All parameters, System parameter, Speed dial, and/or Stop output>

8 0 4 NEXT SELECT STORE END

(All para/
System para/
Speed dial/ To continue
Stop output)

<To select the CO (outside line) parameter>

8 0 4 NEXT SELECT STORE CO line no. STORE END

(CO para) (1…3/ )

To continue

<To select the Extension parameter>

8 0 4 NEXT SELECT STORE extension jack no. STORE END

(Extn. para) (01…08/ )

To continue

<To select the DSS parameter>

8 0 4 NEXT SELECT STORE DSS console no. STORE END

(DSS para) (1…2/ )

To continue

Feature & Programming References

1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording Feature

SMDR Account Code [805]

8 0 5 NEXT SELECT STORE END

(CODE/INDEX)
Feature & Programming References
1.8.2 Toll Restriction (TRS) Override by Account Code
1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording Feature
Account Code [310]
Account Code Mode [605]

SMDR Language [806]

8 0 6 NEXT SELECT STORE END
Refer to the note.*

Note
* The following languages are available for SMDR:
English; Spanish; Portuguese; Greek; Czech; Hungarian; Slovak; Polish; Italian
Selections vary depending on your country/area.

Feature Guide 259

3.3 PT Programming

Feature & Programming References

1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording Feature

Caller ID [900]
NEXT or PREV
To continue

9 0 0 NEXT CO line no. SELECT STORE END

(1…3/ ) (Enable/
Disable) To continue

SELECT

Note
The DISA Delayed Answer Time for the outside (CO) lines enabled here will always be 6 seconds even
if "0 s" or "3 s" is selected in DISA Delayed Answer Time [504].

Feature & Programming References

1.16.1 Caller ID

Caller ID Area Code [901]

NEXT or PREV
To continue

9 0 1 NEXT code no. area code STORE END

(1…5) Max. 6 digits
(0…9) To continue

SELECT

Feature & Programming References

1.16.1 Caller ID
1.16.2 Incoming Call Log
Caller ID Modification for Local Calls [902]

Caller ID Modification for Local Calls [902]

SELECT To continue

<Select the removed digits>

9 0 2 NEXT code no. removed digits STORE END
(1…5) (0…9)
<Select the added number>

➞ added number STORE END

Max. 4 digits
(0…9, , #)

260 Feature Guide

 3.3 PT Programming

Feature & Programming References

1.16.1 Caller ID
1.16.2 Incoming Call Log
Caller ID Area Code [901]

Caller ID Modification for Long-distance Calls [903]

<Select the removed digits>

9 0 3 NEXT removed digits STORE END

(0…9)

<Select the added number>

➞ added number STORE END

Max. 4 digits
(0…9, , #)

Feature & Programming References

1.16.1 Caller ID
1.16.2 Incoming Call Log

Caller ID Log Priority [904]

NEXT or PREV
To continue

9 0 4 NEXT extension jack no. SELECT STORE END

(01…04*/ ) (Name/
Number)
To continue

SELECT

Notes
• * The highest extension jack number may be "08", depending on your country/area.
• This programme is available when the Caller ID service provides both a name and a number. If
only the number is provided, this programme is not necessary.

Feature & Programming References

1.16.2 Incoming Call Log
1.18.4 Display Information

Caller ID Automatic 0 Addition [905]

9 0 5 NEXT SELECT STORE END

(Enable/Disable)

Feature & Programming References

1.16.1 Caller ID

Feature Guide 261

3.3 PT Programming

Caller ID SMDR Format [906]

9 0 6 NEXT SELECT STORE END

(Without CID: Not printed/

With CID: Printed)

Note
Even if a name is also sent by the Caller ID service, only the number is printed.

Feature & Programming References

1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording Feature

Caller ID SMDR Printout [907]

9 0 7 NEXT SELECT STORE END

(Enable/Disable)

Note
This programme enables a caller's telephone number to be shown by SMDR before the call is
answered.

Feature & Programming References

1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording Feature

Common Area Call Log Check [909]

NEXT or PREV
To continue

9 0 9 NEXT extension jack no. SELECT STORE END

(01…04*/ ) (Enable/
Disable)
To continue

SELECT

Note
* The highest extension jack number may be "08", depending on your country/area.

Feature & Programming References

1.16.2 Incoming Call Log

262 Feature Guide

 3.3 PT Programming

Caller ID Type [910]

NEXT or PREV
To continue

9 1 0 NEXT CO line no. SELECT STORE END

(1…3/ ) (FSK/DTMF)
To continue

SELECT

Feature & Programming References

1.16.1 Caller ID

Currency [921]
9 2 1 NEXT currency* STORE END
Max. 3 characters

Note
* Currency can be entered using a PT's dialling buttons. The displayed character varies depending on
the number of times that the dialling button is pressed. It is possible to toggle between "Alphabet mode"
and "Numeral mode" by pressing SELECT.

Feature & Programming References

1.20.2 Call Charge Calculation
3.3.1 Programming Instructions—Entering Characters

Call Charge Information SMDR Format 1 [922]

9 2 2 NEXT SELECT STORE END

(With Charge/
Without Charge)
Feature & Programming References
1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording Feature
1.20.2 Call Charge Calculation

Call Charge Information SMDR Format 2 [923]

9 2 3 NEXT SELECT STORE END

(MODE 1/MODE 2)

Note
MODE 1: Does not print out zeros (e.g., 2.86).
MODE 2: Prints out zeros (e.g., 00002.86).

Feature Guide 263

3.3 PT Programming

Feature & Programming References

1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording Feature
1.20.2 Call Charge Calculation

Secret Printing [924]

9 2 4 NEXT SELECT STORE END

(No Secret/Secret)
Feature & Programming References
1.20.1.2 Call Log Printout for Each Extension
1.20.2 Call Charge Calculation

Budget Management [925]

NEXT or PREV
To continue

9 2 5 NEXT extension jack no. SELECT STORE END

(01…08/ ) (Enable/
Disable) To continue

SELECT

Feature & Programming References

1.8.3 Budget Management
1.20.2 Call Charge Calculation

Budget Limit Selection [926]

9 2 6 NEXT SELECT STORE END

(Enable/Disable)

Note
Enable: Disconnect the call after the beeps.
Disable: From the next call.

Feature & Programming References

1.8.3 Budget Management
1.20.2 Call Charge Calculation

Call Log Next Page [927]

9 2 7 NEXT SELECT STORE END

(Enable/Disable)

264 Feature Guide

 3.3 PT Programming

Note
This programme specifies whether or not a page break is inserted after each extension's call log
printout.

SMDR Mode for Printing [929]

9 2 9 NEXT SELECT STORE END

(MODE 1/MODE 2)

Note
Even if "On" (outgoing/incoming call) or "Toll" (outgoing call) is selected in Incoming/Outgoing Call
Selection for Printing [802], when "MODE 2" is selected in this programme, the call log information is
not displayed by SMDR, but the information for each extension is displayed by Call Log Printout.

Feature & Programming References

1.20.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
1.20.1.2 Call Log Printout for Each Extension

Call Forwarding Selection [963]

NEXT or PREV
To continue

9 6 3 NEXT extension jack no. SELECT STORE END

(01…08/ ) (Enable/
Disable) To continue

SELECT

Note
This programme also functions for outside (CO) line calls via the DISA Intercept Routing feature, and
when DISA calls are received by a DISA ring group.

Feature & Programming References

1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)
CO Line Mode—Day/Night/Lunch [414-416]

TRS Check after Answering [966]

9 6 6 NEXT SELECT STORE END

(Enable/Disable)

Note
This programme specifies whether the PBX checks DTMF signals when answering calls or not.

Feature Guide 265

3.3 PT Programming

TRS Check Time after Answering [967]

9 6 7 NEXT SELECT STORE END

(5/10/15/
20/30/60 s)

Note
This programme specifies the length of time that the DTMF signal is checked when "Enable" is selected
in TRS Check after Answering [966].

KX-T7700 Series Incoming Lamp Control [968]

9 6 8 NEXT SELECT STORE END

(Enable/Disable)
Feature & Programming References
1.17.1 Message Waiting

Country [995]
9 9 5 NEXT SELECT STORE

(NE: NE (ES)/NE (IT))

(CE: CE/CE (CZ))

Notes
• This programme specifies your country/area when the suffix of the PBX is "NE" or "CE". For more
information, please consult your dealer.
• When the country code is changed, all system data is initialised.

Feature & Programming References

2.3.6 Country Setting

Firmware Version [998]

9 9 8 NEXT SELECT END Display Example
< ROM > < Firmware >
Y501A 040430 (BX) 1.0.0
SELECT Version Date Version

Note
You can confirm the ROM and the firmware version of the PBX alternately by pressing SELECT.

Feature & Programming References

2.3.7 Firmware Upgrade

266 Feature Guide

 3.3 PT Programming

System Data Clear [999]

<To select All parameters, System parameter, and/or Speed dial>

9 9 9 NEXT SELECT STORE END

(All para/
System para/
Speed dial) To continue

<To select the CO (outside line) parameter>

9 9 9 NEXT SELECT STORE CO line no. STORE END

(CO para) (1…3/ )

To continue

<To select the Extension parameter>

9 9 9 NEXT SELECT STORE extension jack no. STORE END

(Extn. para) (01…08/ )

To continue

<To select the DSS parameter>

9 9 9 NEXT SELECT STORE DSS console no. STORE END

(DSS para) (1…2/ )

To continue

Feature & Programming References

2.3.2 PT Programming

Feature Guide 267

3.3 PT Programming

268 Feature Guide

Section 4
Appendix

Feature Guide 269

4.1 Capacity of System Resources

4.1 Capacity of System Resources

4.1.1 Capacity of System Resources

Category Item KX-TEB308

System Outside (CO) Line Group 3
Extension Group 8
Absent Message 6 × 16 characters
Message Waiting 8/extn.
Number of Characters of Name 10
Extension Number Digits 2 or 3
Call Park Zone 10
Conference (5-party) 1
Account Code 4 digits, 50 entries
Host PBX Access Code 1 or 2 digits, 8 entries
Station Message Detail Recording
64 calls
(SMDR)
Call Log Printout for Each Extension 500 calls
Intercom Call 3
Outgoing Message (OGM) for DISA/ 32 resources/PBX (8
UCD resources for Direct Inward
System Access [DISA]/
Uniform Call Distribution
[UCD], 24 resources for 3-level
Automated Attendant [AA])
Dialling Emergency Call 24 digits, 5 entries
Quick Dialling 10 digits, 10 entries
System Speed Dialling 32 digits, 100 entries
Personal Speed Dialling 24 digits, 10 entries/extn.
One-touch Dialling 24 digits
Hot Line 32 digits
Redial 64 digits
Automatic Route Selection Leading Number Table 7 digits, 80 entries
(ARS)
Leading Number Exception Table 7 digits, 80 entries
ARS Carrier 4

270 Feature Guide

 4.1 Capacity of System Resources

Category Item KX-TEB308

Toll Restriction (TRS) Class of Service (COS) 5
Denied Code Table 11 digits, 80 entries
Exception Code Table 11 digits, 80 entries
Call Log Incoming Call Log 20 entries/extn.,
300 entries/PBX
Password System Password 4–7 digits
Extension Password 4 digits

Feature Guide 271

4.2 Tones/Ring Tones

4.2 Tones/Ring Tones

4.2.1 Tones/Ring Tones

Tone Patterns
Dial Tone 1 1s
Normal

[Brazil only]

1s

Dial Tone 2
1s
Any of the following features is
set:
• Absent Message
• Background Music
(BGM) (proprietary [Brazil only]
telephone [PT] only)
1s
• Call Forwarding
(FWD)
• Call Pickup Deny
• Data Line Security
• Do Not Disturb [Czech Republic only]
(DND)
• Extension Lock 1s
• Hot Line (single line
telephone [SLT] only)
• Message Waiting
(PT only)
• Remote Extension
Lock
• Timed Reminder
Dial Tone 3 1s
• When going off-hook
with an SLT that has
messages waiting
• When Account Code
Entry is performed
• When answering a
call from Timed
Reminder

272 Feature Guide

 4.2 Tones/Ring Tones

Busy Tones 1s

[Brazil only]
1s

[Czech Republic only]

1s

[New Zealand only]

1s

Reorder Tones 1s
The outside (CO) line you tried
to seize is not assigned or was
denied.

[Brazil only]
1s

[Czech Republic only]

1s

[Malaysia only]

1s

Ringback Tones 1s
Single (3-s interval)

Feature Guide 273

4.2 Tones/Ring Tones

Double (3-s interval) 1s

Single (5-s interval) 1s

Double (5-s interval) 1s

DND Tone 1s
The dialled extension is
refusing incoming calls.

Call Waiting Tone 1 15 s

Call Waiting Tone 2 1s

Single

Double 1s

Triple 1s

Hold Alarm Tone 15 s

A call has been on hold for
longer than the specified time.

Warning Tone (Outside 1s

(CO) Line Call Limitation)
This tone is sent 15 seconds
before the specified time for
disconnection.

Confirmation Tone 1 1s
The feature was set
successfully, or the Extension
Lock feature was set or
cancelled.

274 Feature Guide

 4.2 Tones/Ring Tones

Confirmation Tone 2
1s
The new feature setting was
the same as the previous
setting, or certain features
were successfully performed
or accessed (e.g., Call Hold,
Automatic Callback Busy).
Confirmation Tone 3 1s
Before the following features
activate:
• Retrieving a held call
• Picking up another
call
• Establishing a
conference call
• Paging/Answering a
paging
announcement

Feature Guide 275

4.2 Tones/Ring Tones

Ring Tone Patterns

Ring Tone Patterns

The following ring tone patterns can be assigned to incoming call types (outside (CO) line, intercom, or
doorphone calls), or are fixed for certain features (Hold Recall [outside (CO) line calls/intercom calls], Timed
Reminder, or Camp-on Recall).

Single 1s
• Selectable: outside (CO)
line calls, intercom calls,
doorphone calls
• Fixed: Hold Recall
[outside (CO) line calls]
Double 1s
• Selectable: outside (CO)
line calls, intercom calls,
doorphone calls
• Fixed: Hold Recall
[intercom calls]
Triple 1s
• Selectable: outside (CO)
line calls, intercom calls,
doorphone calls
• Fixed: Timed Reminder
S-Double 1s
• Selectable: doorphone
calls
• Fixed: Camp-on Recall

Ring Tone Patterns Sent from the Telephone Company (New Zealand only)
The following ring tone patterns sent from the telephone company can be detected for each outside (CO)
line.

Pattern 1 1s

Pattern 2 1s

Pattern 3 1s

276 Feature Guide

 4.2 Tones/Ring Tones

Pattern 4 1s

Doorphone Chime Patterns

The following doorphone chime patterns can be assigned to each doorphone when doorbells and door
chimes are connected to the PBX.

Pattern 1* 1s

Pattern 2* 1s

Pattern 3* 1s

Pattern 4* 1s

Pattern 5 1s

Pattern 6 1s

Pattern 7 1s

Pattern 8 1s

* Chime patterns 1 to 4 are played only one time during the doorphone ringing time.

Feature Guide 277

4.3 Revision History

4.3 Revision History

4.3.1 Version 2.0

New Contents
• 1.5.2.6 CO Busy Out

• 1.8.3 Budget Management

• 1.20.2 Call Charge Calculation

• 3.3.2 Programming Procedures

CO Busy Out [154]
CO Busy Out Check Time [155]
Call Charge Calculation—Registering Leading Numbers [161]
Call Charge Calculation—Time Table 1/2/3/4 [162/169/176/183]
Call Charge Table 1/2/3/4—Peak Flat Charge and Duration [163/170/177/184]
Call Charge Table 1/2/3/4—Peak Unit Charge and Duration [164/171/178/185]
Call Charge Table 1/2/3/4—Off Peak Flat Charge and Duration [165/172/179/186]
Call Charge Table 1/2/3/4—Off Peak Unit Charge and Duration [166/173/180/187]
Call Charge Table 1/2/3/4—Economy Flat Charge and Duration [167/174/181/188]
Call Charge Table 1/2/3/4—Economy Unit Charge and Duration [168/175/182/189]
Decimal Places [190]
Call Charge Calculation [441]
Call Charge Table Assignment [442]
LCD Display Mode [630]
Currency [921]
Call Charge Information SMDR Format 1 [922]
Call Charge Information SMDR Format 2 [923]
Secret Printing [924]
Budget Management [925]
Budget Limit Selection [926]

Changed Contents
• 1.5.2.2 Emergency Call

• 1.10.8 Outside (CO) Line Call Limitation

• 1.18.4 Display Information

• 1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording Feature

1.20.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

278 Feature Guide

 4.3 Revision History

1.20.1.2 Call Log Printout for Each Extension

• 2.2.4 Operator/Manager Features

• 2.3.2 PT Programming

• 3.3.1 Programming Instructions

• 4.2.1 Tones/Ring Tones

Feature Guide 279

4.3 Revision History

280 Feature Guide

 Index

Feature Guide 281

Index

Numerics C
1st Carrier Selection Code [359] 224 Call Charge Calculation 154
2-way Recording into the VPS 141 Call Charge Calculation [441] 237
3-level AA Assignment [540-549] 244 Call Charge Calculation—Registering Leading Numbers [161] 215
3-level Automated Attendant (AA) 107 Call Charge Calculation—Time Table 1/2/3/4 [162/169/176/183] 215
3-party Conference 99 Call Charge Information SMDR Format 1 [922] 263
5-party Conference 99 Call Charge Information SMDR Format 2 [923] 263
Call Charge Table 1/2/3/4—Economy Flat Charge and Duration [167/174/
A 181/188] 217
Absent Message 125 Call Charge Table 1/2/3/4—Economy Unit Charge and Duration [168/175/
Account Code [310] 222 182/189] 217
Account Code Entry 43 Call Charge Table 1/2/3/4—Off Peak Flat Charge and Duration [165/172/179/
Account Code Mode [605] 246 186] 216
Administrative Information Features 146 Call Charge Table 1/2/3/4—Off Peak Unit Charge and Duration [166/173/180/
Alternate Calling—Ring/Voice 39 187] 216
Alternate Receiving—Ring/Voice 39 Call Charge Table 1/2/3/4—Peak Flat Charge and Duration [163/170/177/
Answering Features 35 184] 215
Answering Features—OVERVIEW 35 Call Charge Table 1/2/3/4—Peak Unit Charge and Duration [164/171/178/
Appendix 269 185] 216
ARS CO Line Group [364] 225 Call Charge Table Assignment [442] 237
ARS Dial Tone [362] 224 Call Duration Counter Start [204] 218
ARS Inter-digit Time [363] 225 Call Forwarding (FWD) 31
ARS Modification—Added Number [361] 224 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) 30
ARS Modification—Removed Digits [360] 224 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features 30
ARS Selection [350] 223 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)—OVERVIEW 30
ARS —> Automatic Route Selection (ARS) 74 Call Forwarding Selection [963] 265
Audible Tone Features 162 Call Forwarding Start Time [202] 218
Authorisation and Itemised Billing Code Order [390] 226 Call Forwarding to CO Line [607] 247
Authorisation Code 77 Call Handling Features 13
Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-on) 62 Call Hold 92
Automatic Configuration for Outside (CO) Line Type 186 Call Log Next Page [927] 264
Automatic Designated Line Access [419] 232 Call Log Printout for Each Extension 152
Automatic Line Access (Local Access) 52 Call Park 94
Automatic Line Access [121] 210 Call Park Recall 94
Automatic Pause Insertion Code [311] 222 Call Pickup 37
Automatic Redial 58 Call Pickup Deny 37
Automatic Redial Interval [114] 208 Call Pickup Tone [117] 209
Automatic Redial Repeat Count [113] 208 Call Retrieving from a Telephone Answering Machine (TAM) 37
Automatic Rotation for CO Line Access [122] 210 Call Splitting 95
Automatic Route Selection (ARS) 74 Call Transfer 90
Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Features 74 Call Transfer to CO Line [606] 246
Automatic Time Adjustment 180 Call Transfer with Announcement 90
Automatic Time Adjustment [152] 214 Call Transfer without Announcement 90
Call Transfer—Screened —> Call Transfer with Announcement 90
Call Transfer—Unscreened —> Call Transfer without Announcement 90
B Call Waiting 22
Background Music (BGM) 106 Call Waiting Tone 64
Bell Frequency [120] 210 Caller ID 116
Bell-off Detection [213] 220 Caller ID [900] 260
BGM Control for APT [626] 252 Caller ID Area Code [901] 260
BGM —> Background Music (BGM) 106 Caller ID Automatic 0 Addition [905] 261
Break Ratio [123] 210 Caller ID Display on SLT 116
Budget Limit Selection [926] 264 Caller ID Features 116
Budget Management 71, 87 Caller ID Log Priority [904] 261
Budget Management [925] 264 Caller ID Modification for Local Calls [902] 260
Busy Line/Busy Party Features 62 Caller ID Modification for Long-distance Calls [903] 261
Busy Tones 273 Caller ID SMDR Format [906] 262
Buttons and Functions 194 Caller ID SMDR Printout [907] 262
Caller ID Type [910] 263

282 Feature Guide

 Index

Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection 89 DISA Incoming Assignment [516] 241
Capacity of System Resources 270 DISA Incoming Call Dial Mode [500] 237
Carrier Exception Code [300] 220 DISA Intercept Mode [507] 239
Circular Hunting 23 DISA No Dial Mode [510] 240
Class of Service (COS) 167 DISA Ring Time after Intercept [509] 239
Clear All OGMs of DISA/UCD [599] 245 DISA Ring Time before Intercept [508] 239
CO Busy Out 46 DISA Ringback Tone [531] 244
CO Busy Out [154] 214 DISA Security Code [512] 240
CO Busy Out Check Time [155] 214 DISA Security Code Digits [530] 244
CO Indicator [109] 207 DISA Security Mode [511] 240
CO Line Call Duration Limitation [613] 249 DISA Tone after Security Code [518] 242
CO Line Connection [400] 227 DISA Wait Time after OGM [505] 238
CO Line Group Number [404] 228 DISA —> Direct Inward System Access (DISA) 28, 108
CO Line Mode—Day/Night/Lunch [414-416] 230 Disconnect Time [422] 233
CO Line Ring Tone Pattern [423] 234 Display Information 136
Collect Call Block [425] (Brazil only) 234 Distinctive Ring Detection (DRD) [426] (New Zealand only) 235
Common Area Call Log Check [909] 262 Distinctive Ring Detection (DRD) for New Zealand 20
Conference 99 DND Override 34
Conference Features 98 DND Override [609] 247
Conference Features—OVERVIEW 98 DND Tone 274
Conference Pattern [116] 209 DND —> Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) 30
Conference Tone [105] 206 Do Not Disturb (DND) 34
Confirmation Tone 163 Door Open 103
Console Paired Telephone [004] 201 Door Open Duration [709] 256
Consultation Hold 97 Door Opener—Day/Night/Lunch [703-705] 254
Conversation Features 80 Doorbell/Door Chime 104
COS —> Class of Service (COS) 167 Doorphone Access Tone [707] 255
CO-to-CO Line Call Duration [205] 219 Doorphone Call 102
Country [995] 266 Doorphone Chime Assignment [711] 256
Country Setting 187 Doorphone Chime Pattern [712] 257
CPC Signal Detection—Incoming [420] 232 Doorphone Chime Patterns 277
CPC Signal Detection—Outgoing [421] 233 Doorphone Ring Time [708] 255
CPC —> Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection 89 Doorphone Ring Tone Pattern [706] 255
Currency [921] 263 Doorphone Ring/Chime [710] 256
Cyclic Tone Detection [513] 241 Doorphone Ringing—Day/Night/Lunch [700-702] 254
DRD Pattern 2 and 3 Ring Tone [433-434] (New Zealand only) 236
D DRD Ring Pattern 2 Extension Assignment—Day/Night/Lunch [427-429]
Data Line Security 84 (New Zealand only) 235
Date & Time [000] 199 DRD Ring Pattern 3 Extension Assignment—Day/Night/Lunch [430-432]
Decimal Places [190] 217 (New Zealand only) 236
Delayed Ringing 28 DRD —> Distinctive Ring Detection (DRD) for New Zealand 20
Delayed Ringing—Day/Night/Lunch [411-413] 230 DSS Console Jack Assignment [003] 201
Denied Code Tables 65 DSS Lamp Mode [112] 208
Dial Mode [401] 227 DSS Off-hook Mode [126] 211
Dial Tone 162 DTMF Integration [103] 206
Dial Type Selection 44 DTMF Integration Port [102] 206
Dialling Start Time [206] 219 DTMF Receiver Check [107] 207
DIL —> Direct In Line (DIL) 14 DTMF Time [210] 219
Direct In Line (DIL) 14
Direct Inward System Access (DISA) 108 E
Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Ring 28 EFA —> External Feature Access (EFA) 86
Direct One-touch Answering 35 Electronic Station Lockout —> Extension Lock 72
Direct Outside (CO) Line Access 52 Emergency Call 42
Directed Call Pickup 37 Emergency Number [309] 222
DISA AA Service 108 Entering Characters 196
DISA AA Wait Time [517] 242 Entering Manager Programming Mode 195
DISA Built-in AA [501] 238 Entering System Programming Mode 195
DISA Busy Mode [506] 239 Exception Code Tables 65
DISA Delayed Answer Time [504] 238 Exclusive Call Hold 92

Feature Guide 283

Index

Executive Busy Override 63 Hot Line 61

Executive Busy Override [608] 247 Hot Line Waiting Time [203] 218
Executive Busy Override Deny 63 Hunting Group Set [100] 205
Extension Controlling Features 160 Hunting Type [101] 205
Extension Feature Clear 160
Extension Group [600] 245 I
Extension Jack Configuration 166 Idle Extension Hunting 23
Extension Lock 72 Idle Line Preference 51
Extension Lock—CANCEL ALL 72 Incoming Call Features 14
Extension Name [604] 246 Incoming Call Indication Features 17
Extension Name in Cyrillic [616] 250 Incoming Call Indication Features—OVERVIEW 17
Extension Number [009] 203 Incoming Call Log 120
Extension Ring Tone Pattern [115] 209 Incoming Call Log Display Lock 121
Extension-to-CO Line Call Duration [212] 220 Incoming Outside (CO) Line Call Features 14
Extension-to-Outside (CO) Line Call Duration 87 Incoming Reverse [153] 214
External Feature Access (EFA) 86 Incoming/Outgoing Call Selection for Printing [802] 258
External Pager Access Tone [106] 207 Installation Manual References 2
Installing and Starting KX-TEB308 Maintenance Console 193
F Intercept Routing 15
Fault Recovery/Diagnostics 189 Intercept Routing—No Answer (IRNA) 15
FAX Connection [503] 238 Intercept Routing—No Dial 15
FAX Tone Detection [514] 241 Intercept Time for Internal DISA [515] 241
Feature Guide References 2 Intercom Call 39
Feature Highlights 5 Intercom Call Features 39
Feature Numbering 181 Inter-digit Time [208] 219
Firmware Upgrade 188 Internal Call Features 16
Firmware Version [998] 266 Internal Pulse Detection [614] 249
Fixed Buttons 130 Introduction 192
Fixed Line SMS Terminal Support 126 IRNA —> Intercept Routing—No Answer (IRNA) 15
Flash/Recall 85 Itemised Billing Code 77
Flash/Recall Key Mode [110] 207 Itemised Billing Code [389] 226
Flash/Recall Mode for a Locked Extension [108] 207
Flash/Recall Time [418] 232 K
Flexible Buttons 132 KX-T7700 Series Incoming Lamp Control [968] 266
Flexible Outward Dialling—Day/Night/Lunch [405-407] 229 KX-T7710 One-touch Dialling 57
Flexible Ringing—Day/Night/Lunch [408-410] 229 KX-T7710 One-touch Dialling [013] 205
FWD to Outside (CO) Line 31
FWD —> Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) 30
FWD—All Calls 31
L
FWD—Busy/No Answer 31 Last Number Redial 58
FWD—Follow Me 31 LCD Display Mode [630] 253
LCD Language [615] 249
LCD Time Display [010] 203
G LCS Recording Mode Set [620] 251
General Call Hold 92 LED Indication 134
Group 168 Line Preference Override 51
Group Call Pickup 37 Line Preference—Incoming 36
Line Preference—Outgoing 51
H Live Call Screening (LCS) 141
Handset/Headset Selection —> Headset Operation 83 Lockout 87
Hands-free Answerback 38 Log-in/Log-out 29
Hands-free Operation 80
Headset Operation 83 M
Hold Recall 92 Making Call Features 39
Hold Recall Time [200] 218 Memory Dialling Features 54
Holding Features 92 Memory Dialling Features—OVERVIEW 54
Hookswitch Flash Timing Range [207] 219 Message Features 123
Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Message Waiting 123
Host PBX) 48 Message Waiting for Another Extension [618] 250
Host PBX Access Code [403] 228

284 Feature Guide

 Index

Message Waiting for Another Extension Lock 123 Q

Microphone Mute 82
Quick Dialling 60
Music on Hold 96
Music on Hold [111] 208
R
N Receiving Calls 35
Receiving Group Features 23
No Dial Disconnection [211] 220
Redial 58
No Line Preference 36, 51
Redialling after Pulse to Tone Conversion [119] 210
Remote Extension Lock 72
O Remote Station Lock Control —> Remote Extension Lock 72
OGM Mute Time [519] 242 Remote Timed Reminder 161
One-touch Dialling 56 Reorder Tones 273
One-touch Transfer 90 Required Telephone 194
One-touch Transfer Using a DSS Button [005] 201 Reverse Circuit 45
Operator Assignment [008] 202 Revision History 278
Operator Call 174 Ring Tone Pattern Selection 19
Operator/Manager Features 173 Ring Tone Patterns 276
Optional Device Features 102 Ring Tone Patterns Sent from the Telephone Company (New Zealand
Outgoing Message (OGM) for DISA/UCD 107 only) 276
Outside (CO) Line Access 52 Ringback Tone Pattern [128] 211
Outside (CO) Line Call Features 41 Ringback Tones 273
Outside (CO) Line Call Features—OVERVIEW 41 Ringing Line Preference 36
Outside (CO) Line Call Limitation 87 Room Monitor 81
Outside (CO) Line Group Access 52 Room Monitor [612] 248
Outside (CO) Line Ringing Selection 18 Route 1-4 Authorisation Code [381-384] 225
Outside-to-Outside (CO-to-CO) Line Call Duration 87 Route 1-4 Exception Code [355-358] 223
Route 1-4 Itemised Billing [385-388] 226
P Route 1-4 Selection Code [351-354] 223
Paging 101
Paging Deny 101 S
Paging Features 101 Saved Number Redial 58
Paging—All Extensions 101 S-CO Line Access 52
Paging—All Extensions & External 101 Second Feature Numbering Plan [012] 204
Paging—External 101 Secret Dialling 55
Paging—Group 101 Secret Number SMDR Print Suppression [803] 258
Parallelled Telephone 88 Secret Printing [924] 264
Parallelled Telephone [610] 248 Seizing a Line Features 50
Password Security 192 Seizing a Line Features—OVERVIEW 50
Pause Insertion 47 SLT Caller ID [628] 252
Pause Time [417] 231 SLT Caller ID Line Access Number [151] 214
PC Programming 175, 193 SLT Caller ID Signalling Type [150] 213
Pickup Dialling —> Hot Line 61 SLT Fixed Bell Pattern [629] 253
Pickup Group [127] 211 SLT Hold Mode [104] 206
Polarity Reverse Detection [424] 234 SLT Message Waiting [619] 251
Polarity Reverse Detection —> Reverse Circuit 45 SLT Ring Bell-on Time [143] 212
Power Failure Connections 189 SLT Ring Wait Time for New Call [627] 252
Power Failure Restart 190 SLT Ring/Silence Ratio [142] 212
Power Failure Transfer 189 SMDR Account Code [805] 259
Prime Line Preference 36, 51 SMDR Language [806] 259
Programming Instructions 191, 194 SMDR Mode for Printing [929] 265
Programming Procedures 199 SMDR Parameter [801] 258
Proprietary Telephone (PT) Features 130 SMDR RS-232C Parameter [800] 257
PT Programming 178, 194 SMDR —> Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) 146
PT Programming References 2 SMS Centre Number for Receiving [145] 213
PT —> Proprietary Telephone (PT) Features 130 SMS Routing Table—CO [146] 213
Pulse Restriction [118] 209 SMS Routing Table—Extension [147] 213
Pulse Speed [402] 227 SMS —> Short Message Service (SMS) 126
Pulse to Tone Conversion 44 Speed Dialling—Personal/System 59
Station Feature Clear —> Extension Feature Clear 160

Feature Guide 285

Index

Station Hunting —> Idle Extension Hunting 23 VM 1 APT Port [130] 212
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) 146 VM —> Voice Mail Features 138
Station Message Detail Recording Feature 146 Voice Mail APT Integration 138
Station Programme Clear —> Extension Feature Clear 160 Voice Mail Features 138
Station Speed Dialling —> Personal Speed Dialling 59 Voice Mail Inband (DTMF) Integration 143
System Configuration and Administration Features 165
System Configuration—Hardware 166 W
System Configuration—Software 167 Walking COS 73
System Data Clear [999] 267 Warning Tone (Outside (CO) Line Call Limitation) 274
System Data Control 175
System Data Dump [804] 259
System Password [002] 200
System Requirements 193
System Speed Dialling Name [011] 204
System Speed Dialling Number [001] 199

T
TAM Extension [611] 248
TAM —> Call Retrieving from a Telephone Answering Machine (TAM) 37
Terminated Hunting 23
Time Service 170
Time Service Start Time [007] 202
Time Service Switching Mode [006] 202
Timed Reminder 161
Toll Restriction (TRS) 65
Toll Restriction (TRS) Features 65
Toll Restriction (TRS) Override by Account Code 69
Tones/Ring Tones 272
Transfer Recall 90
Transfer Recall Time [201] 218
Transferring Features 90
TRS Check after Answering [966] 265
TRS Check for * and # [125] 211
TRS Check Time after Answering [967] 266
TRS for System Speed Dialling 66
TRS —> Toll Restriction (TRS) Features 65
TRS-COS—Day/Night/Lunch [601-603] 245
TRS—COS 2-5 Denied Code [302-305] 221
TRS—Exception Code [306] 221
TRS—Extension Lock Class 68, 72
TRS—Extension Lock Class [312] 223
TRS—System Speed Dialling Class [301] 221

U
UCD Busy Mode [523] 243
UCD Busy Waiting Time [521] 242
UCD Group [520] 242
UCD Intercept Mode [524] 243
UCD OGM Message Interval Time [522] 242
UCD Ring Time after Intercept [526] 243
UCD Ring Time before Intercept [525] 243
UCD Waiting Message [527] 244
Unattended Conference 99
Unattended Conference Recall 99
Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) 25
User Manual References 2

V
Version 2.0 278

286 Feature Guide

 Index

Feature Guide 287

1-62, 4-chome, Minoshima, Hakata-ku, Fukuoka 812-8531, Japan

Copyright:
This material is copyrighted by Panasonic System Networks Co., Ltd., and may be reproduced for internal
use only. All other reproduction, in whole or in part, is prohibited without the written consent of Panasonic
System Networks Co., Ltd.

© Panasonic System Networks Co., Ltd. 2005

PSQX3826WA KK0505MN3010